__________________________________________________________
Buffalo River Landing
1 South Street
Buffalo, NY 14204
June 8th, 2015
Permit Set
Project Manual
__________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________
Buffalo River Landing
1 South Street
Buffalo, NY 14204
June 8th, 2015
CJS Project No. 1209
Permit Set
Project Manual
__________________________________________________________
Savarino Companies
500 Seneca, Room 590
Buffalo, New York 14204
Frontier Group of Companies
26 Mississippi Street, Suite 400
Buffalo, New York 14203
716.447.7587
Buffalo River Keepers
721 Main St.
Buffalo NY 14203
716.852.7483
CJS Architects
755 Seneca St.
Buffalo, New York 14210
716.856.6448
Tredo Engineers
755 Seneca St. Suite 202
Buffalo, New York 14210
716.876.7147
EBS Engineering
4050 Ridge Lea Rd. - Suite C
Amherst, NY 14228
716.836.9600
Upstate Fire Protection Engineering, PLLC
Liverpool, NY
315.935.6566
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 0505
03 1000
03 2000
03 3000
03 3713
03 5216
03 5400
UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
CONCRETE REINFORCING
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SHOTCRETE
LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE
CAST UNDERLAYMENT
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 0511
04 2000
04 2002
04 2731
MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING
UNIT MASONRY
SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 1200
05 3100
05 4000
05 5000
05 5100
05 5213
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
STEEL DECKING
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
METAL FABRICATIONS
METAL STAIRS
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 1000
06 1219
06 1500
06 1753
06 2000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS
WOOD DECKING
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
FINISH CARPENTRY
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 2100
07 2119
07 2500
07 4213
07 5323
07 7100
07 7200
07 8100
07 9005
07 9513
THERMAL INSULATION
FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION
WEATHER BARRIERS
METAL WALL PANELS
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER ROOFING (EPDM)
ROOF SPECIALTIES
ROOF ACCESSORIES
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
JOINT SEALERS
EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 1113
08 1116
08 1213
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
1209
Buffalo River Landing
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 1
6/10/2015
08 1416
08 1700
08 3100
08 3200
08 3323
08 3326
08 4313
08 4500
08 5200
08 7100
08 7110
08 7129
08 8000
08 9100
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
INTEGRATED DOOR OPENING ASSEMBLIES
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
SLIDING GLASS DOORS
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
TRANSLUCENT WALL AND ROOF ASSEMBLIES
WOOD WINDOWS
DOOR HARDWARE
BASIS OF DESIGN DOOR HARDWARE - HAGER
SLIDING AND FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE - HETTICH GRANT
GLAZING
LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 0561
09 2116
09 3000
09 5100
09 5423
09 6500
09 6800
09 6813
09 7200
09 9000
09 9723
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
TILING
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
LINEAR METAL CEILINGS
RESILIENT FLOORING
CARPETING
TILE CARPETING
WALL COVERINGS
PAINTING AND COATING
CONCRETE AND MASONRY COATINGS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 1400
10 4400
10 5500
SIGNAGE
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11 1200
11 3100
11 8227
PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
WASTE COMPACTORS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 3530
12 3600
12 4813
12 9300
12 9313
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
COUNTERTOPS
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
SITE FURNISHINGS
BICYCLE RACKS
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
14 2010
14 9100
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
FACILITY CHUTES
1209
Buffalo River Landing
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 2
6/10/2015
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 014110
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING SERVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public
authorities.
B. Certifications of materials, products or equipment: Respective Specifications Sections.
C. Test of materials, adjust and balance of products or equipment: Respective Specification
Sections.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide special inspections and testing in accordance with Chapter 17 of the Building Code of
New York State
B. The program of Special Inspections and Testing is a Quality Assurance program intended to
ensure that the work is performed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. This specification section is intended to inform the Contractor of the Owner’s quality assurance
program and extent of the Contractor’s responsibilities. This specification section is also
intended to notify the Special Inspectors, Testing Laboratories, and other Agents of the Special
Inspectors of their requirements and responsibilities.
1.03 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. Required inspections and tests are described in the attached Statement of Special Inspections
and in the individual specification sections for the items to be inspected or tested.
B. The services and quantities of testing specified are approximate and may vary. Actual services
and quantities of testing will be determined by the Owner and/or Architect and Construction
Manager during the construction period.
C. The Architect and Construction Manager will determine the locations for taking sample
specimens for testing in accordance with the specifications.
1.04 EMPLOYMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTOR AND AGENTS:
A. Special Inspectors must demonstrate, to the Engineer of Record and Building Official’s
satisfaction, experience and skills to satisfactorily conduct testing indicated without delaying the
progress of the work.
B. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of the Special Inspector’s to perform the
services specified herein; however, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of
those services which, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer (and Construction Manager), are
required due to the following:
1. Failure of materials or workmanship to meet contract requirements.
2. Materials or practices, not complying with the Specifications which could possibly result in
defective work thereby rendering it necessary or advisable to perform tests to determine
whether or not work is acceptable.
3. Changes in source, quality or characteristics of materials.
4. Site cured cylinders requested by the Contractor.
C. The Special Inspector shall retain the services of a full time registered Professional Engineer
who shall certify all test reports. The Engineer shall be responsible for the training of the
testing technicians and shall be in responsible charge of the field and laboratory testing
operations.
D. Special inspections shall be performed by Special Inspectors who are certified as identified
below, or are working under the direction of a registered Professional Engineer.
1. Technicians performing sampling and testing of concrete shall be ACI certified Concrete
Field Testing Technicians – Grade 1.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
01 4110 - 1
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
AND TESTING
2.
3.
4.
Inspectors performing inspections of concrete work such as inspections of concrete
placement, batching, reinforcing placement, curing and protection, shall be ACI certified
Concrete Construction Inspectors or ICBO certified Reinforced Concrete Special
Inspectors.
Technicians performing visual inspection of welding shall be AWS Certified Welding
Inspectors or ICBO certified Structural steel and Welding Special Inspectors; technicians
performing non-destructive testing such as ultrasonic testing, radiographic testing,
magnetic particle testing, or dye-penetrate testing shall be certified as an ASNT-TC Level
II or Level III technician.
Technicians performing standard tests described by specific ASTM Standards shall have
training in the performance of such tests and must be able to demonstrate either by oral or
written examination competence for the test to be conducted. They shall be under the
supervision of a licensed Professional Engineer and shall not be permitted to
independently evaluate test results.
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. COOPERATION AND ACCESS:
1. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and provide access to the work and to
manufacturers. Fabricator's facilities as required for the performance of their services.
2. Retain the latest set of construction drawings, field sketches, approved shop drawings,
and specification at the project site for use by the inspectors and testing technicians.
B. CASUAL LABOR AND FACILITIES:
Provide Casual Labor and Facilities:
1. To provide access to the work to be inspected or tested.
2. To obtain and handle samples at the site.
3. To facilitate inspections and tests.
4. To construct a storage box on the site of sufficient size to store cylinders, which will afford
protection, required by ASTM C-31.
C. SAMPLES:
1. Provide the laboratory with preliminary representative samples of materials to be tested, in
requested quantities.
2. When the source, quality or characteristic of an approved material changes or indicates
lack of compliance with contract requirements, submit additional samples of materials to
testing laboratory.
D. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS, LISTS, ETC.:
1. When requested by the Architect/Engineer, or the testing laboratory, the Contractor shall
immediately provide copies of mill reports, cutting lists, material bills, shipping bills, time
and place of shipment of materials to shop and field and any relevant data on previous
testing and investigations of materials.
E. NOTIFICATION:
1. Review the Statement of Special Inspections and be responsible for coordinating and
scheduling inspections and tests to facilitate the timely sequence of inspection and
testing, the Contractor shall give advanced notification to the testing laboratory and the
Architect/Engineer (and Construction Manager) that work has progressed to a point
where inspection and testing may proceed.
2. Advanced notification, shall be 48 hours (min.) prior to commencement of the following:
a. Site Preparation
1. Excavation for foundations and slab on grade.
2. Proof-rolling of slab on grade subgrade.
b. Soil Compaction:
1. Delivery of fill to the site.
2. Placement and compaction of fill or backfill.
c. Concrete:
1. Setting of reinforcing and formwork.
2. Placing concrete.
d. Masonry:
1. Delivery of masonry units.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
01 4110 - 2
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
AND TESTING
2. Setting of reinforcement.
3. Installation of mortar, grout and masonry units.
e. Structural Steel:
1. Shop fabrication.
2. Delivery.
3. Erection.
4. Alignment and leveling of structure.
5. Welding and bolting of connections.
f. Metal Deck:
1. Delivery.
2. Erection and fastening to structure.
F. CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL:
1. The Special Inspection program does not, in any way, relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to perform work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents or from implementing an effective Quality Control program. All work that is to
be subjected to Special Inspections shall first be reviewed by the Contractor’s quality
control personnel.
2. Services of testing laboratory retained by the Owner is for verification of Contractor's
compliance and if such tests of inspection indicates failure to comply with the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall bear all cost associated with additional testing and
inspection, after the work has been corrected, to verify compliance.
G. PATCHING:
Areas where samples are taken for purposes of testing shall be patched to the satisfaction of
the Architect.
1.06 LIMITS ON AUTHORITY
A. The Special Inspectors or Testing Laboratories may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on
the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. The Special Inspectors or Testing Laboratories will not have control over the Contractor’s
means and methods of construction.
C. The Special Inspectors or Testing Laboratories are not responsible for construction site safety.
D. The Special Inspectors or Testing laboratories have no authority to stop the work.
1.07 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. The Engineer of Record (EOR) will prepare the Statement of Special Inspections.
B. Submit the Statement of Special Inspections with the application for Building Permit.
1.08 RECORDS OF REPORTS
A. Submit Bi-Weekly reports of each inspection or test to the registered design professional in
responsible charge. Reports shall include:
1. Date of test or inspection.
2. Name of inspector or technician.
3. Location of specific areas tested or inspected.
4. Description of test or inspection and results.
5. Applicable ASTM standard.
6. Weather conditions.
7. Signature of special inspector or technician.
B. Submit interim reports to the Building Official which include all inspections and test reports
received that week. Provide copies to the Architect, and Contractor. The frequency of the
interim reports shall be as required by the Township.
C. Any discrepancies from the Contract Documents found during a Special Inspection shall be
immediately reported to the Contractor. If the discrepancies are not corrected, the Special
Inspector shall notify the EOR and Building Official. Reports shall document all discrepancies
identified and the corrective action taken.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
01 4110 - 3
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
AND TESTING
D. The Testing laboratory shall immediately notify the registered design professional in
responsible charge by telephone or fax of any test results which fail to comply with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. Provide a statement to the registered design professional in responsible charge at the
completion of the work requiring Special Inspections from each inspection agency and testing
laboratory that all work was completed in substantial conformance with the Contract
Documents and that all appropriate inspections and tests were performed.
1.09 FINAL REPORT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. Complete Final Report of Special Inspections by the registered design professional in
responsible charge and submit to the EOR and Building Official prior to the insurance of a
Certificate of use and Occupancy.
B. Use C.A.S.E. Form 102 – 2001 for the Final Report of Special Inspections.
C. The Final Report of Special Inspections will certify that all required inspections have been
performed and will itemize any discrepancies that were not corrected or resolved.
1.10 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Special Inspectors and Testing Laboratories shall submit to the EOR and Building Official
for review a copy of their qualifications which shall include the names and qualifications of each
of the individual inspectors and technicians who will be performing inspections or tests.
B. The Special Inspectors and Testing Laboratories shall disclose any past or present business
relationship or potential conflict of interest with the Contractor or any of the Subcontractors
whose work will be inspected or tested.
C. Submit three copies of the following:
1. Reports of all tests performed on soils, concrete, masonry, structural steel, joists, deck,
cold formed framing and paving.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FREQUENCY OF INSPECTIONS
A. Shall conform to the attached program of Special Inspections.
B. Definitions:
1. Periodic – In general, no more than a half day site visit, not less than 48 hours apart,
unless otherwise directed by Owner, Architect, or Engineer, or specified below.
2. Continuous – In general, the Special Inspector or Agent should be on site before, during,
and after operation requiring inspection.
3.02 EXISTING SUBGRADES
A. Field Verification
1. Observe proofrolling operations.
2. Identify location and extent of soft, loose, or yielded subgrade material that must be
removed or undercut.
3. Inspect undercut subgrade.
3.03 SOILS:
A. Laboratory Tests:
1. Existing site material
a. Cohesive soils and semi-cohesive soils: Provide one optimum moisture-maximum
density curve for each type of subgrade soil encountered in accordance with ASTM
D-1557.
b. Non-Cohesive soils: Provide maximum and minimum index densities and relative
densities for each type of subgrade soil encountered in accordance with ASTM
D-4254.
2. Borrow materials: Analyze each type of borrow materials before acceptance and delivery
to the site. Any change in the source or quality of the material will require a new series of
tests to determine acceptability.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
01 4110 - 4
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
AND TESTING
a.
b.
c.
d.
Particle size analysis of soils ASTM D-422, ASTM D-421, ASTM D-420, ASTM C-117
recommended practice.
Plasticity index determination ASTM D-4318.
Moisture-density curve determination ASTM D-1557 or relative density (ASTM
D-4253 or ASTM D-4254) as specified above.
Frost susceptibility analysis.
B. Field Tests:
1. The Owner's soils testing agency representative shall be present during delivery and
compaction of fill materials.
2. Establish suitable bearing grades for foundations and structural fill below slabs on grade.
3. Verify natural soil and structural fill subgrades for all slabs on grade.
4. In-place density tests: Test in accordance with ASTM D-1556 (sand cone method) or
ASTM D-2922 (nuclear method) on compacted natural soils or structural fill materials as
follows:
a. One test for each 2000 sq. ft. of slab on grade and pavement subgrade per 12" lift.
b. One test for each 200 cu. yd. of fill and backfill at exterior side of foundation walls
and unpaved areas.
5. Verify and monitor compaction operations and equipment.
6. Monitor proof-rolling operations for foundation and slab-of-grade subgrades.
3.04 CONCRETE:
A. Sampling:
1. Concrete samples shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C-172 "Sampling Fresh
Concrete".
2. Inspection/Testing proposed materials.
3. Aggregate Analysis.
4. Conduct compression tests to verify that design mix complies with Contract Documents.
B. Formwork and Reinforcing:
1. Inspect formwork and reinforcing prior to placing of concrete.
C. Batching Inspection:
1. Inspect batching, mixing and delivery operations for compliances with the Specifications.
D. Compressions Tests:
1. Label each compression test cylinder identifying the truckload of concrete from which
sample was taken and the exact location in construction where deposited.
2. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C-39 "Methods of Tests for Compressive
Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders". Include weight test.
3. One compression test, as used herein shall consist of 3 test cylinders made from
composite samples secured from a single truckload of concrete.
4. Break 1 test cylinder at 7 days and the remaining 2 at 28 days. If desired by the architect,
engineer, or construction manager a fourth test cylinder can be made and held for 56
days.
E. One compression test will be required for each of the following conditions:
1. Each 50 cu. yd. of concrete or fraction thereof.
2. Each class of concrete placed in one day.
F. Slump Tests:
1. Slump test shall be made in accordance with ASTM C-143 "Methods for Slump of
Portland Cement Concrete".
2. Test Slump of concrete at same frequency and from same truckload as compression tests
and more often when directed by the Owner's representative.
G. Air Content Tests:
1. Determine air content by ASTM C-231 "Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Volumetric Method".
2. Determine air content at same frequency and from same truckload as for compression
tests.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
01 4110 - 5
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
AND TESTING
3.05 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Shop Testing and Inspection:
1. Verify and monitor all welder qualifications, welding procedures and welding processes.
2. Monitor fabrication operations.
3. Review all mill reports.
4. Visually inspect and measure weld profiles, at random, prior to application of paint.
5. Review Shop Quality Control Manual and Procedures with shop foreman.
B. Field Testing and Inspection:
1. Visual inspection:
a. Verify and monitor welder qualifications and welding processes.
b. Inspect field erection of structural elements.
c. Inspect field bolting operations.
d. Inspect field welding operations.
e. Inspect anchor bolt installation and tightening.
2. High Strength Bolted Connections
a. Test all bolted connections for conformance with the AISC "Specification for
Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", 2000 edition.
3. Magnetic Particle Testing
a. Test 5% of field fillet welds, at random, final pass only for conformance with ASTM
E709 and ASTM E1444.
4. Ultrasonic Testing
a. Test 100% of all field partial and full penetration welds, at random, for conformance
with ASTM E164 and AWS D1.1.
3.06 UNIT MASONRY
A. Brick: Test each type, grade and class of brick per ASTM C67.
B. Concrete masonry units: Test each type, class and grade per ASTM C140.
C. Inspect rebar reinforcing, joint reinforcing, ties and anchors for general compliance with the
Contract Documents.
D. Mortar: Test one set of three cubes per ASTM C780 for each days work or every 5000 sq. ft. of
wall area, whichever is the lesser.
E. Grout: Test on set of three compression test cylinders per ASTM C-1019 for each days work or
every 25 cu. yds., whichever is the lesser.
F. Masonry Prisms:
1. Prism tests shall be performed for the purpose of checking the compressive strength of
each masonry assembly, including grouted cells but excluding reinforced cells and face
brick.
2. Test one set of three prisms per ASTM E447, Method B, for each 5000 sq. ft. of each type
of wall construction or a minimum of three sets for the project, whichever provides the
greater number of sets.
3.07
METAL DECKING
A. Visual Inspection
1. Verify and monitor welder’s qualifications and welding processes.
2. Inspect field erection procedures for metal decking.
3. Inspect field welding operations.
4. Inspect mechanical fastening operations.
3.08 WOOD
A. Verify that each Fabricator maintains a complete, accurate, detailed fabrication and quality
control procedure evaluated relative to the Code requirements and Fabricator’s scope of work.
B. Inspect Fabricator’s Plant based on program described above.
C. Review the following connections during construction:
1. Field Gluing – Ensure that all subflooring is glued with approve construction adhesive.
2. Nailing – Verify size and spacing of nails for:
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
01 4110 - 6
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
AND TESTING
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
Sheathing to wall studs at shear walls.
Subflooring to floor joists at floor levels.
Roof Sheathing to framing.
Confirm proper installation of additional nails required by the construction documents
including but not limited to drag struts, holddown locations, braces, etc.
Bolting
a.
Confirm size, spacing, and projection of sill bolts.
b.
Confirm size, spacing and location of holddown anchors.
c.
Confirm size and spacing of ledge bolts.
d.
Confirm proper installation of additional bolts required by the construction
documents including but not limited to drag struts, holddown locations, braces, etc.
Anchoring
Confirm type, quantity and locations of Simpson-type metal framing anchors such as
holddowns, straps, hurricane ties, framing hangers, etc.
D. Verify general compliance with construction documents and manufacturer’s recommended
procedures including the installation of additional blocking, bridging, perimeter bracing, etc.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
01 4110 - 7
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
AND TESTING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Furnish all labor, material and equipment necessary to complete all cast-in-place
concrete, reinforcement, formwork, and related work.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit 3 copies of the following:
1. Shop Drawings
a. Bar reinforcement shop drawings shall include setting plans, wall elevations, bending
diagrams, cutting lists, and other information so as to completely and unambiguously
define and establish the location, spacing, size, length, bending, shape, splicing,
keying at construction joints and all other pertinent information as required.
Drawings shall show grades of reinforcing steel. Opposite hand reinforcing shall be
detailed separately. Wall reinforcing shall be detailed on wall elevations. Each shop
drawing shall show splice length for every size and type of bar used.
b. Type, size and location of all accessories required for the proper assembling, placing
and support of the reinforcement.
c. All openings, depressions, construction and control joints, trenches, sleeves, inserts
and all other project requirements affecting reinforcing details and placing.
d. Placement drawings indicating joint layout, types, location, and dimensions for the
following:
1. Slabs on Grade
2. Walls
3. Slabs on Deck
B. Manufacturer's Data:
For standard factory manufactured materials.
C. Proposed concrete design mixes. 3 copies of proposed mix and 3 copies of back-up data.
1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Comply with the provisions of ACI-301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete”.
B. Perform all work in accordance with rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. In
the absence of other authorities comply with State Building Code. In case of conflict most
stringent shall govern.
1.04 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR
A. The Contractor alone shall be fully responsible for the design, strength, safety and adequacy of
all formwork, shoring, bracing and all methods of construction.
1.05 INSPECTION, TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL
A. A Testing agency will be employed by the Owner to verify the acceptability of materials and the
design of the basic concrete mixes.
B. The Owner shall pay for the cost of the services of the testing agency except that the
Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of those services, which in the opinion of the
Architect, are required because of the following:
1. Failure of materials or workmanship to meet Contract requirements.
2. Materials or practices, not complying with the Specifications, which could possibly result in
defective work thereby rendering it necessary or advisable to perform tests to determine
whether or not work is acceptable.
3. Changes in source, quality or characteristics of materials.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
01 4110 - 1
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
AND TESTING
4.
5.
Wasted time of inspectors because of cancellations or delays of concrete placement or
other work.
Site cured cylinders requested by the Contractor to verify strengths for removal of forms.
C. In general, concrete testing will consist of one set of 3 cylinders for each days casting or every
50 cu. yds.
D. The Contractor shall cooperate by allowing clear and safe access to the work for sampling,
inspection and storage of specimens and equipment. He shall construct a storage box on the
site of sufficient size to store 24 cylinders and which will afford the protection required by ASTM
C31, Paragraph 7 (A).
E. Those portions of the structure that do not meet the Contract requirements shall be corrected
or removed and replaced as directed by the Architect, and all cost of correction, removal and
replacement, shall be at the Contractor's expense.
F. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and testing agency not less that 24 hrs. in advance of
the starting of any project concrete operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Exposed Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal framed-plywood faced or other acceptable panel
type material to provide continuous, straight smooth exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest
practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Use overlaid plywood complying with US product standard PS-1 “A-C or B-B High Density
Overlaid Concrete form”, Class I
B. Concealed Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber
dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for a tight fit.
1. Thickness as required for spans and pressures.
C. Form Ties:
1. Shall be of approved design, minimum working strength 3,000 lbs. each, so adjustable as
to permit complete tightening of forms. After removal of protruding part of tie no metal to
be nearer than 1-1/2" to face of concrete. Ties at exposed surfaces shall have wood,
plastic or metal cones. Ties below grade shall have water seal washers.
D. Form Release Agent Shall Be of commercial formulation with maximum VOC of 450 mg/l that
will not bond with, stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
1. Rich-Cote as manufactured by Richmond Screw Anchor Co., Inc.
2. Formshield as manufactured by W.R. Grace and Co.
3. Bay Cote as manufactured by Bay Oil Co.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Bar Reinforcement - Newly rolled billet steel conforming to the following:
1. ASTM A615 Grade 40 for ties, stirrups and bars to be welded. Welded bars shall also
comply with ASTM A706.
2. ASTM A615 Grade 60 for all other bars.
B. Welded wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A185. Sizes as shown on the
Drawings. Deliver in sheets, not in rolls.
C. Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Accessories shall be as manufactured by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc., Dayton
Sure-Grip and Shore Co., R.K.L. Building Specialties Co., Inc. or equal.
2. Accessories shall include all spacers, chairs, ties, slab bolsters, clips, chair bars, and
other devices for properly assembling, placing, spacing, supporting, and fastening the
reinforcement.
3. Accessories in contact with surfaces exposed to view in the finished work shall conform to
CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Class C or Class E.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS RELATED MATERIALS
A. Non-shrink grout shall be a mixture of water and a specially formulated packaged mixture
approved by the Architect/Engineer, such as Masterflow 713 by Master Builders, EUCO N-S by
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
03 3000 - 2
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Euclid Chemical Co., Crystex by L and M Construction Chemicals, or Sonogrout Hyflow by
Sonneborn-Contech.
B. Waterstops shall be extruded from new stock polyvinyl chloride. Provide flat dumbbell type or
center – bulb type waterstops at construction joints where indicated.
C. 10 Mil polyethylene shall be installed under all slabs on grade, and shall be used in the widest
possible width. Joints shall be lapped a minimum of 6".
D. Concrete Curing and Sealing Compound:
Liquid membrane forming type conforming to ASTM C309, type I, class A, VOC compliant.
Acceptable are:
1. Kure-N-Seal WB30 by Sonneborn Contech.
2. Super Diamond Cure by Euclid Chemical Company.
3. Masterkure by Master Builders Company.
4. Dekote 30 by W.R. Grace Company.
E. Joint Filler shall be preformed filler provided at slab expansion and control joints, joints between
floor slabs and walls, and other isolation joints. Acceptable are:
1. Precompressed, impregnated open foam cell.
2. Asphalt saturated fiberboard complying with ASTM D1751.
3. Granulated cork between saturated felt or glass fiber felt complying with ASTM D1752,
Type H.
2.04 CONCRETE MIX MATERIALS
A. Cement - Portland Cement, ASTM C150 Type I or Type II.
B. Fine aggregate (normal weight) shall consist of washed, inert, natural sand conforming to
ASTM C-33.
C. Coarse aggregate (normal weight) shall consist of well graded, crushed stone or washed gravel
conforming to ASTM C-33, 3/4" size.
D. Lightweight fine and coarse aggregates – rotary kiln, expanded clay or shale conforming to
ASTM C330 with FSP not less than 6.0, such as Masslite, Norlite, Solite or approved equal,
aggregate sizes shall include fine aggregates designated as “sand size”, and coarse aggregate
designated as “graded ¾” size”.
E. Water shall be potable.
F. Water Reducing Admixture, ASTM A494, type A:
"WRDA" - W.R. Grace Co.
"PDA25" - Protex Industries, Inc.
"Pozzolith 200N or 122N" Master Builders Co.
G. Air Entraining Agent, ASTM C260:
"Darex AEA" - W.R. Grace Co.
"Air Mix" - The Euclid Chemical Co.
"MB-VR" - Master Builders Co.
2.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. It is the intent of this Specification to secure, for every part of the work, concrete of
homogeneous structure which, when hardened, will have the required strength, appearance
and resistance to weathering.
B. Basic mix proportions shall be established by the Contractor by means of current laboratory
tests made with the constituents to be used in the work. If suitable data are not available,
Contractor shall engage a testing laboratory to provide them.
C. Proportions shall be selected to produce an average strength at least 1200 PSI greater than
the normal design strength. (Unless standard deviation data are available to justify a lesser
factor).
D. Concrete in pavements and where flat surfaces are exposed to the weather shall have an
entrained air content of 6 percent +/- 1 percent. All other concrete shall have an entrapped air
content of 3-1/2 percent +1, -2 percent.
E. The consistency of the concrete at time of deposit as measured by ASTM C143, "Standard
Method of Test for Slump" shall be as follows:
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
03 3000 - 3
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Portion of the Structure
Pavements and slab on ground
Footings
Reinforced slabs, beams
Reinforced walls, columns
Slump
3" +/- 1"
3" +/- 1"
3" +/- 1"
4" +/- 1"
F. No concrete may be placed in the work until the appropriate design mix has been reviewed and
accepted by the Architect/Engineer.
G. Structural lightweight concrete: shall have an oven dry unit weight less than 112 PCF and a
corresponding “wet density” not to exceed 121 PCF.
H. If, during the progress of the work, any difficulty should occur in securing concrete of the
required workability and strength, the Architect may order such changes in the proportions or
materials, or both, as may be necessary. Any changes so ordered shall be made at the
Contractor's expense.
2.06 MIXING AND DELIVERY OF CONCRETE
A. All concrete shall be ready-mixed produced by a plant acceptable to the Architect. All
constituents, including admixtures, shall be batched at the central batch plant.
B. Cold weather requirements: When the air temperature is at or below 45 degrees F, or when
weather reports indicate that the air temperature may fall below 45 degrees F within 24 hrs
immediately following the completion of concrete placement, the mixing water and, if
necessary, the aggregates shall be heated so that the concrete shall have a temperature of 55
degrees to 80 degrees when placed. If the mixing water is heated, it shall not have a
temperature in excess of 140 degrees F at the time it is added to the cement and aggregates.
C. Hot weather requirements: During hot weather the concrete shall, at the time it is placed, have
a temperature from 55 to 80 degrees F but never above 90 degrees F. Provide crushed ice in
lieu of equal weight of mixing water if necessary. Ice must be completely dissolved before
placing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF FORMS AND SHORING
A. Forms shall be so designed by the Contractor to withstand all dead and live loads, including
construction live loads, and to not move out of specified tolerances for line and elevation.
Forms and form accessories shall be so designed that upon removal they will in no way
damage concrete surfaces.
B. Forms shall be built mortar-tight.
C. Holes for concrete placement through sides of forms shall not be used.
D. Forms for beams and other horizontal surfaces shall be constructed with adequate camber
resulting in level surfaces before forms are removed.
E. Before form materials are re-used, surfaces that will be in contact with freshly cast concrete
shall be thoroughly cleaned, damaged areas repaired, and all projecting nails withdrawn.
F. Before reinforcement is placed on or against formwork, surfaces of forms coming in contact
with fresh concrete shall be cleaned and then treated with approved form release agent.
G. Set and maintain concrete formwork to insure completed work is within the tolerance limits
listed in ACI 347.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Joints not indicated on Plans shall be located and constructed so as to least impair strength
and appearance of work.
3.03 COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Install all embedded items to conform to the requirements of ACI 318 and as specified below.
Do not install any accessories until the affected trade has verified their type and location.
B. Coordinate the installation of all inserts required by other trades prior to placing of reinforcing
steel.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
03 3000 - 4
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
C. Install anchor bolts, etc., furnished by other Sections. Use line and transit to locate anchor
bolts and secure with templates to prevent displacement during concreting operations. Survey
of completed anchor bolt placement and submit discrepancy reports to Architect/Engineer
immediately for resolution prior to proceeding with erection of other trades.
D. Provide steel sleeves for pipes passing through concrete.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing shall be accurately placed and rigidly secured in position.
B. Tie reinforcing with annealed #18 gauge (min.) wire, and bend all wire back beyond general
plane of reinforcing.
C. Welded wire fabric reinforcement in slabs shall be continuous, shall have joints lapped at least
one full mesh, but not less than 6" and shall be supported at proper elevations by accessories.
D. Bending, Tack welding, Cutting or substituting reinforcement in the field, other than shown on
the Contract Drawings, in any manner is prohibited, unless specific approval for each case is
given by the Architect or his designate.
E. At the time the concrete is placed, all reinforcement shall be free from excessive rust, scale, or
other coatings, which might destroy or reduce the bond.
F. Before concrete is cast, check all reinforcement after it is placed to insure that reinforcement
conforms to Contract Drawings and approved shop detail drawings and Specification
requirements. Such checking shall be done only by qualified, experienced personnel. In
addition, the Architect's representative shall be notified at least 36 hrs prior to concrete
placement and given the opportunity to inspect the completed reinforcement and formwork
before concrete placement.
3.05 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Transport concrete mixes to place of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods, which
prevent segregation.
B. Remove water and all foreign matter from place of deposit. Place no concrete on frozen soil.
C. Calcium chloride shall not be used anywhere on the site for any purpose.
D. At construction joints, the surfaces of the concrete already placed shall be thoroughly cleaned
of foreign materials and laitance, dampened with water and "Euco Weld" by the Euclid
Chemical Company or approved equal, shall be applied. New concrete shall be placed after
the bonding compound has dried.
E. Concrete shall be placed in such a manner as will prevent segregation.
F. Vertical lifts shall not exceed 18".
G. Concrete, during and immediately after depositing, shall be thoroughly compacted by means of
suitable internal type vibrators.
H. Chutes, hoppers, spouts, adjacent work, etc., shall be thoroughly cleaned before and after
each placement.
I.
All structural slabs and slabs on grade shall be finished to exact elevations shown on the
drawings. The slab thickness shall be increased where necessary to compensate for all
settlements and deflection due to the weight of the wet concrete.
3.06 REPAIR AND FINISH OF CONCRETE SURFACES
A. Concrete surfaces shall be repaired by using either the same material as originally cast or by
use of a dry-pack material. Areas affected shall be chipped back square and to a depth of 1"
min. Holes shall then be moistened with water for minimum of 2 hrs. Then followed by a brush
coat of Eucoweld as manufactured by Euclid Chemical Co. As soon as Eucoweld becomes
tacky, immediately plug the hole with a dry pack material consisting of 1:1-1/2 mixture of
cement and concrete sand mixed slightly damp to the touch. Hammer the dry-pack into the
hole until dense and excess of paste appears on the surface. Finish the patch to the same
texture as surrounding concrete. Color of patch after curing shall match adjacent concrete
exactly. Adjust color if necessary using white cement or limestone aggregate.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
03 3000 - 5
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
3.07 FINISHING OF FORMED CONCRETE SURFACES
A. Formed concrete surfaces to be painted or exposed to view in the finished work shall be
finished as follows:
1.
2.
As soon as the forms have been stripped, fins and other projections shall be removed,
surface defects shall be patched, and repairs to defective concrete and honeycombed
areas shall be made, clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by
the leakage of concrete, to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
Immediately after removal of forms, remove form tie plugs. Holes shall then be promptly
filled upon stripping as follows: Moisten the hole with water, followed by a 1/16" brush
coat of neat cement slurry mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately plug
the hole with a 1:1.5 mixture of cement and concrete sand mixed slightly damp to the
touch (just short of balling). Hammer the grout into the hole until dense, and an excess of
paste appears on the surface in the form of a spiderweb. Fill hole flush with concrete
surface and finish smooth.
3.08 FINISHING FLATWORK
A. Provide slab surface of following specified flatness and levelness when tested in accordance
with ASTM E1155. Remove surface irregularities to provide a continuous smooth finish.
B. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slab
surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin
film finish coating system.
1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final
troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface.
Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface leveled to tolerances FF 30-FL 18,
minimum overall composite and FF 15 – FL 10 minimum local value and a Waviness
Index WI2-10 of 0.14 inches. Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through
applied floor covering system.
C. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set
mortar, apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface
by fine brooming.
D. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and
ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiberbristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordination required final finish with
Architect before application.
3.09 CURING, PROTECTION AND FORM REMOVAL
A. Formed surfaces shall be periodically sprayed with water while forms are in place and, after
forms are stripped, kept continuously wet and at a minimum temperature of 50 degrees F for 7
days.
B. Unformed surfaces such as slabs shall be moist cured at a minimum temperature of 50
degrees F for 7 days or given 2 successive uniform coatings of approved curing and sealing
compound. Each coat shall consist of not less than 1 gal to 400 sq. ft.
C. Cold weather protection - When the air temperature is at or below 45 degrees F or when
weather reports indicate that the temperature may fall below 45 degrees F within the 24 hr.
period following placement of concrete, take all adequate and proper measures as required to
maintain the temperature of the concrete between 50 degrees F and 70 degrees F for the
specified curing period and to protect the concrete against damage by freezing or the cold,
including but not limited to the following:
1. Ascertain that the requirements for heating of aggregates and water have been followed.
2. Heat formwork, reinforcing and underlying subgrades with live saturated steam so as to
raise the temperature well above the freezing point. Concrete surfaces shall be covered
to prevent direct contact with the steam.
3. After placing of concrete, protect against cold by means of tight covering and supply of
sufficient heat, where required, to maintain the temperature of the concrete at a
temperature of 50 to 70 degrees F for at least 7 days after placement of concrete. The
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
03 3000 - 6
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
4.
concrete shall not be protected with salt, hay, manure or any other material containing live
or organic acids. Concrete shall be kept continually moist during the curing periods.
The section to be concreted shall be completely housed or enclosed wherever practicable
before placing of concrete, in a manner that will insure the maintenance of the required
temperatures. Such enclosures shall be left in place during the curing period.
D. Hot weather protection - Take special care during the concreting operations during hot or dry
weather. Wet forms just before placing of concrete and keep exposed surface continuously
damp. Take special precautions in placing of slabs in unshaded locations so as to prevent
flash setting of concrete. Provide a continuous fog spray of water immediately after screeding
and maintain in moist condition and take such other protective measures as required to prevent
damage from flash setting of concrete. Do not use retardant admixtures, other than specified
by the Architect. Except as modified above, follow procedures as outlined in ACI 305.
E. Removal of Forms:
1. Remove forms only after concrete has attained sufficient strength to support its own
weight and all loads thereon.
3.10 GROUTING OF ANCHOR BOLTS AND BASE PLATES
A. Grout Mixture: Use an approved packaged grout mix with the minimum amount of water
required to produce a flowable grout. Extend grout with 3/8” coarse aggregate for grout
placement over 2 inches thick.
B. Mixing: Per approved grout manufacturer’s printed instructions. Do not mix more grout than can
be placed within twenty (20) minutes.
C. Preparation:
1. Remove all defective concrete, laitance, dirt, etc. from the concrete surface. Saturate the
surface of the concrete thoroughly with clean water for at least 24 hours. Remove free
water just prior to placing the grout.
2. Clean, align, and level the base plate into final position and maintain that position during
grouting. Bring the concrete and plate to be grouted to a temperature between 65 degrees
to 90 degrees F. just prior to grouting.
D. Grouting:
1. Place the grout quickly and continuously to provide complete bearing and avoid air
entrapment.
2. After the grout has acquired its initial set, cut off all unconfined, exposed edges, leaving
slopes “shoulders”. Paint the entire area within 24 hours with an approved curing
compound.
END OF SECTION 03310
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
03 3000 - 7
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 04 2000
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concrete Block.
B.
Reinforcement and Anchorage.
C.
Flashings.
D.
Lintels.
E.
Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry.
B.
Section 04 0511 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting.
C.
Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications. For loose lintels.
D.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Nailing strips built into masonry.
E.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures
and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011.
B.
ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire;
2009a.
C.
ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2013.
D.
ASTM C1148 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Drying Shrinkage of Masonry Mortar;
1992a (Reapproved 2008).
E.
ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2012.
F.
ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength; 2009.
G.
ASTM E514/E514M - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through
Masonry; 2011.
H.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section; require attendance by all relevant installers.
B.
Responsibility of the Contractor: The contractor alone shall be fully responsible for the design,
strength, safety and adequacy of all shoring, bracing and all methods of construction, and for
the strength, consistency, finish and general quality of masonry. The specifying herein of
requirements for construction methods, preliminary approvals by the Architect, inspection,
testing and quality control performed by the Owner's testing agency or any other requirements
of the Specifications shall be construed as the minimum acceptable, and shall not eliminate,
lessen or restrict in any manner the responsibility of the Contractor for all construction methods
and for providing completed masonry assembly that fully meets the strength, appearance, and
all other requirements of the Specifications and Drawings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, control
joint fillers, anchors, non-chloride accelerators, and other masonry accessories.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
04 2000 - 1
UNIT MASONRY
C.
Samples: Submit 1 sample of decorative block units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of
color range.
1. Samples to Testing Agency: Mortar and grout constituents, including admixtures.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.
E.
Shop drawings: Bar reinforcement shop drawings shall include setting plans, wall elevations,
bending diagrams, cutting lists, and other information so as to completely and unambiguously
define and establish the location, spacing, size, length, bending, shape, splicing and all other
pertinent information as required. Drawings show grades of reinforcing steel, opposite hand
reinforcing shall be detailed separately. Wall reinforcing shall be detailed on wall elevations,
each shop drawing shall show splice length for every size and type of bar used.
F.
Mill Reports: Submit certified copies of mill reports for reinforcing steel, including statement of
compliance with specified ASTM standards.
G.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that water repellent admixture manufacturer has certified
masonry unit manufacturer as an approved user of water repellent admixture in the
manufacture of concrete block.
H.
Test Reports:
1. Concrete masonry manufacturer's test reports for units with integral water repellent
admixture.
2. Proposed mortar design mixes, including analysis of aggregates.
3. Proposed grout design mixes, including analysis of aggregates and methods proposed for
placing grout.
I.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements Product Requirements, for additional
provisions.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the
contract documents.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.
B.
Fire Rated Assemblies: Conform to applicable code for UL Assembly No. U905.
1.07 INSPECTION, TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL
A.
A testing agency will be employed by the Owner to verify the acceptability of materials and
design of the basic mortar and grout mixes.
B.
Since the requirements throughout this section are written with the intent to secure the best
result, it is recognized that perhaps certain deviations may be advisable under the project
conditions. Any such deviations may be allowed only after examination by and upon the written
authorization of the Architect.
C.
The contractor shall carry out diligently and without delay those corrections as directed by the
Construction Manager when construction operations indicate the Specification requirements or
construction practices are being or about to be violated.
D.
Coordinate with the testing agency to insure that materials are supplied, sampled, and tested
so as not to delay the progress of the job whenever the source, quality or characteristics of the
approved material changes or indicates lack of compliance with the contract requirements. The
Contractor shall resubmit additional materials for the testing to sample.
E.
The Owner shall pay for the cost of the services of the testing agency except that the
Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of those services which, in the opinion of the
Architect, are required because of the following:
1. Failure of materials or workmanship to meet the contract requirements.
2. Materials or practices, not complying with the Specifications, which could possibly result in
defective work thereby rendering it necessary or advisable to perform tests to determine
whether or not work is acceptable.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
04 2000 - 2
UNIT MASONRY
3.
4.
Changes in source, quality or characteristics of materials.
Wasted time of inspectors because of cancellations or delays of masonry placement or
other work.
F.
In general, testing shall consist of the following:
1. CMU: One set of three samples for the purpose of testing the comprehensive strength of
masonry units.
2. Grout: One set of three samples for each days casting or every 25 cu. yds. whichever is
the lesser, plus slump tests, entrained air tests, etc... as determined by the
Architect/Engineer.
3. Mortar: One set of three cubes for each days work or every 5000 sq. ft. of wall area
whichever is the lesser, plus entrained air tests etc... as determined by the
Architect/Engineer.
G.
Masonry Prisms
1. Construct a set of three (3) prisms each for the purpose of testing the compressive
strength of the masonry assembly for the reinforced masonry, face brick to be excluded.
a. Prisms shall be constructed including all typical conditions, i.e. grouted cells, ties,
etc...but excluding vertical reinforcing bars.
2. Construct and test a minimum of one laboratory prism set, prior to delivery of materials to
the project site confirming required prism strength.
H.
The Contractor shall cooperate by allowing clear and safe access to the work for sampling,
inspection and storage of specimens and equipment.
I.
If any strength test of laboratory cured cubes or cylinders falls below the required strength by
more than 300 psi, or if observations or other evidence indicates deficiencies in protection or
curing, or if the mortar or grout is suspected of having been frozen, steps shall be taken to
assure that load carrying capacity of the masonry is not jeopardized.
J.
If, in the judgment of the Architect, the ultimate load carrying capacity or durability has been
significantly reduced, the masonry shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense
unless the Architect deems it appropriate to take field cut prisms. In such case, three prisms
shall be taken for each strength test more than 500 psi below the required strength.
K.
Those portions of the structure that do not meet the Contract requirements based on
appearance or for any other aesthetic reason shall be corrected or removed and replaced as
directed by the Architect and all cost of corrections, removal and replacement, shall be at the
Contractors expense.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A.
Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 10 feet long by 10 feet high; include mortar
and accessories and structural backup in mock-up.
B.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and
contamination by other materials.
1. Masonry sand shall be covered to prevent the entrance of water from rain or melting snow
and to prevent contamination from all sources.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1. Conform with ASTM C90, hollow load-bearing concrete masonry units, Grade N, Type 1.
2. Aggregate: Normal weight, conforming to ASTM C331, excluding cinders.
3. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as
indicated on the drawings for specific locations.
4. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners, lintels, and headers.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
04 2000 - 3
UNIT MASONRY
a.
5.
For vertically reinforced masonry use two-core open-end A shapes. This will facilitate
the placement of the units around the reinforcing.
Units with Integral Water Repellent: Concrete block units as specified in this section with
polymeric liquid admixture added to concrete masonry units at the time of manufacture.
a. Performance of Units with Integral Water Repellent:
1) Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514 and for a minimum of 72
hours.
(a) No water visible on back of wall above flashing at the end of 24 hours.
(b) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.032 gallons per
hour at the end of 24 hours.
(c) No more than 25% of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of test.
2) Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1357; minimum 10% increase.
3) Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5% decrease.
4) Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5% increase in shrinkage.
b. Use only in combination with mortar and grout that also has integral water repellent
admixture.
c. Use water repellent admixtures for masonry units, mortar and grout by a single
manufacturer.
d. Manufacturers:
1) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 GROUT MATERIAL
A.
Grout for reinforced masonry shall be proportioned in accordance with ASTM C476.
1. Required grout strength at 28 days is 3000 psi. Laboratory and field samples shall be
tested as described in NCMA TEK #23 by the National Concrete Masonry Association.
2.03 MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
Cement
1. Portland Cement: Comply with ASTM C150
a. Type I used generally.
b. Type III used when conditions require high early strength.
c. White Portland Cement: Non-staining Atlas White, Type-1, Portland Cement by
Lehigh Portland Cement Co. or approved equal.
2. Masonry Cement: Comply with ASTM C91.
B.
Lime
1. Hydrated Lime: Comply with ASTM C207, Type S.
2. Quicklime: Comply with ASTM C5.
C.
Sand
1. Comply with ASTM C144.
2. Where white mortar joints are indicated, use fine pure silicon sand.
D.
Water shall be potable, clean and free from deleterious materials.
E.
Admixtures
1. Waterproofing
a. Omicron Mortarproofing by Master Builders, Hydratite Plus by W.R. Grace and Co. or
approved equal.
b. Required in mortar for sloping or horizontal exterior brick work.
2. Accelerators: Dur-O-Guard by Dur-O-Wal, Inc. Accelguard 80 by Euclid Chemical Co. or
approved equal.
3. Color Additives
a. SGS Mortar Colors by Solomon Grind-Chem Services, Inc. or approved equal.
b. For use in face brick mortar only.
c. Color as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's available selections.
F.
Mortar Preparation
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
04 2000 - 4
UNIT MASONRY
1.
2.
Measurement and Mixing: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C270.
Mortar Types
a. Type "M" (ASTM C270)
1). 1 part Portland Cement, 1 part masonry cement, sand equal to 2-1/4 to 3 times
the volume of the cements used or;
2). 1 part Portland Cement, 1/4 part lime and sand equal to 2-1/4 to 3 times the
volume of the cements and lime used.
3). Use: Exterior walls and reinforced masonry.
b. Admixtures
1). Adhere to manufacturers recommended proportions for mortar quantities being
mixed.
2). Mortar color subject to Architects approval.
c. Pointing mortar for glazed concrete block: 1 part white Portland Cement, 1/8 part
lime and 2 parts fine white sand.
2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A.
Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors:
1. Dur-O-Wal Products
2. A.A. Wire Products
3. Ty-Wal
4. Approved equal. For substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section 03 3000; size as indicated on drawings
C.
Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss or ladder type; ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, at
interior walls reinforcing shall be milled galvanized conforming with ASTM A641, Class 3, at
exterior walls reinforcing shall be hot dipped galvanized conforming with ASTM A153, Class
B-2; #9 side and cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less
than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. Provide fabricated corners and/or tee
sections at all corners and intersections.
D.
Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry and
building frame, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar
coverage from masonry face.
1. Protective Coating
a. Flat metal zinc coated in accordance with ASTM A153, Class B-2.
b. Wire zinc coated in accordance with ASTM A153, Class B-2.
E.
Reinforcing Bar Positioners
1. For Vertical Bars
a. Galvanized, sized for specific bars to securely center the bar in the block work during
grouting operations.
b. As manufactured by AA Wire Products "#AA 239", Dur-O-Wal "#D/A 810", or
approved equal.
2. For Horizontal Bars in Bond Beams
a. Galvanized
1). Bottom Reinforcing: Use standard chairs or bolsters as specified in Section
03200.
2). Top Reinforcing: As manufactured by AA Wire Products "#AA 236" or "#AA
238", Dur-O-Wal "#D/A 811", or approved equal.
2.05 FLASHINGS
A.
Plastic Flashings: Sheet polyvinyl chloride; 40 mil thick.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; X-Seal Transition Membrane: www.h-b.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Flashing Sealant/Adhesive: Butyl type as specified in Section 07 9005.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
04 2000 - 5
UNIT MASONRY
C.
Compressive Filler: Fiberglass sill sealer or strips of fiberglass insulation, by Owens-Corning,
or approved equal.
D.
Control Joint Fillers: Extruded rubber, designed for use with standard sash block, conforming
to the requirements of ASTM D-2000 2AA-805 with a Durometer hardness of 80 when tested in
accordance with ASTM D2240. Actual filler configurations to fit required conditions as selected
from configurations available in the Dur-O-Wal "Rapid Control Joint" products line, or approved
equal.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A.
Nailing Strips: Softwood lumber, preservative treated; as specified in Section 06 1000.
B.
Weeps: Cotton rope.
C.
Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
1. "Sure Klean #600" by the Process Solvent Co., Inc., "Vana-Trol" by the Process Solvent
Co., Inc., "Thoro Klean" by Standard Builders Products, or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B.
Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C.
Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.
B.
Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
C.
Leave all openings and build chases, recesses, etc... as required under all Specification
Sections, even though not indicated . Close up and fill around all openings where materials or
equipment pass through or are built into masonry construction.
3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is
more stringent.
3.04 COURSING
A.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. Lay units plumb, true
to line, and with level courses accurately spaced.
B.
Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C.
Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Bond: Running. Stop off horizontal run by racking back in each course; toothing is not
permitted.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
3. Mortar Joints: Concave. Do not furrow bed joints.
3.05 PLACING AND BONDING
A.
Do not install cracked, broken, or chipped masonry units exceeding ASTM allowances.
B.
Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other
work.
C.
Lay hollow masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
1. Provide full mortar coverage on webs as well as on horizontal and vertical face shells in all
courses of the following:
a. Starter courses of supporting concrete.
b. Adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
04 2000 - 6
UNIT MASONRY
D.
Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
E.
Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
E.
Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids, sandblasting
or high pressure cleaning methods.
F.
Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond.
G.
Adjust units to final position while mortar is soft and plastic. Do not shift or tap masonry units
after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and
replace.
H.
Lay out material accurately as to require minimum amount of cutting of standard units. Perform
job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges.
Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
I.
Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.
J.
Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with 3/4" minimum control
joint unless otherwise detailed.
K.
Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or
decks with compressible joint filler.
L.
Protect all masonry from damage and staining.
M. Cover top of walls with non-staining waterproof coverings when work is not in progress.
3.06 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS
A.
Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through-wall
flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.
3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL
A.
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal
joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.
B.
Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.
C.
Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.
E.
Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless
otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space
anchors at maximum of 36 inches horizontally and 24 inches vertically. Where anchors, etc.
project within the cores of masonry units, such cores shall be filled with mortar or 2000 psi
concrete.
F.
In addition to the above, provide the following for reinforced masonry:
1. Securely position all vertical reinforcing at the center of the block unit.
2. Provide cleanout openings at the bottom of all grouted and reinforced cores. After
inspection, these openings shall be closed and braced to adequately resist the pressure of
the fluid grout.
3. Remove all mortar projections from the cells to be grouted.
4. Remove all mortar droppings and debris from foundation bearing surface and reinforcing
bars.
3.08 MASONRY FLASHINGS
A.
Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.
1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent
masonry or turn up at least 4 inches to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction.
2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings.
3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
04 2000 - 7
UNIT MASONRY
B.
Extend metal flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.
C.
Extend plastic, laminated, EPDM, and flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.
3.09 LINTELS
A.
Install loose steel lintels over openings.
B.
Do not place masonry units on steel lintels if core holes are visible from below. (Notify
Architect)
C.
Concrete block which directly support steel lintels shall have cores filled with mortar.
3.10 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B.
Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.11 PROTECTION
A.
Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that
are subject to damage by construction activities.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
04 2000 - 8
UNIT MASONRY
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 051200
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. Furnish all labor, material, and equipment necessary to complete all structural steel work
as shown and/or specified.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Testing Laboratory Services: Section 014110.
2. Grouting of Leveling, Bearing and Base Plates: Section 033000.
3. Shear Connectors: Section 053000.
4. Miscellaneous Metal: Section 055000.
5. Shoring for composite construction: Section 033000.
6. Field Paint for Exposed Steel.
C. Furnished but Installed Under Other Sections:
1. Anchor Bolts and Leveling Plates: Section 033000.
2. Loose Lintels: Section 042000.
D. Specified Elsewhere But Included Under This Section:
1. Contractor's Responsibilities Associated with Testing Laboratory Services: Section
014110.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Erector's Qualifications:
1. Satisfactorily completed projects of similar magnitude.
B. Fabricator's Qualifications:
1. Satisfactorily completed projects of similar magnitude.
2. Facilities and capacity to provide fabricated steel to facilitate timely completion of project.
C. Welder's Qualifications:
1. All shop and field welding is to be performed by operators who have passed the test as
prescribed in AWS D1. 1 Chapter 5 "Qualifications", and qualified to perform the type of
welding required.
2. Each welder working on the project shall be assigned an identification symbol or mark and
shall mark or stamp his identification at each completed weldment, both in the shop and
field.
3. The fabricator and erector shall submit to the Architect welder's qualifications prior to
fabrication and erection.
D. Inspection and Quality Control:
1. The Fabricator shall provide effective full time quality control over all fabrication activities.
This shall include ultra-sonic, magnetic particle, dye penetrant, x-ray, or other effective
means of insuring that all welds fully conform to A.W.S. Standards. The Owner's testing
agency may visit the plant as directed by the Architect to verify that a quality control
program is being maintained and to spot check weldments and welding procedures. All
fabricated items may also be subject to inspection in the field including ultra-sonic testing.
Inspection by the testing agency is not intended to be comprehensive or complete and full
responsibility for quality control shall remain with the Fabricator.
2. The Owner or his representative shall have the right to reject any item not fully conforming
to all requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.03 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Comply with the provisions of the following, except as otherwise indicated.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 1200 - 1
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings".
AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".
AISC "Manual of Steel Construction".
AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" approved by
the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Council.
AWS D1.7 "Code for Welding in Building Construction".
SSPC "Structural Steel Painting Manual".
Painting Manual, Vol. 1, "Good Painting Practice" and Painting Manual, Vol. 2, "Systems
and Specifications", Steel Structures Painting Council.
All pertinent Federal, State, and Local Codes.
B. In case of conflict between specified codes and standards, the most stringent requirements
govern. In case of conflict between codes and standards and Project Specifications, Project
Specifications shall govern.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Include all information necessary for steel fabrication and erection, including:
a. Standard details of proposed beam end connections with load capacities, and other
job standards for appropriate parts of the work. Submit for approval before
preparation of detail drawings. Consistently use standard details on Detail Drawings
where appropriate.
b. Anchor bolt, leveling plate and bearing plate: Plans showing the location, size, and
identification marks of all base plates, screws, bolts, grade of steel, and setting
elevations.
c. Erection plans, showing type, size, weight, location identification marks of all
members and all information regarding field welds and bolts.
d. Detail Drawings, showing complete details of all members including identification
marks, dimensions, sizes, grade of steel, holes, shop and field welds, connection
details, shop and field bolts, cleaning requirements prior to painting, type of paint and
other pertinent data.
e. Include on drawings all temporary members required for erection.
f. Submit one print and one digital copy of shop drawings for review.
2. Product Data:
For all standard manufactured products, including paint.
3. Certificates:
a. Prior to delivery of steel to the project site, submit certified copies of mill test reports
including name and location of mill and analysis of chemical and physical properties
of steel to be used on this project.
b. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily
passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Rolled Steel Wide-Flange Shapes & WT shapes cut from wide flange: ASTM
A-992.
B. Rolled Steel Plates, Bars, and Non Wide-Flange Shapes: ASTM A-36 unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A-500, Grade B.
D. Structural Pipe: ASTM A-501 or A-53 Grade B.
E. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A-325. A-490.
F. Standard Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36.
G. Electrodes for Welding: AWS E70 Series.
H. Paint for Shop Primer:
1. Non-exposed Steel
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 1200 - 2
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
a. Paint for shop primer shall have not less than 50 percent solids, per volume, and
shall withstand the following tests without any change in adhesion, film integrity,
hardness, color, blistering or cracking:
2.
1. Freeze Thaw: ASTM D2246, 30 cycles
2. Salt Spray Resistance: ASTM B117, 500 hours
3. Light and Water Resistance: ASTM D822, 5000 hours
b. Acceptable Products:
1. #99 or #88 Primer by Tnemec Co., Inc.
2. Ceco #265 by Cheesman-Elliot Co.
c. Paint shall provide a minimum bond capacity for the adhesion of spray fire-proofing
of 100 psf or greater. Submit certificates of compliance.
d. Other products will be considered if request is accompanied by certified test reports
showing compliance with all the above requirements.
Exposed Steel:
a. Acceptable Product: Series 90-93 Zinc Primer by Tnemec Company.
2.02 DESIGN
A. Connections:
1. Design and detail all connections to resist the loads and reactions indicated on the
Drawings or specified herein. Details shall supplement and be consistent with details
shown on the Drawings. Proper account of eccentricity shall be taken in the design of
connections so that there is no overstressing of any material either in the connections
themselves or in the connected members. The design of all connections shall be subject
to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
a. Shop and field connections shall be made using minimum 3/4" diameter high
strength bolts or by welding, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Beam-to-column connections shall be such as to minimize eccentric loading on the
column. Unrestrained simple beam end connections shall be detailed and fabricated
so as to minimize end restraint of the beam. All parts of such connections (such as
welds, bolts and material) shall be designed taking eccentricity into account.
2. Temporary Bracing:
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the design, strength, safety and adequacy of
all temporary bracing and all methods of construction. The specifying herein of
requirements for bracing or construction methods, preliminary approvals by the Architect,
or any other requirements of the Specifications shall be construed as the minimum
acceptable, and shall not eliminate, lessen or restrict in any manner the responsibility of
the Contractor for all construction methods and for the safety and stability of the structural
steel work at all stages of erection, until such time as the permanent bracing system
becomes effective.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Installation of High Strength Bolts:
1. Shop installed high strength bolts shall be installed as specified below under "Execution".
B. Welding:
1. Shop welding shall be done by either shielded metal arc welding, submerged arc welding
or flux core arc welding. (SMAW, SAW, FCAW). Gas metal arc welding (GMAW) is not
permitted.
2. Prepare joint welding procedures and program of welding sequence (for each component
and for welding joining components to each other) and submit to Architect for approval
before any welding is done. After approval, welding procedures and sequences shall be
followed without deviation unless specific approval for change is obtained from Architect.
Architect may require requalifications of operators for such changes in welding
procedures by test prescribed in AWS "Standard Qualification Procedures".
C. Cutting:
1. Manual oxygen cutting shall be done only with a mechanically guided torch, except as
permitted below:
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 1200 - 3
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
2.
3.
4.
5.
a. Gas cut edges, which are not to be welded, and which will be free of substantial
stresses (as determined by the Architect/Engineer) may be cut manually with an
unguided torch provided that specified AISC edge distances to holes are maintained.
b. Gas cut edges which will be subjected to substantial stress (over 1/2 the allowable
stress, as determined by the Architect/Engineer), or which are to be welded may be
cut manually with an unguided torch to a line not within 1/8" of the finished
dimension, with final removal of material completed by chipping or grinding to
produce a surface quality equal to that of the base metal edges.
Punch and drill steel for attachment of other materials indicated on the Drawings or noted
in the Specifications to be attached to the steel.
Holes for bolted connections shall not be oxygen cut. Components prepared in this
manner will be rejected.
All re-entrant corners shall be shaped notch-free to a radius of at least 1/2".
Cut no openings without the written approval of the Architect/ Engineer.
D. Milled Ends:
1. Where loads are transferred by bearing at ends of columns, ends shall be milled.
E. Identification:
1. Each structural steel member shall have its assigned position and identification mark or
symbol plainly indicated thereon near one end. Marks shall agree with those shown on
the Shop Drawings and Erection Drawings.
2.04 SUPPLEMENTAL FRAMING:
A. Provide supplemental framing at all openings as shown on the Drawings and at all suspended
loads.
B. Where open web joists are used, provide additional framing to transfer loads from the
supplemental framing and suspended loads to panel points. Coordinate with the steel joist
Contractor and provide him with sufficient information to enable him to incorporate shop welded
connections to panel points on his Shop Drawings. Where such information is not so provided,
structural steel Contractor shall supply and install the necessary connections.
2.05 SHOP PAINTING:
A. Cleaning and Preparation:
1. Painted Steel
a. Non-exposed steel specified to be painted shall be cleaned in accordance with
SSPC-SP3.
1. Non-exposed steel is defined as steel not exposed to the elements. Usually
contained within building envelope.
b. Exposed steel to be painted shall be cleaned and lightly sandblasted in accordance
with SSPC-6. Connections are to be included.
1. Exposed steel is steel, which is exposed to the elements.
2. Unpainted Steel
a. Unpainted steel to receive fire-proofing shall be free of all oil, grease, loose mill
scale, salt, dirt and any other substance that impairs proper adhesion of the fireproofing.
b. All other unpainted steel shall be cleaned of oil and grease by solvent cleaners and
cleaned of dirt and other foreign materials by thoroughly sweeping with fiber brushes.
B. Surfaces to be Painted:
1. All steel surfaces, except as follows:
a. Surfaces to receive metal deck and/or shear connectors fastened by welding.
b. Contact surfaces of high strength bolted connections.
c. Steel to be encased in concrete.
d. Surfaces within 2" of field welds.
e. Machine finished surfaces (e.g., bearing surfaces of columns and column base
plates).
C. Surfaces to Receive Protective Coating:
Machine finished surfaces such as bearing surfaces of column and base plates.
D. Method and Rate of Paint Application:
1. Non-exposed Steel
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 1200 - 4
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
2.
a. Apply one prime coat of paint to dry, clean surfaces by brush, spray or roller with no
running or sagging.
b. The coverage rate per coat shall not be more than 400 sq. ft. per gal. resulting in a
minimum wet film thickness of 4 mils and providing a minimum dry film thickness of 2
mils.
c. If for any reason any surface to be field welded or bolted is painted, remove such
paint completely to within stated limits before field welding or bolting. If any machine
finished surface is painted, remove such paint completely, and touch up specified
finish if required, before shipping or erection.
Exposed Steel
a. Single coat of Zinc Primer, minimum dry film thickness 4.0 mils, to be applied in strict
conformance with manufacturer's printed requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION:
A. Verify that anchor bolts and bearing plates are of the size required and accurately located, prior
to erection of the steel.
B. Set base plates and bearing plates level to correct elevations and support temporarily on steel
wedges, shims, leveling devices, or as shown on Drawings, until corresponding supported
member has been positioned, plumbed and anchor bolted. Leave protruding leveling devices
in place until after grout has been placed and has attained required strength, and then cut off
flush with top or edges of base plate, or both, except as otherwise noted.
C. Align, level, and adjust all members accurately prior to final fastening. Bearing surfaces and
surfaces that will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned prior to final assembly of members.
Drift pins shall be used only to bring together the several parts. They shall not be used in such
manner as to distort or damage the metal.
D. As erection progresses, the work shall be securely connected to safely resist all dead load,
wind and erection forces. Temporary bracing shall be introduced wherever necessary to safely
resist all loads to which the structure may be subjected, including erection equipment and its
operation. Such bracing shall be left in place as long as may be required for safety.
E. Oxygen cutting in the field shall not be done except with written permission to the Architect.
When permitted, it shall be executed in accordance with the requirements herein specified.
F. All temporary supports, flooring, planking, and scaffolding necessary in connection with the
erection of the structural steel, or the support of erection equipment, shall be provided as a part
of the erection work. The temporary floors shall be as required by Federal, State and Municipal
Laws and governing safety regulations.
G. Protect expansion joints during all construction phases such to prevent any accumulation of
debris or other deleterious materials in the sliding plane.
3.02 FIELD WELDING:
A. Field welding shall be done with shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) or flux core arc welding
(FCAW) only.
B. The Contractor shall provide safe and substantial work platforms at proper height to permit best
possible field welding technique. Temporary enclosure, shielding, etc., shall be provided to
protect welding operators and joints to be welded against the elements during welding
operations.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS:
A. Provide safe and substantial work platform for bolting crews.
B. Each bolting crew working on the project shall be assigned an identification symbol or mark.
Each bolting crew shall mark this identification on each joint completed.
C. Joints shall be made without the use of erection bolts, the high strength bolts required for the
joint serving that purpose themselves. Where proper fix-up cannot be obtained, corrective
work or additional plumbing, leveling, etc. may be required. Use not more than 2 washers per
bolt.
D. Correct poor matching of holes by drilling to next larger size and use of larger size bolt, if
approved by Architect/Engineer. Welding for redrilling shall not be done.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 1200 - 5
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
E. High strength bolts shall be installed by the "modified turn-of-the-nut method", or by the use of
load indicator washers, or by the use of torque control bolts. (See below)
3.04 INSTALLATION OF HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS BY "MODIFIED TURN-OF- THE-NUT METHOD":
A. Install high strength steel bolts in accordance with the turn-of-the-nut method in the AISC
approved "Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", with the
following additional requirements:
1. Use hardened washer under bolt head or nut, whichever is turned in tightening (unless
oversize holes have been approved, in which case washers are required under head and
nut).
2. At the start of each day, each operator shall field test his power impact wrench as directed
by the testing agency or Architect and as described below using bolts representative of
those to be used in the work.
3. Field testing of each impact wrench shall consist of tightening, in a hydraulic
tension-measuring device such as a Skidmore Wilhelm Calibrator furnished by the
Contractor, three bolts of each size to be used, with a hardened washer under either bolt
head or nut, whichever is turned in tightening. Bolt tension readings shall be taken at
"snug-tight plus fraction of turn" (tabulated in Table 4) conditions to confirm that bolts and
equipment have the capacity to develop the minimum tension tabulated in Table 3.
4. While power impact wrenches are being field tested, the testing agency shall be given the
opportunity to determine the torque-tension relationship for its manual torque indicator
wrench for every combination of impact wrench and bolt size to be used in the work for
the day. These torque values shall be used as the inspection standard in testing the
actual installations.
5. Install bolts using powered impact wrenches with sufficient capacity and an adequate
supply of compressed air.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS BY THE USE OF LOAD INDICATOR WASHERS:
A. Load indicator washers used as direct tension indicators shall be installed as follows:
1. The load indicator washer shall be placed on the bolt with the protrusions facing the bolt
head.
2. The assembly shall be fitted into place and the nut installed. Hardened round washers
shall be used under the nut to reduce frictional resistance.
3. Sufficient bolts in the joint shall be "snugged" to draw the connecting members into close
contact, then all bolts shall be tightened until the average gap between the face of the
load indicator washer and the underside of the bolt head is reduced to at least .015", but
not closed completely.
4. Tightening shall progress systematically from the most rigid part of the joint to its free
edges until the load indicator washers on all bolts are closed to at least the required gap.
Gaps shall be checked with a feeler gauge. Complete closure of the gap should be
avoided, but it is not necessarily reason for rejection provided bolts have not been
tightened more than one complete turn beyond snug position.
5. When it is required to use the load indicator under the nut, a hardened round washer shall
be fitted between the load indicator washer and the nut. After the bolt is installed in the
connection, the load indicator washer shall be placed on the bolt with the protrusions
facing the nut. The hardened round washer shall be placed against the load indicator
washer protrusions before the nut is installed. For this assembly, tightening is continued
until the average gap between the load indicator washer and the hardened round washer
is closed to at least .0152" if the bolt head is turned during installation, and to a least .010"
if the nut is turned in accordance with the procedure given above.
6. If the load indicator washer must be placed under the head, and the head must be turned,
then a hardened round washer must be used between the load indicator washer
protrusions and the bolt head. For this fastener assembly, the average gap between the
load indicator washer and the hardened round washer shall be closed to .010".
7. Install bolts using pneumatic powered impact wrenches with sufficient capacity and an
adequate supply of compressed air.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS BY TORQUE CONTROL BOLTS:
A. A hardened washer shall be installed under the nut (unless oversized holes have been
approved, in which case washers are required under head and nut).
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 1200 - 6
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
B. Torque control bolts shall be installed by a special torquing device recommended by the
manufacturer. The torquing device shall engage the spline end of the fastener and prevent the
bolt from rotating while the nut is being tightened. The bolts shall then be tightened until the
counter-torque is sufficient to shear the spline end from the bolt.
C. At least 3 torque control bolts from each shipment shall be tested in a hydraulic
tension-measuring device such as a Skidmore-Wilhelm Calibrator furnished by the Contractor.
Bolts are to be fully tightened using the same equipment proposed for use in the structure.
Tests shall be performed in the presence of the testing agency. If any bolt fails to reach the
minimum tension required by ASTM A325, that bolt shall then be tightened using a calibrated
torque wrench until the required tension reading is observed on the calibrator. Bolts from that
shipment shall then be tested in the field using the same calibrated torque wrench and the cost
of such testing shall be at the Contractor's expense.
3.07 CORRECTIVE WORK:
A. Structural steel members or assemblages having fabrication errors, or which have
deformations preventing proper assembly and fitting of parts, shall be reported immediately to
the Architect. They shall not be incorporated in the finished work. Such members or
assemblages may be corrected if permitted by the Architect, such corrective work shall be in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Submit to the Architect for approval Drawings showing reasons for and details of proposed
corrective work, and receive approved Drawings prior to performing the corrective work.
3.08 FIELD TOUCH-UP PAINTING:
A. After erection all exposed metal surfaces where shop coat is missing or has been damaged
shall be touched-up using the same type of paint as approved for the shop coat.
B. Prior to touch-up, all areas to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, dirt and weld slag.
C. Touch-up paint shall extend a minimum of 2" onto undamaged finish.
D. Paint shall be uniformly applied to dry surfaces to a dry film thickness of no less than 2 mils, 4
mils for exposed steel.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 1200 - 7
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 05300
METAL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Testing Laboratory Services: Section 01411.
B. Concrete Reinforcement: Section 03310.
C. Temporary Shoring of Metal Deck (If Required): Section 03310.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welder's Qualifications:
1.
Qualifications of welders shall be as prescribed in the "Standard Qualification Procedures"
by the American Welding Society.
2.
Welding operators shall have been previously qualified to perform the type of work
required for this project.
B.
Reference Standards:
Unless otherwise indicated herein, perform work in accordance with the following
standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Steel Deck Institute: "Code of Recommended Standard Practice".
American Welding Society: "Code for Welding in Building Construction".
American Iron and Steel Institute: "Specifications for the Design of Light Gauge
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members".
Factory Mutual: Loss Prevention Data 1-28 Insulated Steel Deck.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Indicate all details of fabrication and installation.
2.
Deck: Include type, gauge, finish, location, openings, dimensions, anchorage
details, lap details, accessories and shoring requirements (if any).
3.
Shear Connectors: Include type, number, location, typical details and welding
data.
B.
Product Data:
1.
For each type of Deck.
2.
For Shear Connectors.
C.
Certification:
1.
Evidence of welders qualifications.
2.
Certifications from an approved independent Testing Laboratory indicating
compliance with specified fire resistance requirements.
1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Do not store deck in direct contact with ground.
B.
Do not damage deck during handling.
C.
If mud, dirt or other foreign matter does accumulate on the deck, completely remove such
accumulation prior to erection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN
A.
Span each deck unit over 3 or more spans, minimum load capacity equivalent to SDI
Standard Load Tables.
B.
Where deck spans less than 3 spans, increase the gauge of the deck to provide the same
load capacity as shown in SDI Standard Load Tables for 3 or more spans.
2.02 COMPOSITE METAL DECK, 2"
A.
Acceptable Products:
1.
Type 3 VLI by Vulcraft Div. Nucor Corp.
2.
Type 2.0 SB by Wheeling Corrugating Co.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 3100 - 1
STEEL DECKING
B.
C.
D.
3.
Type 2.0 CD by New Millennium Building Systems.
Material:
1.
Steel sheet, ASTM A-446, with minimum yield strength of 33,000 PSI.
2.
Physical Properties:
A.
Depth 2"
B.
Gauge 20
C.
36 inch C/C Modules
Fire Resistance Requirements:
Composite assembly consisting of metal deck plus concrete, as indicated on the
drawings, shall provide a 2 hour fire resistant rating as listed by U.L.
Finish:
1.
Phosphate treatment to both surfaces prior to roll forming. One shop coat of
rust-inhibitive paint roller coated on underside only.
2.
Protect with a zinc coating conforming to ASTM A525, Class G-60.
3.
Decks requiring field painting shall be given a phosphate treatment by the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Refer to "FM Loss Prevention Date 1-28, Table 1" for maximum spans, minimum
gauge, etc. If roofing insulation is applied with adhesive or asphalt, use deck without
stiffener groove in top surface. Those specified below have grooves.
2.03 NON-COMPOSITE METAL ROOF DECK, 1-1/2"
A.
Acceptable Products:
1.
Type B of BW by Wheeling Corrugating Co.
2.
Type 1.5B by Vulcraft Div. Nucor Corp.
3.
Type B by New Millennium Building Systems.
B.
Material:
1.
Steel Sheet, ASTM A611 with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 PSI.
2.
Physical Properties:
a.
Depth 1-1/2"
b.
Gauge 20
C.
Fire Resistance Requirements:
Comply with "FM Loss Prevention Data 1-28" for attaching deck.
D.
Finish:
Protect with a zinc coating conforming to ASTM A-525 coating designation G90.
2.04 HEADED STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS
A.
Material:
1.
ASTM A108, grades 1015, 1020, minimum yield strength 50,000 PSI and
minimum tensile strength of 60,000 PSI.
2.
Size and length and quantity as indicated on drawings.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Roof Sump Plates: 24" square, minimum 20 gauge flat sump pan, required at each roof
drain where metal deck is to receive rigid insulation.
B.
Closures:
1.
Metal Closures: Minimum 20 gauge steel with same finish as adjacent deck.
2.
Flexible Closure Strips: Rubatex by Rubtex Corporation, or approved equal and
shall conform to profile of various decks as required.
2.06 FIELD TOUCH-UP (Galvanized Surfaces)
A.
Acceptable Products:
1.
Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound by Z.R.C. Chemical Products Company.
2.
Zinc clad 5 primer by Sherwin Williams Company.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Prior to proceeding with installation of deck, the following shall have been completed:
1.
Related steel framework plumbed, aligned and completed.
2.
Temporary shoring installed (if required).
3.
Ice, oil, dirt, rust, and other materials which may adversely affect welding shall
have been removed.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 3100 - 2
STEEL DECKING
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Placing Deck Units:
1.
Position metal deck units on supporting steel and accurately align to final position
with units resting tightly on top of all supporting members. Do not stretch or
contract the side lap interlocks.
2.
Minimum bearing on steel supporting members shall be 2".
3.
Minimum end laps shall be 2".
4.
Center ends of deck over center of supports.
B.
Cutting and Fitting:
1.
Shop Cutting: Cut to proper length before shipping to the field.
2.
Field Cutting By Metal Deck Erector:
a.
Notch to fit around columns and other similar fabrication.
b.
All holes and openings which are located and dimensioned on the
structural drawings.
c.
Holes in deck larger than 6" and up to 12" in diameter:
1.
Deck erector shall furnish and install 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16"
galvanized steel angle 5'-0" long on one or both sides of each
hole, perpendicular to flutes, as required. (Both sides if any
portion of hole occurs in middle 1/3 of deck span, otherwise one
side.)
2.
Attach angle to underside of deck by bolting or puddle welding at
each bottom flute.
3.
Do not space holes closer than 5'-0" on center in any span.
3.
Field Cutting By Other Trades:
a.
Holes and openings required for work under other Sections of the
Specifications, which are not located and dimensions on the structural
drawings and are 6" in diameter or less shall be cut by the respective
trade. Not more than one rib shall be cut per panel per span.
b.
Method and Quality of Cutting: All cuts shall be neat and trim in
appearance, cut deck with metal saw, drills or cutting torch.
C.
Closures:
1.
Provide metal closures for all openings in composite metal deck 1/16" wide and
over, including the following:
a.
2.
D.
Cover plate to close panel edge and end conditions and where panels
change direction or abut.
b.
Column closures to close openings between metal deck and structural
steel columns.
c.
Where deck is cut for passage of pipes, ducts, columns, etc. and deck is
to remain exposed, provide a neatly cut sheet metal collar to cover edges
of deck.
Restrictions:
Do not cut openings greater than 6" diameter in deck unless they are shown on
the reviewed shop drawings or unless approved in writing.
Fastening Deck Units:
1.
Arc weld deck to supporting steel as follows:
a.
Use welding washers for decks less than 22 gauge.
b.
Provide 3/4" diameter puddle welds at 12" O.C. each end and at all
intermediate supports of all deck units. Stagger welds at intermediate
supports with welds at end supports.
c.
Longitudinal edges and edge laps supported by steel members shall be
fastened with 3/4" diameter puddle welds at a maximum spacing of 3'-0"
along the length of the panel.
d.
Refer to drawings for additional requirements which may be indicated in
special areas.
2.
Fasten deck to supporting steel less than 1/4" in thickness as follows:
a.
Self-drilling fasteners (#10 minimum) with size and spacing as required to
provide a diaphragm shear capacity equal to or greater than provided by
welding requirements above.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 3100 - 3
STEEL DECKING
3.
b.
Submit diaphragm shear capacity data for approval prior to installation.
Longitudinal side laps of adjacent panels shall be 3/4" diameter welded or #12
self-drilling fasteners between support at intervals not exceeding 3'-0". Confine
welding to decks 20 gauge or heavier.
3.03 HEADED STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS
A.
Procedures:
1.
Install in accordance with AWS Code by experienced operators using automatic
welding equipment.
2.
Use electrical power ceramic ferrules, etc., in accordance with recommendations
of stud manufacturer.
3.
Weld through the metal deck.
B.
Location:
Shear connectors shall be accurately located, using chalk lines and templates.
3.04 FIELD TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A.
Preparation:
B.
C.
1.
Thoroughly clean areas to receive touch-up paint of all rust, dirt, oil and weld slag.
2.
Accomplish touch-up soon after deck is erected.
3.
Touch-up shall include but not limited to abrasions, scars, cut edges and welds.
4.
Extend paint minimum of 2" onto undamaged finish.
5.
Minimum dry film thickness: 2 mils.
Galvanized Surfaces:
Apply material specified for galvanized surfaces.
Painted Surfaces:
Apply same material used for prime coat.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 3100 - 4
STEEL DECKING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 05 4000
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Formed steel stud exterior wall framing.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)
B.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C.
ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,
Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products
and Metal Plaster Bases; 2011c.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framing
system, including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, and
firestopping.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring
special attention .
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the
Project is located.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products
specified in this section, and with minimum three years of documented experience.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Metal Framing:
1. CEMCO; _______: www.cemcosteel.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FRAMING SYSTEM
A.
Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips,
fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.
B.
Design Criteria: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics:
1. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing members
according to AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members.
2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified
design loads for project conditions within required limits.
3. Design Loads: In accordance with applicable codes.
4. Live load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated:
5. Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue
stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic
day/night temperature ranges.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 4000 - 1
COLD-FORMED METAL
FRAMING
6.
Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members,
and clearances of intended openings.
2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS
A.
Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched
web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height.
1. Gage and depth: As required to meet specified performance levels.
2.04 FASTENERS
A.
Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM
A153/A153M.
B.
Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDS
A.
Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007
requirements.
B.
Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum
24 inches on center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.
C.
Place studs at 16 inches on center; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side
of openings. Connect studs to tracks using clip and tie method.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 4000 - 2
COLD-FORMED METAL
FRAMING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
B.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
C.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2012.
D.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2013.
E.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
F.
IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;
International Accreditation Service, Inc.; 2011.
G.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
H.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
I.
SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size
and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details
where applicable.
C.
Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is
accredited under IAS AC172.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Design lintels, door frames, railings, and elevator beams under direct supervision of a
Professional Structural Design Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the
State in which the Project is located.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International
Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL
A.
Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.
B.
Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.
C.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
D.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM
2.03 FABRICATION
A.
Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 5000 - 1
METAL FABRICATIONS
C.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
D.
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
2.04 FABRICATED ITEMS
A.
Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish.
B.
Lintels: As detailed; prime paint finish.
C.
Sill Angles for Railing Assemblies: ASTM A36/A36M steel angles with anchoring devices and
sizes as indicated in shop drawings for railing assembly, drilled and tapped for fastener types,
sizes, and spacing indicated, prime paint finish.
D.
Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings: Channel sections; prime paint finish.
E.
Recessed Mat Frames : As detailed; steel, galvanized finish.
F.
Elevator Hoistway Divider Beams: Beam sections; prime paint finish.
2.05 FINISHES - STEEL
A.
Prime paint all steel items.
1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete, items to be imbedded in
masonry, and items specified for glav. finish.
B.
Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2.
C.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
D.
Prime Painting: One coat.
E.
Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M
requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating.
F.
Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M
requirements.
2.06 FINISHES - ALUMINUM
A.
Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I color anodized.
B.
Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized.
C.
Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than
0.7 mils thick.
D.
Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious
or dissimilar materials.
2.07 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A.
Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B.
Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.
D.
Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.
E.
Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 5000 - 2
METAL FABRICATIONS
B.
Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into
concrete or embedded in masonry.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C.
Field weld components indicated .
D.
Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
E.
Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in
contact with concrete.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
C.
Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 5000 - 3
METAL FABRICATIONS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 05 5100
METAL STAIRS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Stairs with concrete treads.
B.
Structural steel stair framing and supports.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete fill in stair pans ; mesh reinforcement for
landings.
B.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal anchors in concrete.
C.
Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AISC 201 - AISC Certification Program for Structural Steel Fabricators, Standard for Steel
Building Structures; 2006.
B.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
C.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2012.
D.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
E.
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.
F.
ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa
Tensile Strength (Metric); 2013.
G.
ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.
H.
ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing; 2007.
I.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
J.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
K.
SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size
and type of fasteners, and accessories.
1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
2. Include the design engineer's stamp or seal on each sheet of shop drawings.
C.
Delegated Design Data: As required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of
this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located, or personnel under direct
supervision of such an engineer.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications:
1. A qualified steel fabricator that is certified by the American Institute for Steel Construction
(AISC) under AISC 201.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 5100 - 1
METAL STAIRS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL STAIRS - GENERAL
A.
Metal Stairs: Provide stairs of the design specified, complete with landing platforms, vertical
and horizontal supports, railings, and guards, fabricated accurately for anchorage to each other
and to building structure.
1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide stairs and railings complying with the most stringent
requirements of local, state, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract
documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents.
2. Structural Design: Provide complete stair and railing assemblies complying with the
applicable local code.
3. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.
4. Shop assemble components; disassemble into largest practical sections suitable for
transport and access to site.
5. No sharp or rough areas on exposed travel surfaces and surfaces accessible to touch.
6. Separate dissimilar metals using paint or permanent tape.
B.
Metal Jointing and Finish Quality Levels:
1. Architectural: All joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or mechanical.
a. Welded Joints: Continuously welded and ground smooth and flush.
b. Mechanical Joints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline; concealed fastenings only.
c. Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius.
d. Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for highest quality
gloss finish.
C.
Fasteners: Same material or compatible with materials being fastened; type consistent with
design and specified quality level.
D.
Anchors and Related Components: Same material and finish as item to be anchored, except
where specifically indicated otherwise; provide all anchors and fasteners required.
2.02 METAL STAIRS WITH CONCRETE TREADS
A.
Jointing and Finish Quality Level: Architectural, as defined above.
B.
Risers: Closed.
C.
Treads: Metal pan with field-installed concrete fill.
1. Concrete Depth: 1-1/2 inches, minimum.
2. Tread Pan Material: Steel sheet.
3. Tread Pan Thickness: As required by design; 14 gage, 0.075 inch minimum.
4. Concrete Reinforcement: None.
5. Concrete Finish: Applied abrasive grit.
D.
Risers: Same material and thickness as tread pans.
1. Nosing Depth: Not more than 1-1/2 inch overhang.
2. Nosing Return: Flush with top of concrete fill, not more than 1/2 inch wide.
E.
Stringers: Rolled steel channels.
1. Stringer Depth: 12 inches.
2. End Closure: Sheet steel of same thickness as risers welded across ends.
F.
Railings: Steel pipe railings.
G.
Finish: Shop- or factory-prime painted.
H.
Under Side of Stair: Exposed to view, to be finished same as specified for other exposed to
view surfaces.
2.03 HANDRAILS AND GUARDS
A.
Wall-Mounted Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated.
1. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch, minimum, to 1-1/2 inches, maximum.
B.
Guards: Pipe railings as specified in Section 05 5213.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 5100 - 2
METAL STAIRS
2.04 MATERIALS
A.
Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.
B.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M or ASTM A501 structural tubing, round and shapes as
indicated.
C.
Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.
D.
Ungalvanized Steel Sheet: Hot- or cold-rolled, except use cold-rolled where finished work will
be exposed to view.
1. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation CS (commercial steel).
2. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS (commercial steel).
E.
Concrete Fill: Type specified in Section 03 3000.
F.
Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, and galvanized to ASTM
A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components.
G.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
H.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
2.05 SHOP FINISHING
A.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
B.
Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.
C.
Prime Painting: Use specified shop- and touch-up primer.
1. Preparation of Steel: In accordance with SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning.
2. Number of Coats: One.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
When field welding is required, clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal.
B.
Supply items required to be cast into concrete and embedded in masonry with setting
templates.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Provide anchors, plates, angles, hangers, and struts required for connecting stairs to structure.
C.
Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
D.
Provide welded field joints where specifically indicated on drawings. Perform field welding in
accordance with AWS D1.1.
E.
Other field joints may be either welded or bolted provided the result complies with the limitations
specified for jointing quality levels.
F.
Obtain approval prior to site cutting or creating adjustments not scheduled.
G.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 5100 - 3
METAL STAIRS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 05 5213
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall mounted handrails.
B.
Stair railings and guardrails.
C.
Balcony railings and guardrails.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2012.
B.
ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.
C.
ASTM E935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems
and Rails for Buildings; 2013.
D.
ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for
Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006).
E.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of
fasteners, and accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Metal Rail Infill:
1. The Western Group; Woven Wire: www.architecturalwire.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent
requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code.
B.
Distributed Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist distributed
force of 50 pounds per linear foot applied to the top of the assembly and in any direction, without
damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E935.
C.
Concentrated Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist a
concentrated force of 200 pounds applied at any point on the top of the assembly and in any
direction, without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E935.
D.
Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to
connections or members.
E.
Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights.
F.
Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same
materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are
unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners.
G.
Provide slip-on non-weld mechanical fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal
exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice
connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets.
2.03 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM
A.
Steel Tube: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 5213 - 1
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 80, black finish.
C.
Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously
welded; joints and seams ground smooth.
D.
Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing.
E.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
2.04 FABRICATION
A.
Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to
building structure.
B.
Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.
C.
Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to
accommodate site assembly and installation.
D.
Welded Joints:
1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Drill
condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage
water intrusion.
2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds.
3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints
butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B.
Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates,
for installation as work of other sections.
C.
Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with
cementitious or dissimilar materials.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight
joints.
C.
Anchor railings securely to structure.
D.
Field weld anchors as indicated on drawings. Touch-up welds with primer. Grind welds
smooth.
E.
Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush
countersunk fastenings.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
C.
Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
05 5213 - 2
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 06 1000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Non-structural dimension lumber framing.
B.
Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.
C.
Sheathing.
D.
Subflooring.
E.
Underlayment.
F.
Roof-mounted curbs.
G.
Roofing nailers.
H.
Roofing cant strips.
I.
Preservative treated wood materials.
J.
Fire retardant treated wood materials.
K.
Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.
L.
Communications and electrical room mounting boards.
M. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
N.
Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill flashings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AFPA (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings;
American Forest and Paper Association; 2012.
B.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C.
ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated
Wood for Fire Testing; 2010.
D.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
E.
AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood
Protection Association; 2012.
F.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
G.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology,
Department of Commerce; 2010.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and to allow air circulation.
B.
Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or
installation.
1.05 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 1000 - 1
ROUGH CARPENTRY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Species: Douglas Fir-Larch, unless otherwise indicated.
If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no
grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the
specified requirements.
Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,
American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service
for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless
otherwise indicated.
Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance
characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.
B.
Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
C.
Provide sustainably harvested wood; see Section 01 6000 for requirements.
D.
Lumber salvaged from deconstruction or demolition of existing buildings or structures is
permitted in lieu of sustainably harvested lumber provided it is clean, denailed, and free of paint
and finish materials, and other contamination; identify source.
1. Where salvaged lumber is used for structural applications, provide lumber re-graded by an
inspection service accredited by the American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc;
www.alsc.org.
E.
Lumber fabricated from recovered timber (abandoned in transit) is permitted in lieu of
sustainably harvested lumber, unless otherwise noted, provided it meets the specified
requirements for new lumber and is free of contamination; identify source.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
A.
Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
B.
Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
C.
Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ):
1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch.
2. Grade: No. 2.
D.
Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 by 6 through 4 by 16 ):
1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch.
E.
Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density
fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or
less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B.
Other Applications:
1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C
Plugged or better, Exterior grade.
2. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better.
3. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity
and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
2. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry.
B.
Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from
continuous rolls.
C.
Sill Flashing: As specified in Section 07 6200.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 1000 - 2
ROUGH CARPENTRY
2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System
for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific
applications.
1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating
compliance with specified requirements.
2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an
ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with
AWPA standards.
B.
Fire Retardant Treatment:
1. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically treated
and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion
when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated
weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D2898.
a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber
and 15 percent for plywood.
b. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground.
2. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low
temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated;
capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an
additional 20 minutes.
a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber
and 15 percent for plywood.
b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated .
c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may
become wet.
C.
Preservative Treatment:
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Where wood framing bears on cementitious foundations, install full width sill flashing continuous
over top of foundation, lap ends of flashing minimum of 4 inches and seal.
B.
Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket
cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts.
C.
Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B.
Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C.
Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately
after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.
Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would
lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.
B.
Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to
maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and
installation of permanent bracing.
C.
Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 1000 - 3
ROUGH CARPENTRY
D.
Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and
spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame
Construction Manual.
E.
Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that
are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed.
F.
Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.
3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
B.
In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,
unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is
explicitly indicated.
C.
Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking:
1. Cabinets and shelf supports.
2. Wall brackets.
3. Handrails.
4. Grab bars.
5. Towel and bath accessories.
6. Wall-mounted door stops.
7. Chalkboards and marker boards.
8. Wall paneling and trim.
9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.
3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY
A.
Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and
roofing assembly installation.
B.
Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are specified and
where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with
edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into
studs in field of board.
1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.
2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board
parallel to studs.
3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.
4. Size: 48 by 96 inches, installed horizontally at ceiling height.
3.07 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts,
complying with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.
3.08 TOLERANCES
A.
Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.
B.
Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet
maximum.
3.09 CLEANING
A.
Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 7419.
1. Comply with applicable regulations.
2. Do not burn scrap on project site.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 1000 - 4
ROUGH CARPENTRY
3.
4.
Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.
Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation
facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.
B.
Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
C.
Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 1000 - 5
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 06 1219
STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Structural insulated panels for ceilings.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013.
B.
ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
C.
ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2014.
D.
ASTM D1622 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2008.
E.
ASTM D2559 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Bonded Structural Wood Products for
Use Under Exterior Exposure Conditions; 2012a.
F.
PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; National Institute of
Standards and Technology, U.S. Department of Commerce; 2010.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the
work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide structural insulated panel manufacturer's product literature including
structural properties, design load capacities and installation instructions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Fully dimensioned fabrication and installation details for structural insulated
panels. Indicate dimensions, materials, connections and arrangement of joints. Include
anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories.
1. Include selections from prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance with the
applicable building code and the structural insulated panel manufacturer's requirements.
D.
Designer's Qualification Statement.
E.
Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
F.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer Qualifications: Perform design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is
located.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
1. Member of Structural Insulated Panel Association (SIPA).
2. Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less
than three years of documented experience.
C.
Maintain one copy of each installation standard on site throughout the duration of concrete
work.
D.
Copies of Documents at Project Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced
document that prescribes execution requirements.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 1219 - 1
STRUCTURAL INSULATED
PANELS
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver structural insulated panels in manufacturer's packaging, if any, and with manufacturer
labels and markings intact.
B.
Cover structural insulated panels with waterproof covering during transportation and storage.
Keep dry.
C.
Protect edges of wood construction panels and foam cores.
D.
Fully support structural insulated panels off the ground.
E.
Do not lift structural insulated panels by wood construction panel layer.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Structural Insulated Panels:
1. Thermal Foams Inc; FRP Laminated Panels.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 STRUCTURAL INSULATED PANELS
A.
Structural Insulated Panels: Provide structural insulated panels capable of withstanding design
loads including dead load, live load, wind load and seismic load.
B.
Structural Insulated Wall Panel: Oriented strand board construction panel laminated to both
sides of rigid extruded polystyrene insulation board.
1. Panel Size: 4 feet by 14 10-1/4 feet.
2. Overall Thickness: 6-9/16 inches, nominal.
3. Span Rating: 24/16, minimum.
4. Edge Treatment: Manufacturer's proprietary connectors. Use vinyl moldings.
5. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 24.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Oriented Strand Board: 7/16 inch thick, APA Exposure 1, DOC PS-2 span rating 24/16,
minimum.
B.
Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Insulation Board:
1. Density: ASTM C578, Type X; 1.30 lb/cu ft, minimum, when tested according to ASTM
D1622.
2. Thermal Resistance (R-value): 5.0 deg F hr sq ft/Btu, minimum, when tested at 1 inch
thickness in accordance with ASTM C518 or ASTM C177.
C.
Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard; complying with ASTM D2559.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine foundations, sills, framing and other surfaces to receive structural insulated panels.
Verify conditions suitable for installation. Report unsatisfactory conditions to Architect. Do not
proceed with structural insulated panel work until unsatisfactory conditions corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.
B.
Coordinate installation of support hangars with structural steel in other sections.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install structural insulated panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 1219 - 2
STRUCTURAL INSULATED
PANELS
1.
2.
Comply with manufacturer's written recommendation for number, size and placement of
fasteners.
Join structural insulated panel edges according to manufacturer's written recommendation.
B.
Restrictions:
1. Do not over cut oriented strand board or plywood face when field-cutting openings.
2. Do not install electrical chases inside structural insulated panels.
3. Do not install plumbing inside structural insulated panels without consulting manufacturer
and obtaining written recommendations.
4. Protect structural insulated panel core from solvents and solvent vapors.
C.
Prevent damage to structural insulated panels.
D.
Install structural insulated panels plumb, square and true to line.
E.
Seal panel joints with manufacturer's recommended sealant.
F.
Repair or replace damaged panels.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Do not leave panels exposed to moisture. Remove wet panels or allow to dry completely before
installation of sealants, tape, weather barrier and siding or other veneer.
B.
Protect installed structural insulated panels from subsequent construction operations.
C.
Cover top and edges of unfinished panel work. Protect from weather and prevent accumulation
of water in cores.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 1219 - 3
STRUCTURAL INSULATED
PANELS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 061753
SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Extent and configuration of prefabricated wood trusses is indicated on drawings.
1. Types of prefabricated wood trusses include:
a. Parallel chord 4 x 2 wood trusses.
B. Roof sheathing is specified in Division-6 section "Rough Carpentry".
1.03 DEFINITIONS
Prefabricated wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of metal plate connected
members which are fabricated from dimension lumber and which have been cut and assembled
prior to delivery to the project site.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit fabricator's technical data covering lumber, metal plates, hardware, fabrication
process, treatment (if any), handling and erection.
2. Submit certificate, signed by an officer of fabricating firm, indicating that trusses to be
supplied for project comply with indicated requirements.
3. Submit certification by treating plant that required fire- retardant treatment complies with
specified standard and other requirements, and by metal connector plate manufacturer
that fire-retardant formulation is approved for use with plates for truss exposure indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings which have been signed and stamped by a Professional Structural
Engineer licensed to practice in the jurisdiction where trusses will be installed.
2. Submit shop drawings showing species, sizes and stress grades of lumber to be used;
pitch, span, camber, configuration and spacing for each type of truss required; type, size,
material, finish, design values, location of metal connector plates; bearing and anchorage
details; and temporary and permanent lateral bracing.
a. Submittals shall include erection plans, piece drawings, detailed information indicating
fasteners, method of attachment, and any other information required to safely and
adequately construct prefabricated wood trusses.
C. Calculations:
Submit design analysis and test reports stamped by a Professional Structural Engineer currently
registered in New York State indicating loading, section modulus, assumed allowable stress,
stress diagrams, dead and live load deflections, and any miscellaneous calculations and similar
information needed for a complete analysis and to ensure that trusses comply with
requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TPI Standards: Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following
Truss Plate Institute (TPI) publications:
1. "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction".
2. "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Parallel Chord Wood Trusses".
3. "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing and Bracing Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses".
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 1753 - 1
SHOP FABRICATED WOOD
TRUSSES
4.
5.
"Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected
Wood Trusses".
"Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses".
B. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "National Design
Specification for Wood Construction" published by The American Forest and Paper Association
(AF & PA).
C. Design by Manufacturer: Trusses shall be designed by Connector plate manufacturer to
support all superimposed dead and live loads indicated, with design approved and certified by a
structural engineer licensed to practice in the jurisdiction where trusses will be installed.
D. Connector Plate Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide truss connector plates manufactured by
a firm which is a member of TPI and which complies with TPI quality control procedures for
manufacture of connector plates published in TPI "Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected
Wood Trusses".
E. Fabricator's Qualifications:
1. Provide trusses by a firm which has a record of successfully fabricating trusses similar to
type indicated and which complies with the following requirements for quality control:
2. Fabricator participates in TPI "Quality Assurance Inspection Program" as a licensee
authorized to apply TPI marks to trusses.
3. Fabricator practices a quality control program which complies with, or is comparable to,
one published in TPI "Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses" and
which involves inspection by an independent inspection and testing agency acceptable to
Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Single Source Responsibility for Connector Plates: Provide metal connector plates from a
single manufacturer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle and store trusses with care, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI
recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning or other cause for which truss is
not designed to resist or endure.
B. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying
work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide metal connector plates of one
of the following:
1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
2. Gang Nail Systems, Inc.
3. Hydro-Air Engineering, Inc.
4. Inter-Lock Steel Co., Inc.
5. Link-Wood Construction Systems.
6. Lumbermate Company.
7. Robbins Manufacturing Co.
8. Tee-Lok Corp.
9. Truss Connectors of America.
2.02 LUMBER
A. Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency.
B. Lumber Standard: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber
Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American
Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.
C. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them to
lumber grades and species include the following:
1. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian).
2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
3. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
4. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 1753 - 2
SHOP FABRICATED WOOD
TRUSSES
D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions.
E. Provide lumber manufactured to actual sizes required by PS 20 to comply with requirements
indicated below:
1. Dressed, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Moisture Content: Seasoned, with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of
dressing and shipment for sizes 2" or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Grade and Species: Provide any species and grade which has been stress- rated and
certified, at indicated moisture content.
2.03 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES, FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Connector Plates: Fabricate connector plates from metal complying with the following
requirements:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: Structural (physical) quality steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 446, Grade A; zinc coated by hot-dip process to comply with ASTM A 525,
Designation G60; minimum coated metal thickness indicated but not less than 0.036".
2. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: Structural (physical quality steel sheet complying
with ASTM A 591, Coating Class C, and, for structural properties, with ASTM A 446, Grade
A; zinc- coated by electro-deposition; with minimum coated metal thickness indicated but
not less than 0.047".
3. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Structural (physical) quality steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 792, Coating Designation AZ 50, and, for structural properties,
with ASTM A 446, Grade A; aluminum-zinc alloy-coated by hot-dip process; with minimum
coated metal thickness indicated but not less than 0.036".
4. Stainless steel sheet complying with ASTM A 167 and, for structural properties, with ASTM
A 446, Grade A; with minimum metal thickness indicated but not less than 0.035".
5. Any metal indicated above.
B. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish indicated for nails, screws,
bolts, nuts, washers and other anchoring devices.
2.04 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Where fire-retardant treated wood ("FRTW") is required for trusses,
pressure impregnate lumber with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 for
treatment type indicated below and identify treated material with appropriate classification
marking of Underwriters Laboratory, Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Use treatment type approved by metal connector plate
manufacturer as being non-corrosive to metal connector plates for application indicated.
1. Interior Type A: Use where "FRTW" wood is indicated for interior applications.
2. Exterior Type: Use where "FRTW" wood is indicated for exterior, exposed applications.
B. Inspect each piece of treated lumber after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles and sizes to produce close fitting joints with
wood-to-wood bearing in assembled units.
B. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness and anchorage details
required for types of joint designs indicated.
C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure
uniformity and accuracy of assembly with close fitting joints. Position members to produce
design camber indicated.
D. Connect truss members by means of metal connector plates accurately located and securely
fastened to each side of wood members by means indicated or approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Erect and brace trusses to comply with recommendations of manufacturer and the Truss
Plate Institute.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 1753 - 3
SHOP FABRICATED WOOD
TRUSSES
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each other, located
accurately at design spacings indicated.
Hoist units in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses
required, applied at designated lift points as recommended by fabricator, exercising care
not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.
Provide temporary bracing as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel and in location
indicated, until permanent bracing is installed.
Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated.
Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain design
spacing, withstand live and dead loads including lateral loads, and to comply with other
indicated requirements.
Do not cut or remove truss members.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 1753 - 4
SHOP FABRICATED WOOD
TRUSSES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 06 2000
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Finish carpentry items.
B.
Wood door frames, glazed frames.
C.
Wood casings and moldings.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated
and adjacent components.
B.
Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data:
1. Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions.
2. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and
accessories.
1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS).
D.
Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 8 inch long.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20
percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect work from moisture damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS
A.
Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) for Premium Grade.
B.
Interior Woodwork Items:
1. Moldings, Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: Clear white pine; prepare for paint
finish.
2. Door, Glazed Light, and Pocket Door Frames: White birch; prepare for paint finish.
3. Window Sills: Clear fir; prepare for transparent finish.
2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A.
Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B.
Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is permitted,
unless otherwise noted, provided it is clean and free of contamination; identify source; provide
lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American Lumber Standard
Committee, Inc.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 2000 - 1
FINISH CARPENTRY
2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS
A.
Softwood Lumber: Fir species, Quarter sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with
vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.
2.04 FASTENINGS
A.
Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; not
containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds.
B.
Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; painted finish in concealed locations and
concealed finish in exposed locations. Hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A
153/A 153M, where fasteners and anchorages are exposed in areas of high humidity.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Alkyd primer sealer.
B.
Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.
2.06 FABRICATION
A.
Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
B.
When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
2.07 SHOP FINISHING
A.
Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B.
Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
C.
On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and
is of type recommended for the applicable finish.
D.
Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.
E.
Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B.
Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and
ready to receive this work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) requirements for grade indicated.
B.
Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
C.
Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use
additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Brush apply one coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials.
Treat site-sawn cuts.
C.
Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.
3.04 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING
A.
Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.
B.
Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with
cementitious materials.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 2000 - 2
FINISH CARPENTRY
B.
Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
06 2000 - 3
FINISH CARPENTRY
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 07 2100
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Board insulation and integral vapor retarder at over roof deck and over roof sheathing.
B.
Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall construction.
C.
Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall
and roof.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Installation requirements for board insulation over steep
slope roof sheathing or roof structure.
C.
Section 07 2129 - Sprayed Insulation: Sprayed-on, adhered fibrous insulation.
D.
Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
B.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
C.
ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750
Degrees C; 2012.
1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to
successful installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPLICATIONS
A.
Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.
B.
Insulation in Wood Framed Ceiling Structure: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.
C.
Insulation Over Roof Deck: Polyisocyanurate board.
2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used,
at Contractor's option.
B.
Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;
friction fit.
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for
facing, if any.
4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
5. Thermal Resistance: R of 19.
6. Facing: Aluminum foil, flame spread 25 rated; one side.
7. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
8. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 2100 - 1
THERMAL INSULATION
C.
Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying with
ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84.
1. Where indicated, provide foil facing on one side; with flame spread index of 25 or less,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Thermal Resistance: R of 19.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville International, Inc.; MinWool Sound Attenuation Fire Batts:
www.jm.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarder: Black polyethylene film for above grade application, 10 mil thick.
B.
Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide.
C.
Tape joints of rigid insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers'
instructions.
D.
Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be
adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate,
capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are
ready to receive insulation and adhesive.
B.
Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or
substances that may impede adhesive bond.
3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION OVER LOW SLOPE ROOF DECK
A.
Board Installation Over Roof Deck, General:
1. See applicable roofing specification section for specific board installation requirements.
2. Ensure vapor retarder is clean and dry, continuous, and ready for application of roofing
system.
3. Fasten insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's written instructions
and applicable Factory Mutual requirements.
4. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with roofing in same day.
3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION OVER STEEP SLOPE ROOF SHEATHING OR ROOF STRUCTURE
A.
Installation of board insulation over steep slope roof structure or roof sheathing is specified in
Section 06 1000.
3.04 BATT INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C.
Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
D.
Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
within the plane of the insulation.
E.
Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap
ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members.
F.
Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum 6 inches on center.
G.
Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.
H.
At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on
center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 2100 - 2
THERMAL INSULATION
I.
Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.
J.
Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other
items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 2100 - 3
THERMAL INSULATION
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 07 2119
FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Foamed-in-place insulation.
1. In exterior framed walls.
2. In exterior wall crevices.
3. At junctions of dissimilar wall and roof materials.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
B.
ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2012.
C.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
D.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.
E.
ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
F.
ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified, with
minimum three years documented experience.
1.04 MOCK-UP
A.
Provide 1 mock-up, 10 feet long by 10 feet wide; include insulation overcoat, wall construction,
window and frame, and door frame in mock-up.
B.
Locate where directed.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply foam when temperature is below that specified by the manufacturer for ambient air
and substrate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Foamed-In-Place Insulation:
1. Icynene Inc; Icynene Classic LD-C-50: www.icynene.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Foamed-In-Place Insulation: Medium-density, rigid or semi-rigid, open or closed cell
polyurethane foam; foamed on-site, using blowing agent of water or non-ozone-depleting gas.
1. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke limitations.
2. Aged Thermal Resistance (R-value): 5 (deg F hr sq ft)/Btu, minimum, when tested at 1
inch thickness in accordance with ASTM C518 after aging for 180 days at 41 degrees F.
3. Water Vapor Permeance: Vapor retarder; 1 perm, maximum, when tested at intended
thickness in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, desiccant method.
4. Water Absorption: Less than 2 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance
with ASTM D2842.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 2119 - 1
FOAMED-IN-PLACE
INSULATION
5.
6.
7.
8.
Air Permeance: 0.004 cfm/sq ft, maximum, when tested at intended thickness in
accordance with ASTM E2178 or ASTM E283 at 1.5 psf.
Closed Cell Content: At least 90 percent.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/450,
maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
Products:
a. Icynene Inc; Icynene ProSeal Eco MD-R-210: www.icynene.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify work within construction spaces or crevices is complete prior to insulation application.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean, dry, and free of matter that may inhibit insulation or overcoat
adhesion.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from over spray or dusting.
B.
Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Apply insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Apply insulation by spray method, to a uniform monolithic density without voids.
C.
Apply to achieve a thermal resistance R value of 19.
D.
Patch damaged areas.
E.
Where applied to voids and gaps assure space for expansion to avoid pressure on adjacent
materials that may bind operable parts.
F.
Trim excess away for applied trim or remove as required for continuous sealant bead.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspections and tests will be performed by an independent testing agency under provisions
of Section 01 4000.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit subsequent construction work to disturb applied insulation.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 2119 - 2
FOAMED-IN-PLACE
INSULATION
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 07 2500
WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Vapor Retarders: Materials to make exterior walls, joints between exterior walls and roof, joints
around frames of openings in exterior walls, and below raised floor slab water vapor-resistant
and air tight.
B.
Air Barriers: Materials that form a system to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints
between exterior walls and roof, joints around frames of openings in exterior walls, and below
raised floor slab.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Vapor retarder installed in conjunction with batt
insulation.
B.
Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal flashings installed in conjunction with
weather barriers.
C.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A.
Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor
retarders.
B.
Air Barrier: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor
permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent
surfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers are
classified as vapor retarders.
C.
Vapor Retarder: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively water vapor impermeable, to
the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
1. Water Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa s sq m) = 1 perm.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AATCC Test Method 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test; 2013.
B.
ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2013.
C.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
D.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013.
E.
ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013.
F.
ICC-ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.;
2013.
1.05 MOCK-UP
A.
Install air barrier and vapor retarder materials in mock-up specified in Section 07 4213 Metal
Wall Panels.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before,
during and after installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES
A.
Air Barrier:
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 2500 - 1
WEATHER BARRIERS
1.
B.
On outside surface of sheathing of exterior walls use air barrier sheet, mechanically
fastened type.
Interior Vapor Retarder:
1. On inside face of studs of exterior walls, under cladding, use mechanically fastened vapor
retarder sheet.
2. On outside face of roof, above sheathing, use mechanically fastened vapor retarder sheet.
2.02 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE)
A.
Air Barrier Sheet, Mechanically Fastened:
1. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot, maximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E2178.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: 5 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M Procedure A (desiccant method).
3. Water Penetration Resistance: Withstand a water head of 21 inches, minimum, for
minimum of 5 hours, when tested in accordance with AATCC 127.
4. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum
of 9 months weather exposure.
5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed
index of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
6. Water Resistance: Comply with applicable water-resistive requirements of ICC-ES
Acceptance Criteria AC38.
7. Products:
a. DuPont Building Innovations; Tyvek Commercial Wrap D with Tyvek Fluid Applied
Flashing - Brush Formulation, Tyvek Fluid Applied Flashing and Joint Compound,
FlexWrap NF, StraightFlash, StraightFlash VF, Tyvek Wrap Caps, and Tyvek Tape:
www.dupont.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS (AIR BARRIER AND WATER-RESISTIVE)
2.04 SEALANTS
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive sheet flashing complying with ASTM D1970, except slip
resistance requirement is waived if not installed on a roof.
1. Products:
a. DuPont Building Innovations; FlexWrap NF: www.dupont.com.
b. DuPont Building Innovations; StraightFlash: www.dupont.com.
c. DuPont Building Innovations; StraightFlash VF: www.dupont.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by material manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with
proper installation.
B.
Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and
with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 2500 - 2
WEATHER BARRIERS
C.
Vapor Retarders: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams
and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
D.
Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior:
1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal.
2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches.
3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12
inches.
4. For applications specified to be air tight, seal seams, laps, penetrations, tears, and cuts
with self-adhesive tape; use only large-headed, gasketed fasteners recommended by the
manufacturer.
5. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings.
6. Install head flashings under weather barrier.
7. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into
opening; at head, seal sheet over flange and flashing.
E.
Mechanically Fastened Sheets - Vapor Retarder On Interior:
1. When insulation is to be installed in assembly, install vapor retarder over insulation.
2. Anchor to wood framing using large-headed nails or staples at 12 to 18 inches on center
along each framing member covered; cover fasteners with seam tape.
3. Seal seams, laps, perimeter edges, penetrations, tears, and cuts with self-adhesive tape,
making air tight seal.
4. Locate laps at a framing member; at laps fasten one sheet to framing member then tape
overlapping sheet to first sheet.
5. Seal entire perimeter to structure, window and door frames, and other penetrations.
6. Where conduit, pipes, wires, ducts, outlet boxes, and other items are installed in insulation
cavity, pass vapor retarder sheet behind item but over insulation and maintain air tight
seal.
F.
Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:
1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches
onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges.
2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges
using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4
inches wide; do not seal sill flange.
3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of
opening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing.
4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches
beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.
5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing,
using joint sealant over backer rod.
6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to
weather barrier surface.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.
B.
Obtain approval of installation procedures by the weather barrier manufacturer based on a
mock-up installed in place, prior to proceeding with remainder of installation.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 2500 - 3
WEATHER BARRIERS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 07 4213
METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Manufactured metal panels for walls, with related flashings and accessory components.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Weather barrier under wall panels.
B.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout, joints, construction details, methods of anchorage.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples of wall panel and soffit panel, 12 inch by 12 inch in size
illustrating finish color, sheen, and texture.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.05 MOCK-UP
A.
Construct mock-up, 10 feet long by 10 feet wide; include panel system, glazing, attachments to
building frame, associated vapor retarder and air seal materials, weep drainage system,
sealants and seals, related insulation in mock-up.
B.
Locate where directed.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap.
B.
Store prefinished material off ground and protected from weather. Prevent twisting, bending, or
abrasion, and provide ventilation to stored materials. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
C.
Prevent contact with dissimilar materials that may cause degradation of the products.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Substantial Completion, including defects
in water tightness and integrity of seals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Corten Roofing; Product A606-4 'Western Rib' 1-1/2" Deep Rib Panel; A606-4 'Western Rib'
1-1/2" Deep Rib Panel with 30% perforation; and A606-4 'Rust Wall' 1" Deep Panel.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MANUFACTURED METAL PANELS
A.
Wall Panel System: Factory fabricated prefinished metal panel system, site assembled.
1. Provide exterior panels and flashing/trim and foam closure(s) and accessories.
2. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and
negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall.
3. Design Pressure: In accordance with applicable codes.
4. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: 1/90 of span.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 4213 - 1
METAL WALL PANELS
5.
6.
7.
8.
Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or
deterioration of seals, movement within system; movement between system and perimeter
components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release
of loads; and deflection of structural support framing.
Drainage: Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation
occurring within panel system.
Fabrication: Formed true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or
defects; pieces of longest practical lengths.
Provide continuity of air barrier and vapor retarder seal at building enclosure elements in
conjunction with materials specified in Section 07 2500.
B.
Exterior Panels:
1. Profile: Horizontal; 'Western Rib' 1-1/2" Deep Rib Panel style.
2. Side Seams: Lapped with Butyl tape mastic, Exposed fastener system with Gasketed
Stainless Steel/Painted Brown Heads.
3. Material: A606-4 Weathering Steel, minimum 22 gage thick.
4. Panel Width: 36 inches.
C.
Exterior Panels:
1. Profile: Horizontal; 'Western Rib' 1-1/2" Deep Rib Panel with 30% perforation
2. Side Seams: Lapped, Exposed fastener system with Gasketed Stainless Steel/Painted
Brown Heads.
3. Material: A606-4 Weathering Steel, minimum 22 gage thick; .127" Round holes, 7/32"
Stagger, 30.5% Open area
4. Panel Width: 36 inches.
D.
Exterior Panels:
1. Profile: Verticle; 'Rust Wall' 1" Deep Panel
2. Side Seams: Double-interlocked, tight-fitting, Concealed fastener system with Gasketed
Stainless Steel.
3. Material: A606-4 Weathering Steel, minimum 22 gage thick
4. Panel Width: 18 inches
E.
Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; Ribbed
and Smooth profile to suit system; shop cut and factory mitered to required angles.
F.
Expansion Joints: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; 22 gage;
manufacturer's standard brake formed type, of profile to suit system.
G.
Trim: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles.
H.
Anchors: Stainless steel.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with system, permanently resilient;
ultraviolet and ozone resistant.
B.
Sealants: As specified in Section 07 9005.
C.
Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application; with soft neoprene washers,
stainless steel. Fastener cap same color as exterior panel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panels.
B.
Verify that weather barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Install subgirts perpendicular to panel length, securely fastened to substrates and shimmed and
leveled to uniform plane. Space at intervals indicated.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 4213 - 2
METAL WALL PANELS
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install panels on walls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous
paint. Allow to dry prior to installation.
C.
Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb.
D.
Locate joints over supports. Lap panel ends minimum 2 inches.
E.
Provide expansion joints where indicated.
F.
Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16
inch.
B.
Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/4 inch.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 4213 - 3
METAL WALL PANELS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 07 5323
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER ROOFING (EPDM)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
EPDM membrane roofing system, including all components specified.
B.
Comply with the published recommendations and instructions of the roofing membrane
manufacturer, at http://manual.fsbp.com.
C.
Commencement of work by Contractor shall constitute acknowledgement by Contractor that this
specification can be satisfactorily executed, under the project conditions and with all necessary
prerequisites for warranty acceptance by roofing membrane manufacturer. No modification of
the Contract Sum will be made for failure to adequately examine the Contract Documents or the
project conditions.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers associated with roofing and roof insulation.
B.
Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Formed metal flashing and trim items
associated with roofing.
C.
Section 07 7100 - Roof Specialties: Manufactured copings, fascias, gravel stops, and other
flashing-related items.
D.
Section 07 7200 - Roof Accessories: Roof hatches, vents, and manufactured curbs.
E.
Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Specialties: Retrofit roof drains
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A.
Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 for definition of terms related to roofing work not
otherwise defined in the section.
B.
LTTR: Long Term Thermal Resistance, as defined by CAN-ULC S770.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C140/C140M - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units
and Related Units; 2013.
B.
ASTM C728 - Standard Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board; 2013.
C.
ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board; 2014.
D.
ASTM D1079 - Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing, and Bituminous
Materials; 2013.
E.
ASTM D2178/D2178M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing; 2013a.
F.
ASTM D4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light,
Moisture, and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2007.
G.
ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity;
1999a (Reapproved 2009).
H.
ASTM D4601/D4601M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet
Used in Roofing; 2004 (Reapproved 2012)e1.
I.
ASTM D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile;
2012.
J.
CAN-ULC-S770 - Standard Test Method Determination of L-Term Thermal Resistance Of
Closed-Cell Thermal Insulating Foams; 2009.
K.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
L.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2010.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 5323 - 1
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE
-MONOMER ROOFING (EPDM)
M. SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems;
2003. (ANSI/SPRI ES-1)
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Pre-Installation Conference: Before start of roofing work, Contractor shall hold a meeting to
discuss the proper installation of materials and requirements to achieve the warranty.
1. Require attendance with all parties directly influencing the quality of roofing work or
affected by the performance of roofing work.
2. Notify Architect well in advance of meeting.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data:
1. Provide membrane manufacturer's printed data sufficient to show that all components of
roofing system, including insulation and fasteners, comply with the specified requirements
and with the membrane manufacturer's requirements and recommendations for the
system type specified; include data for each product used in conjunction with roofing
membrane.
2. Where UL or FM requirements are specified, provide documentation that shows that the
roofing system to be installed is UL-Classified or FM-approved, as applicable; include data
itemizing the components of the classified or approved system.
C.
Samples: Submit samples of each product to be used.
D.
Shop Drawings: Provide:
1. The roof membrane manufacturer's standard details customized for this project for all
relevant conditions, including flashings, base tie-ins, roof edges, terminations, expansion
joints, penetrations, and drains.
2. For tapered insulation, provide project-specific layout and dimensions for each board.
E.
Installer Qualifications: Letter from manufacturer attesting that the roofing installer meets the
specified qualifications.
F.
Pre-Installation Notice: Copy to show that manufacturer's required Pre Installation Notice (PIN)
has been accepted and approved by the manufacturer.
G.
Executed Warranty.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Roofing installer shall have the following:
1. Current approval, license, or authorization as applicator by the manufacturer.
2. At least five years experience in installing specified system.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and
labels intact and legible.
B.
Store materials clear of ground and moisture with weather protective covering.
C.
Keep combustible materials away from ignition sources.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Comply with all warranty procedures required by manufacturer, including notifications,
scheduling, and inspections.
C.
Warranty: Firestone Limited Warranty covering membrane, roof insulation, and other indicated
components of the system, for the term indicated.
1. Limit of Liability: No dollar limitation.
2. Scope of Coverage: Repair leaks in the roofing system caused by:
a. Ordinary wear and tear of the elements.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 5323 - 2
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE
-MONOMER ROOFING (EPDM)
3.
D.
b. Manufacturing defect in Firestone brand materials.
c. Defective workmanship used to install these materials.
d. Damage due to winds up to 55 mph.
Not Covered:
a. Damage due to winds in excess of 55 mph.
b. Damage due hurricanes or tornadoes.
c. Hail.
d. Intentional damage.
e. Unintentional damage due to normal rooftop inspections, maintenance, or service.
Metal Roof Edging: Firestone full-system warranty for roof edge system, covering blow-off from
winds up to 150 mph.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer - Roofing System: Firestone Building Products LLC, Carmel, IN:
www.firestonebpco.com.
B.
Manufacturer of Insulation and Cover Boards: Same manufacturer as roof membrane.
C.
Manufacturer of Metal Roof Edging: Same manufacturer as roof membrane.
1. Metal roof edging products by other manufacturers are not acceptable.
2. Field- or shop-fabricated metal roof edgings are not acceptable.
D.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Roofing System: Ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM) single-ply membrane.
1. Membrane Attachment: Fully adhered.
2. Warranty: Full system warranty; Firestone 30 year Platinum Limited Warranty covering
membrane, roof insulation, and membrane accessories.
3. Slope: Deck is sloped but not enough; provide additional slope of 1/4 inch per foot by
means of tapered insulation.
4. Comply with applicable local building code requirements.
B.
Roofing System Components: Listed in order from the top of the roof down:
1. Membrane: Thickness as specified.
2. Base Sheet Over Insulation: Mechanically attached.
3. Insulation:
a. Maximum Board Thickness: 3 inches; use as many layers as necessary; stagger
joints in adjacent layers.
b. Tapered: Slope as indicated; provide minimum R-value at thinnest point; place
tapered layer on bottom.
c. Total R Value: 25, minimum.
d. Crickets: Tapered insulation of same type as specified for top layer; slope as
indicated.
4. Vapor Retarder: Asphalt felt over modified bitumen base sheet; base layer mechanically
fastened, top layer asphalt attached.
2.03 EPDM MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A.
Roofing and Flashing Membrane: Black, cured synthetic single-ply membrane composed of
ethylene propylene diene terpolymer (EPDM) with the following properties:
1. Reinforcement: None; membrane complying with ASTM D4637 Type I.
2. Thickness: 0.090 inch.
3. Nominal Thickness Tolerance: Plus/minus 10 percent.
4. Acceptable Product: RubberGard Platinum EPDM Membrane by Firestone.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 5323 - 3
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE
-MONOMER ROOFING (EPDM)
B.
Membrane Fasteners: Type and size as required by roof membrane manufacturer for roofing
system and warranty to be provided; use only fasteners furnished by roof membrane
manufacturer.
C.
Flashing Membrane: Self-curing, non-reinforced membrane composed of nonvulcanized EPDM
rubber, complying with ASTM D4811 Type II, and with the following properties:
1. Thickness: 0.055 inch.
2. Acceptable Product: RubberGard EPDM FormFlash by Firestone.
D.
Self-Adhesive Flashing Membrane: Semi-cured 45 mil EPDM membrane laminated to 35 mil
EPDM tape adhesive; QuickSeam Flashing by Firestone.
E.
Pre-Molded Pipe Flashings: EPDM, molded for quick adaptation to different sized pipes;
Firestone EPDM Pipe Flashing.
F.
Self-Adhesive Lap Splice Tape: 35 mil EPDM-based, formulated for compatibility with EPDM
membrane and high-solids primer; QuickSeam Splice Tape by Firestone.
G.
Splice Adhesive: Synthetic polymer-based, formulated for compatibility with EPDM membrane
and metal surfaces; SA-1065 Splice Adhesive by Firestone.
H.
Adhesive Primer: Synthetic rubber based primer formulated for compatibility with EPDM
membrane and tape adhesive, with VOC content less than 2.1 lb/gal; QuickPrime Plus LVOC by
Firestone.
I.
Seam Edge Treatment: EPDM rubber-based sealant, formulated for sealing exposed edges of
membrane at seams; Lap Sealant HS by Firestone.
J.
Pourable Sealer: Two-part polyurethane, two-color for reliable mixing; Pourable Sealer by
Firestone.
K.
Water Block Seal: Butyl rubber sealant for use between two surfaces, not exposed; Water
Block Seal by Firestone.
L.
Metal Plates and Strips Used for Fastening Membrane and Insulation: Steel with Galvalume
coating; corrosion-resistance meeting FM 4470 criteria.
M. Termination Bars: Aluminum bars with integral caulk ledge; 1.3 inches wide by 0.10 inch thick;
Firestone Termination Bar by Firestone.
2.04 VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS
A.
Base Sheet: Firestone MB Base Sheet; high-performance, asphalt coated, fiberglass
reinforced, roofing base sheet complying with ASTM D4601 Type II.
B.
Asphalt Felt: Asphalt impregnated, glass fiber mat reinforced roofing sheet, complying with
ASTM D2178/D2178M, Type IV or VI.
C.
Asphalt: As recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer.
2.05 ROOF INSULATION AND COVER BOARDS
A.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Closed cell polyisocyanurate foam with black glass
reinforced mat laminated to faces, complying with ASTM C1289 Type II Class 1, with the
following additional characteristics:
1. Thickness: As indicated elsewhere.
2. Size: 48 inches by 96 inches, nominal.
a. Exception: Insulation to be attached using adhesive or asphalt may be no larger than
48 inches by 48 inches, nominal.
3. R-Value (LTTR):
a. 1.0 inch Thickness: 6.0, minimum.
b. 1.25 inch Thickness: 7.5, minimum.
c. 1.5 inch Thickness: 9.0, minimum.
d. 1.75 inch Thickness: 10.5, minimum.
e. 2.0 inch Thickness: 12.1, minimum.
f.
3.0 inch Thickness: 18.5, minimum.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 5323 - 4
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE
-MONOMER ROOFING (EPDM)
4.
5.
6.
g. 4.0 inch Thickness: 25.0, minimum.
Compressive Strength: 20 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C1289.
Ozone Depletion Potential: Zero; made without CFC or HCFC blowing agents.
Recycled Content: 19 percent post-consumer and 15 percent post-industrial, average.
2.06 METAL ACCESSORIES
A.
Metal Roof Edging and Fascia: Continuous metal edge member serving as termination of roof
membrane and retainer for metal fascia; watertight with no exposed fasteners; mounted to roof
edge nailer.
1. Wind Performance:
a. Membrane Pull-Off Resistance: 100 lbs/ft, minimum, when tested in accordance with
ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Test Method RE-1, current edition.
b. Fascia Pull-Off Resistance: At least the minimum required when tested in
accordance with ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Test Method RE-2, current edition.
c. Provide product listed in current Factory Mutual Research Corporation Approval
Guide with at least FM 1-270 rating.
2. Fascia Face Height: 8-1/2 inches.
3. Edge Member Height Above Nailer: 1-1/4 inches.
4. Length: 144 inches.
5. Functional Characteristics: Fascia retainer supports while allowing for free thermal cycling
of fascia.
6. Aluminum Bar: Continuous 6063-T6 alloy aluminum extrusion with pre-punched slotted
holes; miters welded; injection molded EPDM splices to allow thermal expansion.
7. Anchor Bar Cleat: 20 gage, 0.036 inch G90 coated commercial type galvanized steel with
pre-punched holes.
8. Curved Applications: Factory modified.
9. Fasteners: Factory-provided corrosion resistant fasteners, with drivers; no exposed
fasteners permitted.
10. Special Shaped Components: Provide factory-fabricated pieces necessary for complete
installation, including miters, scuppers, and end caps; minimum 14 inch long legs on
corner pieces.
11. Scuppers: Welded watertight.
12. Accessories: Provide matching brick wall cap, downspout, extenders, and other special
fabrications as shown on the drawings.
2.07 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Wood Nailers: PS 20 dimension lumber, Structural Grade No. 2 or better Southern Pine,
Douglas Fir; or PS 1, APA Exterior Grade plywood; pressure preservative treated.
1. Width: 3-1/2 inches, nominal minimum, or as wide as the nailing flange of the roof
accessory to be attached to it.
2. Thickness: Same as thickness of roof insulation.
B.
Cant Strips and Tapered Edge Strips: 45 degree face slope and minimum 5 inch face
dimension; provide at all angle changes between vertical and horizontal planes that exceed 45
degrees.
1. Type: Non-flammable perlite, complying with ASTM C728.
2. Install using hot asphalt (Type IV), roofing mastic, or mechanically fastened using
fasteners and plates approved by roofing manufacturer.
C.
Concrete Pavers: Interlocking, with shiplap edges on all sides and integral radiused bearing
pads.
1. Size: Approximately 12 inches by 16 inches by 1-1/2 inches thick.
2. Weight Per Unit Surface Area: 12 lbs per square foot, nominal.
3. Weight Tolerance: Plus/minus 0.75 pounds per square foot, maximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C140/C140M.
4. Density: 125 pounds per cubic foot, nominal.
5. Compressive Strength: 5000 psi, nominal.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 5323 - 5
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE
-MONOMER ROOFING (EPDM)
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Water Absorption: 5 percent, nominal.
Hold-Down Clips: Aluminum, furnished by paver manufacturer.
Manufacturer: Same as roofing membrane.
Acceptable Product: Ballast Paver by Firestone.
Ballast Protection Mat: Woven polypropylene.
1. Provide under all pavers and crushed rock.
2. Weight: 6.0 ounces per square yard, when tested in accordance with ASTM D5261.
3. UV Resistance: 70 percent strength retained, when tested in accordance with ASTM
D4355 at 500 hours.
4. Apparent Opening Size: U.S. Sieve 40, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4751.
5. Permittivity: 1/0.05 second, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491.
6. Flow Rate: 4 gal/min/sq ft, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491.
7. Acceptable Product: Ballast Paver Mat by Firestone.
PART 3 INSTALLATION
3.01 GENERAL
A.
Install roofing, insulation, flashings, and accessories in accordance with roofing manufacturer's
published instructions and recommendations for the specified roofing system. Where
manufacturer provides no instructions or recommendations, follow good roofing practices and
industry standards. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
B.
Obtain all relevant instructions and maintain copies at project site for duration of installation
period.
C.
Do not start work until Pre-Installation Notice has been submitted to manufacturer as notification
that this project requires a manufacturer's warranty.
D.
Perform work using competent and properly equipped personnel.
E.
Temporary closures, which ensure that moisture does not damage any completed section of the
new roofing system, are the responsibility of the applicator. Completion of flashings,
terminations, and temporary closures shall be completed as required to provide a watertight
condition.
F.
Install roofing membrane only when surfaces are clean, dry, smooth and free of snow or ice; do
not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when ambient conditions will not allow
proper application; consult manufacturer for recommended procedures during cold weather. Do
not work with sealants and adhesives when material temperature is outside the range of 60 to
80 degrees F.
G.
Protect adjacent construction, property, vehicles, and persons from damage related to roofing
work; repair or restore damage caused by roofing work.
1. Protect from spills and overspray from bitumen, adhesives, sealants and coatings.
2. Particularly protect metal, glass, plastic, and painted surfaces from bitumen, adhesives,
and sealants within the range of wind-borne overspray.
3. Protect finished areas of the roofing system from roofing related work traffic and traffic by
other trades.
H.
Until ready for use, keep materials in their original containers as labeled by the manufacturer.
I.
Consult membrane manufacturer's instructions, container labels, and Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) for specific safety instructions. Keep all adhesives, sealants, primers and
cleaning materials away from all sources of ignition.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roof deck to determine that it is sufficiently rigid to support installers and their
mechanical equipment and that deflection will not strain or rupture roof components or deform
deck.
B.
Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. Correct defects in the
substrate before commencing with roofing work.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 5323 - 6
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE
-MONOMER ROOFING (EPDM)
C.
Examine roof substrate to verify that it is properly sloped to drains.
D.
Verify that the specifications and drawing details are workable and not in conflict with the roofing
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions; start of work constitutes acceptable of
project conditions and requirements.
3.03 PREPARATION
A.
Take appropriate measures to ensure that fumes from adhesive solvents are not drawn into the
building through air intakes.
B.
Prior to proceeding, prepare roof surface so that it is clean, dry, and smooth, and free of sharp
edges, fins, roughened surfaces, loose or foreign materials, oil, grease and other materials that
may damage the membrane.
C.
Fill all surface voids in the immediate substrate that are greater than 1/4 inch wide with fill
material acceptable insulation to membrane manufacturer.
D.
Seal, grout, or tape deck joints, where needed, to prevent bitumen seepage into building.
3.04 VAPOR RETARDER
A.
Before installing insulation install vapor retarder directly over the deck.
B.
Install modified bitumen base sheet using the appropriate deck fasteners and insulation plates.
Apply a second layer of modified bitumen base sheet in solid mopping of asphalt. Apply a glaze
coat of asphalt over the base sheet.
C.
Ensure that all penetrations and edge conditions are sealed to prevent moisture and air drive
into the roofing system.
3.05 INSULATION AND COVER BOARD INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulation in configuration and with attachment method(s) specified in PART 2, under
Roofing System.
B.
Install insulation in a manner that will not compromise the vapor retarder integrity.
C.
Install only as much insulation as can be covered with the completed roofing system before the
end of the day's work or before the onset of inclement weather.
D.
Lay roof insulation in courses parallel to roof edges.
E.
Neatly and tightly fit insulation to all penetrations, projections, and nailers, with gaps not greater
than 1/4 inch. Fill gaps greater than 1/4 inch with acceptable insulation. Do not leave the roofing
membrane unsupported over a space greater than 1/4 inch.
3.06 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A.
Beginning at low point of roof, place membrane without stretching over substrate and allow to
relax at least 30 minutes before attachment or splicing; in colder weather allow for longer relax
time.
B.
Lay out the membrane pieces so that field and flashing splices are installed to shed water.
C.
Install membrane without wrinkles and without gaps or fishmouths in seams; bond and test
seams and laps in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions and details.
D.
Install membrane adhered to the substrate, with edge securement as specified.
E.
Adhered Membrane: Bond membrane sheet to substrate using membrane manufacturer's
recommended bonding material, application rate, and procedures.
F.
Edge Securement: Secure membrane at all locations where membrane terminates or goes
through an angle change greater than 2 in 12 inches using mechanically fastened reinforced
perimeter fastening strips, plates, or metal edging as indicated or as recommended by roofing
manufacturer.
1. Exceptions: Round pipe penetrations less than 18 inches in diameter and square
penetrations less than 4 inches square.
2. Metal edging is not merely decorative; ensure anchorage of membrane as intended by
roofing manufacturer.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 5323 - 7
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE
-MONOMER ROOFING (EPDM)
3.07 FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install flashings, including laps, splices, joints, bonding, adhesion, and attachment, as required
by membrane manufacturer's recommendations and details.
B.
Metal Accessories: Install metal edgings, gravel stops, and copings in locations indicated on
the drawings, with horizontal leg of edge member over membrane and flashing over metal onto
membrane.
1. Follow roofing manufacturer's instructions.
2. Remove protective plastic surface film immediately before installation.
3. Install water block sealant under the membrane anchorage leg.
4. Flash with manufacturer's recommended flashing sheet unless otherwise indicated.
5. Where single application of flashing will not completely cover the metal flange, install
additional piece of flashing to cover the metal edge.
6. If the roof edge includes a gravel stop and sealant is not applied between the laps in the
metal edging, install an additional piece of self-adhesive flashing membrane over the metal
lap to the top of the gravel stop; apply seam edge treatment at the intersections of the two
flashing sections.
7. When the roof slope is greater than 1:12, apply seam edge treatment along the back edge
of the flashing.
C.
Roofing Expansion Joints: Install as shown on drawings and as recommended by roofing
manufacturer.
D.
Flashing at Walls, Curbs, and Other Vertical and Sloped Surfaces: Install weathertight flashing
at all walls, curbs, parapets, curbs, skylights, and other vertical and sloped surfaces that the
roofing membrane abuts to; extend flashing at least 8 inches high above membrane surface.
1. Use the longest practical flashing pieces.
2. Evaluate the substrate and overlay and adjust installation procedure in accordance with
membrane manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Complete the splice between flashing and the main roof sheet with specified splice
adhesive before adhering flashing to the vertical surface.
4. Provide termination directly to the vertical substrate as shown on roof drawings.
E.
Roof Drains:
1. Taper insulation around drain to provide smooth transition from roof surface to drain. Use
specified pre-manufactured tapered insulation with facer or suitable bonding surface to
achieve slope; slope not to exceed manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Position membrane, then cut a hole for roof drain to allow 1/2 to 3/4 inch of membrane to
extend inside clamping ring past drain bolts.
3. Make round holes in membrane to align with clamping bolts; do not cut membrane back to
bolt holes.
4. Apply sealant on top of drain bowl where clamping ring seats below the membrane
5. Install roof drain clamping ring and clamping bolts; tighten clamping bolts to achieve
constant compression.
F.
Flashing at Penetrations: Flash all penetrations passing through the membrane; make flashing
seals directly to the penetration.
1. Pipes, Round Supports, and Similar Items: Flash with specified pre-molded pipe flashings
wherever practical; otherwise use specified self-curing elastomeric flashing.
3.08 FINISHING AND WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A.
Install walkways at access points to the roof, around rooftop equipment that may require
maintenance, and where indicated on the drawings.
1. Use concrete pavers.
B.
Pavers: Install butted tightly, not more than 1/2 inch apart.
1. Pavers for Walkways: Prior to setting pavers, adhere an additional layer of roofing
membrane over area where pavers will be laid, extending minimum of 2 inches beyond the
paver.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 5323 - 8
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE
-MONOMER ROOFING (EPDM)
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspection by Manufacturer: Provide final inspection of the roofing system by a Technical
Representative employed by roofing system manufacturer specifically to inspect installation for
warranty purposes (i.e. not a sales person).
B.
Perform all corrections necessary for issuance of warranty.
3.10 CLEANING
A.
Clean all contaminants generated by roofing work from building and surrounding areas,
including bitumen, adhesives, sealants, and coatings.
B.
Repair or replace building components and finished surfaces damaged or defaced due to the
work of this section; comply with recommendations of manufacturers of components and
surfaces.
C.
Remove leftover materials, trash, debris, equipment from project site and surrounding areas.
3.11 PROTECTION
A.
Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, provide durable
protection and replace or repair damaged roofing to original condition.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 5323 - 9
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE
-MONOMER ROOFING (EPDM)
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 07 7100
ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Manufactured roof specialties, including copings, fascias, and gravel stops.
B.
Roof control and expansion joint covers.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors
Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.
B.
SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems;
Single Ply Roofing Industry; 2003. (ANSI/SPRI ES-1)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and
locations.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with NRCA ML104 details.
1. Maintain one copy on project site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Roof Edge Flashings and Copings:
1. W.P. Hickman Company; PermaSnap 2 Coping: www.wph.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Control and Expansion Joint Covers:
1. Inpro; Product 674 Series: www.Inpro.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A.
Roof Edge Flashings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed
fasteners.
1. Configuration: Fascia, cant, and edge securement for roof membrane;
2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES-1 RE-1 and RE-2 to positive and
negative design wind pressure as defined by applicable code.
3. Material: Formed aluminum sheet, 0.050 inch thick, minimum.
4. Products:
a. W.P. Hickman Company; Extruded TerminEdge: www.wph.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Copings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed fasteners.
1. Configuration: Concealed continuous hold down cleat at both legs; internal splice piece at
joints of same material, thickness and finish as cap; concealed stainless steel fasteners.
2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES-1 RE-3 to positive and negative
design wind pressure as defined by applicable code.
3. Material: A606-4 Weathering steel, 22 gage, 0,03 inch thick, minimum.
4. Products:
a. Corten Roofing.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 7100 - 1
ROOF SPECIALTIES
C.
Coping: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed fasteners.
1. Configuration: Concealed conrinuous hold down cleat at both legs; internal splice piece at
joints of same material, thickness and finish as cap; concealed stainless steel fasteners.
2. Pull-off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES-1 RE-3 to positive and negative
design wind pressure as defined by applicable code.
3. Material: Formed aluminum sheet, 0.50 inch thick, minimum.
4. Products:
a. W.P. Hickman Company; PermaSnap 2 Coping: www.wph.com
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D.
Control and Expansion Joint Covers: Composite construction of 2 inch wide flexible EPDM
flashing of white color with closed cell urethane foam backing, each edge seamed to aluminum
sheet metal flanges, designed for nominal joint width of 1 inch. Include special formed corners,
tees, intersections, and wall flashings, each sealed watertight.
E.
Engineered Roof Perimeter Blocking: Prefabricated 20 gage, 0.036 inch galvanized steel
retainer for rigid insulaiton; with cleat to accept copings; attach to roof sheathing in lieu of wood
blocking at roof edge; for low slope roof installations.
1. Style: Cant.
2. Product:
a. W.P. Hickman Company; EdgeBox: www.wph.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of this
Section are in place and positioned correctly.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane and
base flashings.
C.
Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cement with work of this section to ensure water
tightness.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 7100 - 2
ROOF SPECIALTIES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 07 7200
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Manufactured curbs, equipment rails, and pedestals.
B.
Roof hatches, manual and automatic operation, including smoke vents.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; current edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Certificate: For smoke hatches, provide certificate of approval from authority having jurisdiction.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store products under cover and elevated above grade.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED CURBS
A.
Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies:
1. Greenheck.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies:
Factory-assembled hollow sheet metal construction with fully mitered and welded corners,
integral counterflashing, internal reinforcing, and top side and edges formed to shed water.
1. Manufacture curb bottom and mounting flanges for installation directly on roof deck, not on
insulation; match slope and configuration of roof deck.
2. Provide the layouts and configurations shown on the drawings.
2.02 ROOF HATCHES, MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC OPERATION
A.
Manufacturers - Smoke Vent Roof Hatches:
1. Bilco Company; Type SV (single leaf): www.bilco.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Roof Hatches: Factory-assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release
hardware.
1. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting conditions indicated on the
drawings.
2. Smoke Hatches: Where "smoke" or "smoke/heat" operation is indicated, provide the
following additional features and omit manual operation for access:
a. Smoke Release Mechanism: Automatic opening on melting of replaceable UL-listed
fusible link at 165 deg F.
b. UL-listed as automatically operated smoke and heat vent.
c. Fire Alarm Connection: Provide separate resettable electrical link release mechanism
and connection point for fire alarm system.
3. Size(s): As indicated on drawings; single-leaf style unless indicated as double-leaf.
4. For Smoke Venting Without Access: 24 by 24 inches.
C.
Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings;
extended bottom flange to suit mounting.
1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick.
2. Finish: Factory prime paint.
3. Insulation: 1 inch rigid glass fiber, located on outside face of curb.
D.
Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 7200 - 1
ROOF ACCESSORIES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Capable of supporting 40 psf live load.
Material: Galvanized steel; outer cover 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick, liner 22 gage, 0.03 inch
thick.
Finish: Factory prime paint.
Insulation: 1 inch rigid glass fiber.
Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter.
Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by
manufacturer.
1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that
automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load.
2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.
3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.
4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release.
5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior.
6. Smoke Hatches: Manual release operation not to disturb automatic release mechanisms;
easy resetting by Owner's maintenance personnel; provide latch designed to prevent
relatching unless the automatic release mechanism has been properly reset for automatic
operation.
7. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather
integrity.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean installed work to like-new condition.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 7200 - 2
ROOF ACCESSORIES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 07 8100
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fireproofing of exterior exposed structural steel.
B.
Preparation of fireproofing for application of finish specified elsewhere.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
B.
ASTM E736 - Standard Test Method For Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive
Materials Applied to Structural Members; 2000 (Reapproved 2011).
C.
ASTM E760 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Impact on Bonding of Sprayed Fire-Resistive
Material Applied to Structural Members; 1992 (Reapproved 2011).
D.
ASTM E859 - Standard Test Method for Air Erosion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material (SFRM)
Applied to Structural Members; 1993 (Reapproved 2011).
E.
ASTM E937 - Standard Test Method for Corrosion of Steel by Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material
(SFRM) Applied to Structural Members; 1993 (Reapproved 2011).
F.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate with placement of ceiling hanger tabs, mechanical component hangers, and
electrical components.
B.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating product characteristics.
C.
Test Reports: Reports from reputable independent testing agencies for proposed products,
indicating compliance with specified criteria, conducted under conditions similar to those on
project, for:
1. Bond Strength.
2. Bond Impact.
3. Compressive Strength.
4. Fire tests using substrate materials similar those on project.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this
section, and:
1. Approved by manufacturer.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A.
Construct mock-up, 100 square feet in size.
B.
Conform to project requirements for fire ratings.
C.
Locate where directed.
D.
Examine installation within one hour of application to determine variances from specified
requirements due to shrinkage, temperature, and humidity.
E.
Where shrinkage and cracking are evident, adjust mixture and method of application as
necessary. Remove materials and re-construct mock-up.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 8100 - 1
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
F.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply spray fireproofing when temperature of substrate material and surrounding air is
below 40 degrees F or when temperature is predicted to be below said temperature for 24 hours
after application.
B.
Provide ventilation in areas to receive fireproofing during application and 24 hours afterward, to
dry applied material.
C.
Provide temporary enclosure to prevent spray from contaminating air.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
1. Include coverage for fireproofing to remain free from cracking, checking, dusting, flaking,
spalling, separation, and blistering.
2. Reinstall or repair failures that occur within warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Sprayed-On Fireproofing:
1. Southwest Fireproofing Products Company; Product 7HD: www.sfrm.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FIREPROOFING ASSEMBLIES
A.
Provide assemblies as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Provide a fire rated assembly rating of 3 hours for floor/ceiling assembly to UL Design No. D916
C.
Provide fire-resistance ratings for the following building elements as required by the building
code:
1. Primary structural frame, including columns, girders, and trusses: 3.
2. Bearing walls, exterior: 3.
3. Bearing walls, interior: 3.
4. Nonbearing walls and partitions, exterior: 0.
5. Nonbearing walls and partitions, interior: 0.
6. Floor construction, including supporting beams and joists: 3.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material for Exterior Applications: Manufacturer's standard factory
mixed material, which when combined with water is capable of providing the indicated fire
resistance, and conforming to the following requirements:
1. Bond Strength: 1000 pounds per square foot, minimum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E736 when set and dry.
2. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling or delamination, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E760.
3. Corrosivity: No evidence of corrosion, when tested in accordance with ASTM E937.
4. Air Erosion Resistance: Weight loss of 0.025 g/sq ft, maximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E859 after 24 hours.
5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread of 0 and maximum smoke
developed of 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
6. Products:
a. Southwest Fireproofing; Type 7D High Density Cementitious Fireproofing:
www.southwestfireproofing.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer Adhesive: Of type recommended by fireproofing manufacturer.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 8100 - 2
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
B.
Water: Clean, potable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive fireproofing.
B.
Verify that clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items required to penetrate fireproofing
are in place.
C.
Verify that ducts, piping, equipment, or other items that would interfere with application of
fireproofing have not been installed.
D.
Verify that voids and cracks in substrate have been filled. Verify that projections have been
removed where fireproofing will be exposed to view as a finish material.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Perform tests as recommended by fireproofing manufacturer in situations where adhesion of
fireproofing to substrate is in question.
B.
Remove incompatible materials that could affect bond by scraping, brushing, scrubbing, or
sandblasting.
C.
Prepare substrates to receive fireproofing in strict accordance with instructions of fireproofing
manufacturer.
D.
Protect surfaces not scheduled for fireproofing and equipment from damage by overspray,
fall-out, and dusting.
E.
Close off and seal duct work in areas where fireproofing is being applied.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Apply primer adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Apply fireproofing in thickness and density necessary to achieve required ratings, with uniform
density and texture.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect the installed fireproofing after application and curing for integrity, prior to its
concealment. Ensure that actual thicknesses, densities, and bond strengths meet requirements
for specified ratings and requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
B.
Re-inspect the installed fireproofing for integrity of fire protection, after installation of subsequent
Work.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess material, overspray, droppings, and debris.
B.
Remove fireproofing from materials and surfaces not required to be fireproofed.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 8100 - 3
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 07 9005
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sealants and joint backing.
B.
Precompressed foam sealers.
C.
Hollow gaskets.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010.
B.
ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012.
C.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
D.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.06 MOCK-UP
A.
Provide mock-up of sealant joints in conjunction with window under provisions of Section 01
4000.
B.
Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components noted.
C.
Locate where directed.
D.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Gunnable and Pourable Sealants:
B.
Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers:
2.02 SEALANTS
A.
Sealants and Primers - General: Provide products having volatile organic compound (VOC)
content as specified in Section 01 6116.
B.
Type 1 - General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25,
Uses M, G, and A; single component.
1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.
b. Joints between concrete and other materials.
c. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.
3. Polyurethane Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol I-XL General Purpose One Part Polyurethane Sealant:
www.pecora.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 9005 - 1
JOINT SEALERS
C.
Type 2 - Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Precompressed foam sealer; urethane with
water-repellent;
1. Color: Black.
2. Size as required to provide weathertight seal when installed.
3. Provide product recommended by manufacturer for traffic-bearing use.
4. Applications: Use for:
a. Exterior wall expansion joints.
5. Products:
a. Inpro; www.inpro; 620 Series (surface, compression gasket) www.inprocorp.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D.
Type 3 - Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning,
noncuring.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.
b. Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps.
E.
Type 4 - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP,
Grade NF single component, paintable.
1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
3. Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 + Silicone Acrylic Latex Caulking Compound:
www.pecora.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
F.
Type 5 - Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses I, M and A; single component,
mildew resistant.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.
b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.
2. Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; 898NST Sanitary Silicone Sealant - Class 50: www.pecora.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
G.
Type 6 - Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Locations:
1. Composition: Acrylic latex emulsion sealant.
2. Applications: Use for concealed locations only:
a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track
and floor.
3. Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919 Acoustical and Insulation Latex Sealant:
www.pecora.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
H.
Type 7 - Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Class 25,
Uses T, I, M and A; single component.
1. Color: Gray.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving.
3. Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; NR-201 Self-Leveling Traffic and Loop Sealant:
www.pecora.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 9005 - 2
JOINT SEALERS
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B.
Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
C.
Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
D.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B.
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
D.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
E.
Exposed Concrete Floor Joints: Test joint filler in inconspicuous area of floor slab. Verify
specified product does not stain or discolor slab.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
surfaces and material installation instructions.
B.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C.
Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
D.
Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck
dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific
dimensions are indicated.
E.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
F.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer
when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
H.
Tool joints concave.
I.
Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and
intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 9005 - 3
JOINT SEALERS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 07 9513
EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Expansion joint assemblies for floor, wall, ceiling and soffit surfaces.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
B.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide joint assembly profiles, profile dimensions, anchorage devices .
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate joint and splice locations, miters, layout of the work, affected adjacent
construction, anchorage locations .
D.
Samples: Submit two samples 4 inch long, illustrating profile, dimension, color, and finish
selected.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate rough-in sizes; provide templates for cast-in or
placed frames or anchors; required tolerances for item placement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies:
1. Inpro: www.inprocorp.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS
A.
Interior Floor Joints Subject to Seismic Movement:
1. Products:
a. Inpro; 316 Series (flush, minimal single sightline): www.inprocorp.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Interior 3-Hr Rated Floor Joint Subject to Seismic Movement:
1. Products:
a. Inpro; 975-FB Series: www.inprocorp.com
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
C.
Interior Fire-Rated Wall/Ceiling Joints Subject to Seismic Movement:
1. Products:
a. Inpro; 223/233/243 Series (for gwb, narrow sightline, pop-out): www.inprocorp.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D.
Exterior Wall Joints Subject to Seismic Movement:
1. Products:
a. Inpro; 620 Series (surface, compression gasket): www.inprocorp.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
A.
Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies - General: Factory-fabricated and assembled; designed to
completely fill joint openings, sealed to prevent passage of air, dust, water, smoke; suitable for
traffic expected.
1. Joint Dimensions and Configurations: As indicated on drawings.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 9513 - 1
EXPANSION JOINT COVER
ASSEMBLIES
2.
3.
4.
Joint Cover Sizes: Selected to suit joint width and configuration, based on manufacturer's
published recommendations and limitations.
Lengths: Provide covers in full lengths required; avoid splicing wherever possible.
Anchors, Fasteners, and Fittings: Provided by cover manufacturer.
B.
Floor Joint Covers: Coordinate with indicated floor coverings.
C.
Covers In Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide cover assembly having fire rating equivalent to that
of assembly into which it is installed.
2.04 MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper; or ASTM
B308/B308M, 6061 allow, T6 temper.
1. Exposed Finish Outdoors: Dark bronze anodized.
2. Exposed Finish at Floors: Mill finish or natural anodized.
3. Exposed Finish at Walls and Ceilings: Natural anodized.
B.
Resilient Seals:
1. For Ceilings: Any resilient material, flush, pleated, or hollow gasket.
2. For Pedestrian Traffic Applications: EPDM rubber, Neoprene, or Santoprene; no PVC;
Shore A hardness of 40 to 50 Durometer.
C.
Anchors and Fasteners: As recommended by cover manufacturer.
D.
Ferrous Metal Anchors: Galvanized where embedded in concrete or in contact with
cementitious materials.
E.
Threaded Fasteners: Stainless steel.
F.
Backing Paint for Aluminum Components in Contact with Cementitious Materials: Asphaltic
type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that joint preparation and dimensions are acceptable and in accordance with
manufacturer's requirements.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Install anchoring devices in conformance to templates.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Align work plumb and level, flush with adjacent surfaces.
C.
Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor joint surfaces.
B.
Provide strippable coating to protect finish surface.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
07 9513 - 2
EXPANSION JOINT COVER
ASSEMBLIES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 08 3100
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Ceiling access door and frame units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS
A.
Ceilings, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Same type as for walls.
1. Material: Steel, hot-dipped zinc or zinc-aluminum-alloy coated.
2. Size in Other Ceilings: 24x24 inches and 28x32 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Standard duty, hinged door.
4. Tool-operated spring or cam lock; no handle.
2.02 WALL AND CEILING UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com.
a. Units in Walls, Unless Otherwise Indicated: ACUDOR ADWT.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with corner joints
welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with
assemblies units are to be installed in.
1. Style: As indicated.
2. Style: Exposed frame with door surface flush with frame surface.
3. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges.
4. Insulation: Non-combustible mineral or glass fiber.
5. Steel Finish: Primed.
6. Primed Finish: Polyester powder coat; manufacturer's standard color.
7. Size(s): As indicated.
8. Hardware:
a. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Continuous piano hinge.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.
C.
Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 3100 - 1
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 08 3200
SLIDING GLASS DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Factory fabricated sliding glazed doors with frames and operating hardware.
B.
Insect screens.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for
windows, doors, and skylights; American Architectural Manufacturers Association/Window and
Door Manufacturers Association/Canadian Standards Association; 2011.
B.
AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of
Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association;
2009.
C.
ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).
D.
ASTM E1423 - Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal Transmittance of
Fenestration Systems; 2014.
E.
NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2014.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, and framed opening
tolerances.
D.
Performance Validation: Submit certified label or test report on products as indicated under
performance requirements to validate product compliance.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication of residential
sliding doors with not fewer than three years of experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to project site and store in manufacturer's protective cartons until openings are
ready for door installation.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
B.
Maintain this minimum temperature during and 24 hours after installation of sealants.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Aluminum Clad Wood Sliding Doors:
1. Marvin; Product: Clad Sliding Patio Door.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 3200 - 1
SLIDING GLASS DOORS
2.02 SLIDING GLASS DOORS
A.
Aluminum Clad Wood Sliding Doors: Extruded aluminum exterior cladding, 0.045 inch minimum
thickness, over wood unit and operable panel frame, factory fabricated, factory glazed; complete
with integral sloped sill/threshold, flashings, and anchorage devices.
1. Configuration: One fixed panel and one horizontal sliding panel.
2. Interior Wood Finish: Field primed and finished.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
3. Wood: As selected from manufacturers standard wood species, clear preservative treated
and type suitable for required finish.
4. Exterior Aluminum Finish: Metal Clad: AAMA-2605 Finish.
5. Frame Depth: 6 inch, minimum.
6. Aluminum Members: Factory finished; screw lock corner construction; thermally broken.
7. Drainage: Provide drainage to exterior for moisture entering joints and glazing spaces and
for condensation occurring within frame construction.
8. Glass Stops: Same material and color as frame, sloped for wash.
B.
Construction: Factory assemble door frame as one unit, including head jambs, and sill; factory
assemble operating and fixed panels.
1. Sizes: Allow for tolerances of rough framed openings, clearances, and shims around
perimeter of assemblies.
2. Joints and Connections: Flush, hairline width, and waterproof; accurately and rigidly joined
corners.
3. Sills: One piece, sloped to drain, with integral roller track.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A.
Door Product Type: SD - Sliding door, in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
B.
Glazing: Double glazed, clear, Low-E coated, argon gas filled, fully tempered, with glass
thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions.
C.
Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frame with mitered and reinforced corners; screen mesh taut
and secure to frame; adjustable spring-loaded top and bottom rollers; screen removable without
use of tools; high-transparency vinyl-coated fiberglass screen mesh.
1. Screen Frame Color: Match door exterior color.
2.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full
recovery of glazing materials.
B.
Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled leakage on interior face when tested in
accordance with ASTM E331 at differential pressure of 12.11 psf.
C.
Thermal Transmittance: U-factor of 0.30maximum, Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) of 0.320
maximum, Visual Transmittance (VT) OF 0.540 that includes window glazing, door and frame
system based on average window size required for project and determined in accordance with
AAMA 1503, ASTM E1423, or NFRC 100.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Pull Handles: Manufacturer's standard type.
B.
Sliding Panel Bottom Rollers: Stainless steel, adjustable from interior.
C.
Limit Stops: Resilient rubber.
D.
Anchors: Hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 3200 - 2
SLIDING GLASS DOORS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and clearances are as
indicated on shop drawings.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit in conjunction with air and vapor seal.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install sliding glass door units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Attach frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other
irregularities.
C.
Use anchorage devices to securely fasten sliding door assembly to wall construction without
distortion or imposed stresses.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch.
D.
Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 foot straight edge.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces.
B.
Remove labels and visible markings.
C.
Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer;
rinse and wipe surfaces clean.
3.07 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction activities.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 3200 - 3
SLIDING GLASS DOORS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 08 3323
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Overhead coiling doors and shutters, operating hardware, exterior, manual and electric
operation.
B.
Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Power to disconnect.
B.
Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Conduit from electric circuit to operator and from operator to control
station.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.
B.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
C.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
D.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays,
Rated 600 2000 Volts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2008).
E.
UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems;
Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical
equipment, and frame member sizes.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and
installation details.
D.
Samples: Submit two slats, 10x10 inch in size illustrating shape, color and finish texture.
E.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and
alignment procedures.
F.
Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments
required.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to the
authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Overhead Coiling Doors:
1. Cornell Iron Works, Inc; Product Rolling Steel Doors: www.cornelliron.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 COILING DOORS
A.
Exterior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain.
1. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 20 psf, without undue
deflection or damage to components.
2. Single thickness slats.
3. Nominal Slat Size: 2 5/8 inches wide x required length.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 3323 - 1
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Finish: Primed.
Finish: Factory powder coated, custom color.
Guides: Angles; galvanized steel.
Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel.
Electric operation.
Mounting: Surface mounted.
Exterior lock and latch handle.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats.
1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to
prevent lateral movement.
2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed
position.
3. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom of
curtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors.
B.
Steel Slats: Minimum thickness, 22 gage, 2 5/8 inch; ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel
sheet.
1. Galvanizing: Minimum G90/Z275 coating.
C.
Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place with snap-on trim, mounting
brackets of same metal.
D.
Steel Guides: ASTM A36/A36M steel angles, size as required for wind loading, factory powder
coated.
E.
Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape.
F.
Hardware:
1. Latching: Inside mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to
keep in locked or retracted position.
G.
Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing
torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding
position at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate.
2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION
A.
Operator, Controls, Actuators, and Safeties: Comply with UL 325; provide products listed by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Electric Operators:
1. Motor Rating: 1 1/2 hp; continuous duty.
2. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter.
3. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1.
4. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second.
5. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller.
6. Manual override in case of power failure.
C.
Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for each
operator.
1. 24 volt circuit.
D.
Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired
to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 3323 - 2
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
B.
Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing
without distortion or stress.
C.
Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural
members only.
D.
Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
E.
Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 2717.
F.
Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch.
D.
Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Clean installed components.
B.
Remove labels and visible markings.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 3323 - 3
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 08 3326
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Overhead coiling metal grilles and operating hardware, manual and electric operation.
B.
Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
B.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
C.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.
D.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
E.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays,
Rated 600 V; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2008).
F.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
G.
UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical
equipment, and frame member sizes.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and
installation details.
D.
Samples: Submit two grille members, 10 by 10 inch in size illustrating shape, color and finish
texture.
E.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and
alignment procedures.
F.
Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Overhead Coiling Grilles:
1. Cornell Iron Works, Inc; Product SentryGate 4: Model ESG21: www.cornelliron.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 GRILLE AND COMPONENTS
A.
Grille: Aluminum; horizontal bar curtain, coiling on overhead counterbalanced shaft.
1. Finish: Factory painted, custom color.
2. Mounting: Within framed opening.
B.
Curtain: Round horizontal bars connected with vertical links.
1. Horizontal bars: 5/16 inch diameter.
2. Bar spacing: 1 1/2 inch on center.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 3326 - 1
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Tube spacers: 1/2 inch diameter.
Spacer spacing: 3 1/4 inch on center.
Link spacing: 6 inch on center.
Bar Ends: Provide with nylon runners for quiet operation.
Bottom Bar: Back-to-back angles with tubular resilient cushion.
C.
Guides: Galvanized steel angles, of profile to retain grille in place with snap-on trim, mounting
brackets of same metal.
D.
Hood Enclosure: Sheet metal; completely covering operating mechanisms; internally reinforced
to maintain rigidity and shape.
1. Material: Same metal as grille.
E.
Hardware:
1. Latching: Inside mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to
keep in locked or retracted position.
2. Latch Handle: Interior and exterior handle.
F.
Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing
torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding
position at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, galvanized to minimum G90/Z275 coating.
2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION
A.
Electric Operators:
1. Mounting: Side mounted.
2. Motor Enclosure:
a. Interior grilles: NEMA MG 1 Type 1; open drip proof.
3. Motor Rating: 1/3 hp; continuous duty.
4. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter.
5. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1.
6. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second.
7. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller.
8. Manual override in case of power failure.
B.
Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for each
operator.
1. 24 volt circuit.
2. Surface mounted.
C.
Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired
to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install grille unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing
without distortion or stress.
C.
Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural
members only.
D.
Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.
E.
Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 2717.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 3326 - 2
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
F.
Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
B.
Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch.
D.
Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust grille, hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Clean grille and components.
B.
Remove labels and visible markings.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 3326 - 3
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 08 4313
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.
B.
Aluminum doors and frames.
C.
Weatherstripping.
D.
Perimeter sealant.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
B.
Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
B.
AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for
Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009 (part of AAMA 501).
C.
AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
D.
ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil
Engineers; 2011.
E.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
F.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.
G.
ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
H.
ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.
I.
ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure.
B.
Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this
section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,
anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details .
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,
affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding
required.
D.
Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering
calculations, dimensional limitations.
E.
Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each
door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 4313 - 1
ALUMINUM-FRAMED
STOREFRONTS
F.
Samples: Submit two samples 24x24 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface,
glass, infill panels, glazing materials.
G.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified
requirements.
H.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct
supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and
licensed at the State in which the Project is located.
B.
Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum
glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B.
Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this
minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,
including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
C.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.
Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Aluminum-Framed Storefront and Doors:
1. Kawneer North America; Product Trifab 400: www.kawneer.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 STOREFRONT
A.
Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members
with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Unitized, shop assembly.
2. Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch insulating glazing.
3. Glazing Position: Centered (front to back).
4. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 1 3/4 inches wide by 4 inches deep.
5. Finish: Class I natural anodized.
a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
b. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or
dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.
6. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and
secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed
from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads.
7. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration
harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.
8. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture
occurring within system.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 4313 - 2
ALUMINUM-FRAMED
STOREFRONTS
9.
Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components
caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without
causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building
elements.
10. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without
damage to components or deterioration of seals.
11. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent
construction while allowing expected movement.
B.
Performance Requirements:
1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements
without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M,
using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.
a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of NYSBC code.
b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction,
with full recovery of glazing materials.
2. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled water on interior face, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 8.00 lbf/sq ft.
3. Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E283 at 6.27 pounds per square foot pressure differential across assembly.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A.
Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section
insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system.
1. Glazing stops: Flush.
B.
Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
1. For Exterior Framing: Type Type IG-1.
C.
Swing Doors: Glazed aluminum.
1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
2. Top Rail: 5 inches wide.
3. Vertical Stiles: 5 inches wide.
4. Bottom Rail: 7 1/2 inches wide.
5. Glazing Stops: Square.
6. Finish: Same as storefront.
2.04 MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B.
Fasteners: Stainless steel.
C.
Concealed Flashings: 0.018 inch thick galvanized steel.
D.
Perimeter Sealant: Type 1 specified in Section 07 9005.
E.
Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration
requirements.
2.05 FINISHES
A.
Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating or AAMA
612 clear anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick.
B.
Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2.06 HARDWARE
A.
For each door, include weatherstripping, sill sweep strip, and threshold.
B.
Other Door Hardware: Storefront manufacturer's standard type to suit application.
1. Finish on Hand-Contacted Items: Polished stainless steel.
2. For each door, include butt hinges, pivots, push handle, pull handle, exit device, narrow
stile handle latch, and closer.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 4313 - 3
ALUMINUM-FRAMED
STOREFRONTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
B.
Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of
this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and
other irregularities.
C.
Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
D.
Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
E.
Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
F.
Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.
G.
Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads
to sill flashing.
H.
Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
I.
Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of
thermal barrier.
J.
Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.
K.
Install hardware using templates provided.
L.
Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 9005.
M. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,
whichever is less.
B.
Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection
requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing.
B.
Test installed storefront for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B.
Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C.
Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
3.07 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 4313 - 4
ALUMINUM-FRAMED
STOREFRONTS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 08 4500
TRANSLUCENT WALL AND ROOF ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Self supporting aluminum framed vertical glazing system.
B.
Perimeter sealant.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA CW-DG-1 - Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual; American Architectural
Manufacturers Association; 1996.
B.
AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
C.
AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for
Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009 (part of AAMA 501).
D.
AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
E.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2013.
F.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
G.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.
H.
ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
I.
ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.
J.
ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,
anchorage and fasteners, panel configuration, internal drainage details .
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,
anticipated deflection under load, affected related Work, weep drainage network, expansion and
contraction joint location and details, and field welding required.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples, 6x6 inch in size, illustrating prefinished aluminum surface,
specified panel with skins, glazing materials illustrating edge and corner.
E.
Test Reports: Submit substantiating engineering data, test results of previous tests by
independent laboratory which purport to meet performance criteria, and other supportive data.
F.
Installation Data: Special installation requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with AAMA CW-DG-1.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 4500 - 1
TRANSLUCENT WALL AND
ROOF ASSEMBLIES
B.
Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct
supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and
licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than five years of documented experience.
D.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 5 years of experience.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A.
Provide a mock-up, 20'-0" feet long by 9'-8" feet wide, include translucent panels, intermediate
mullion. Assemble to illustrate component assembly including glazing materials, weep drainage
system, attachments, anchors, and perimeter sealant.
B.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Handle work of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B.
Protect prefinished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. Puncture wrappings at ends for
ventilation.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
B.
Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Extech; Product Series 3440: Interconnecting Cellular Polycarbonate Translucent Wall System:
www.extechinc.com
B.
Other Acceptable Extruded Cellular Panel Wall/Roof System Manufacturers:
1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by
snow, hail, and positive and negative wind loads acting on plane of panel without damage or
permanent set.
1. Design Loads: Calculate in accordance with applicable code.
2. Measure performance in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using test load of 1.5 times
the design wind pressure and 10 second duration of maximum load.
B.
Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway
displacement as calculated in accordance with applicable code.
C.
Deflection: Limit mullion deflection to L/175 with full recovery of glazing materials.
D.
System Assembly: Accommodate without damage to system, components or deterioration of
seals; movement within system; movement between system and perimeter framing
components; dynamic loading and release of loads; deflection of structural support framing,
tolerance of supporting components, shortening of building concrete structural columns.
E.
Light Transmission: 47 percent.
F.
Thermal Resistance of Panel System (Excluding Vision Areas): R of 4.
G.
Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.072 cfm/sq. ft. of sloped glazed area,
measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in
accordance with ASTM E283.
H.
Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 at a test pressure
difference of 2.86 lbf/sq ft.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 4500 - 2
TRANSLUCENT WALL AND
ROOF ASSEMBLIES
I.
System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in framing
system, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage
network.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B.
Fasteners: Stainless steel.
2.04 COMPONENTS
A.
Translucent Wall and Roof System: Structurally reinforced translucent panels, with self
supporting framing, shop fabricated, factory prefinished, battens, cap strips, related flashings,
anchorage and attachment devices.
B.
Panels: Extruded cellular polycarbonate, Opalescent color; panels :
1. Width: 19 11/16 inches.
2. Panel Thickness: 1 1/2 inches.
C.
Battens, Cover Strips, Cover Plates, and Integral Flashings: Extruded aluminum, to suit location
and application; sized to rigidly retain panels in place.
D.
Flashings: 0.040 inch thick aluminum, finish to match translucent panel mullion sections where
exposed, secured with concealed fastening method.
2.05 SEALANT MATERIALS
A.
Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07 9005 of Types described below.
2.06 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate system components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B.
Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C.
Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D.
Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.
E.
Reinforce framing members for external imposed loads.
2.07 FINISHES
A.
Finish Coatings: Conform to AAMA 611.
B.
Exterior Exposed Aluminum Surfaces:
1. Exterior anodized to clear color, to 0.0007 inch thickness.
C.
Interior Exposed Aluminum Surfaces:
1. Exterior anodized to clear color, to 0.0007 inch thickness.
D.
Concealed Steel Items:
1. Galvanized in accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M.
E.
Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with
cementitious or dissimilar materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
B.
Verify wall openings and adjoining air barrier and vapor retarder materials are ready to receive
work of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install translucent panel system in accordance with manufacturer instructions. Install cellular
panels with cells vertical.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 4500 - 3
TRANSLUCENT WALL AND
ROOF ASSEMBLIES
B.
Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and
other irregularities.
C.
Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
D.
Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances and align with adjacent work.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft,
whichever is less.
B.
Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.
C.
Sealant Space Between Panel System Members and Adjacent Construction: Maximum of 3/4
inch and minimum of 1/4 inch.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide the services of the manufacturer's field representative to observe installation and make
report.
B.
Test installed curtain wall for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2.
C.
Replace curtain wall components that have failed field testing and retest until performance is
satisfactory.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces.
B.
Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C.
Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to
sealant manufacturer.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished work from damage.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 4500 - 4
TRANSLUCENT WALL AND
ROOF ASSEMBLIES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 08 5200
WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Factory fabricated wood windows.
B.
Glazing.
C.
Operating hardware.
D.
Insect screens.
E.
Perimeter sealant.
F.
Wood trim for exterior finishing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for
windows, doors, and skylights; American Architectural Manufacturers Association/Window and
Door Manufacturers Association/Canadian Standards Association; 2011.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Show component dimensions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions.
D.
Submit two samples 24x24 inches in size illustrating window frame section.
E.
Submit two samples of each type of operating hardware.
F.
Performance Validation: Submit certified label or test report on products as indicated under
performance requirements to validate product compliance.
G.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products furnished meet or exceed specified
requirements.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing residential
wood windows with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect factory finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
B.
Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane
dusting or misting, and replacement of same.
D.
Warranty: Include coverage for:
1. Degradation of color finish.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 5200 - 1
WOOD WINDOWS
2.
Delamination or separation of finish cladding from window member.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis of Design: Marvin; Product: Glider, Casement & Picture Casement.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Andersen Windows Corp; ____: www.andersenwindows.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C.
Aluminum Clad Matching Patio Doors:
1. Marvin; Product: Clad Sliding Patio Door.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 WOOD WINDOWS
A.
Windows: Wood frame and sash, factory fabricated and assembled.
1. Exterior Finish: Metal Clad: AAMA-2605 Finish.
2. Interior Finish: Factory Stain.
3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, including pearlescent
colors.
4. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
5. Wood Species: Fir, preservative treated using treatment type suitable for required finish.
6. Frame and Sash Members: Mortise and tenon joints. Glue and steel pin joints to hairline
fit, weather tight.
7. Weather Stop Flange: Continuous at perimeter of unit.
8. Clearances and Shim Spacing: Minimum required for installation and dynamic movement
of perimeter seal.
9. Internal Drainage of Glazing Spaces to Exterior: Weep holes.
10. Insect Screen: Locate on outside of windows.
11. Operable Units: Double weatherstripped.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A.
Glazing: Double glazed, clear, low-E coated, argon filled, with glass thicknesses as
recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions.
B.
Frames: 5 1/16 inch wide x 5 21/32 inch deep profile; flush solid wood glass stops of screw
fastened type, sloped for wash.
C.
Sills: 9/16 inch nominal thickness, extruded aluminum; sloped for positive wash; fit under sash
to project 1 3/32 inch beyond wall face; one piece full width of opening.
D.
Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frame with mitered and reinforced corners; screen mesh
taut and secure to frame; secured to window with adjustable hardware allowing screen removal
without use of tools.
1. Hardware: Spring loaded steel pins; four per screen unit.
2. Screen Mesh: Vinyl-coated fiberglass, window manufacturer's standard mesh.
3. Frame Finish: Baked enamel, color to match window interior color.
E.
Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Wool pile; permanently resilient, profiled to effect weather
seal.
F.
Fasteners: Stainless steel.
G.
Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07 9005 of types as indicated.
H.
Accessories: Provide all related flashings, and anchorage and attachment devices.
2.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements in accordance with the following:
1. Performance Class (PC): R.
B.
Performance Validation: Windows shall comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440
performance requirements as indicated by having AAMA, WDMA, or CSA certified label, or an
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 5200 - 2
WOOD WINDOWS
independent test report for indicated products itemizing compliance and acceptable by
authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Overall U-value, Including Glazing: 0.30, maximum, Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) of
0.330 maximum, and Visual Transmittance (VT) of 0.540 maximum measured on the window
size required for this project.
2.05 MATERIALS
A.
Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07 9005 of Types described below.
2.06 HARDWARE
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this
section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances
and other irregularities.
C.
Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and
alignment with adjacent work.
D.
Install operating hardware.
E.
Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07 9005.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/8 inches
per 10 ft, whichever is less.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces.
B.
Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer;
rinse and wipe surfaces clean.
C.
Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to
sealant manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 5200 - 3
WOOD WINDOWS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 08 8000
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Glass.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
B.
ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;
2012.
C.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
D.
ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings;
2012a.
E.
ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;
2010.
F.
GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C.
Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples 6x6 inch in size of glass and plastic units, showing coloration
and design.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
B.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLAZING TYPES
A.
Type IG-1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing, low-E.
1. Application(s): All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
a. Other products of the basis of design manufacturer and products of other
manufacturers will be considered provided the overall performance is within the
specified range(s) and the overall appearance is not significantly different from that of
the specified product.
3. Between-lite space filled with argon.
4. Total Thickness: 1 inch.
2.02 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
A.
Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness of glass to withstand dead and live loads
caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of glass.
1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 8000 - 1
GLAZING
2.
3.
Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery
of glazing materials.
Glass thicknesses listed are minimum.
2.03 GLASS MATERIALS
A.
Float Glass Manufacturers:
1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.
1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
select).
2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048.
3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated.
4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for
wind load design regardless of specified thickness.
2.04 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A.
Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.
1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.
2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.
4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
D.
Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual.
E.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after Work is complete.
C.
Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 8000 - 2
GLAZING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 08 9100
LOUVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Louvers, frames, and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
B.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
B.
AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program Product Rating Manual for Air Control Devices; 2013.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Wall Louvers:
1. Ruskin; ELF6375DX and ELF6375DXH Drainable Stationary Louvers.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 LOUVERS
A.
Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories;
AMCA Certified in accordance with AMCA 511.
1. Drainable Blades: Continuous rain stop at front or rear of blade aligned with vertical gutter
recessed into both jambs of frame.
2. Screens: Provide insect screens at intake louvers and bird screens at exhaust louvers.
B.
Stationary Louvers : Horizontal blade, extruded aluminum construction, with intermediate
mullions matching frame.
1. Free Area: 57 percent, minimum.
2. Blades: Drainable.
3. Frame: 6 inches deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and, with continuous
recessed caulking channel each side.
4. Metal Thickness: Frame 0.081 inch; blades 0.081 inch.
5. Finish: Color anodized; finish welded units after fabrication.
6. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), .
1. Color Anodizing: AAMA 611 Class I, AA-M12C22A42/44.
B.
Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of steel, 0.063 inch diameter wire, 1/2 inch open weave,
diagonal design.
C.
Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Screens: Frame of same material as louver, with reinforced corners; removable, screw
attached; installed on inside face of louver frame.
B.
Fasteners and Anchors: Galvanized steel.
C.
Head and Sill Flashings: See Section 07 6200.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 9100 - 1
LOUVERS
D.
Sealant: Type 1 - Exterior, as specified in Section 07 9005.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions
are as indicated on shop drawings.
B.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Coordinate with installation of flashings by others.
C.
Install louvers level and plumb.
D.
Align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to
exterior.
E.
Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners.
F.
Install perimeter sealant and backing rod in accordance with Section 07 9005.
G.
Coordinate with installation of mechanical ductwork.
H.
Coordinate with installation of louver actuators.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operable louvers for freedom of movement of control mechanism. Lubricate operating
joints.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Strip protective finish coverings.
B.
Clean surfaces and components.
3.05 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
08 9100 - 2
LOUVERS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 09 0561
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
This section applies to all floors identified in the contract documents as to receive the following
types of floor coverings:
1. Resilient tile and sheet.
2. Broadloom carpet.
3. Carpet tile.
4. Thin-set ceramic tile and stone tile.
B.
Preparation of new and existing concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings.
C.
Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and pH.
D.
Preparation of new and existing wood-based floors and subfloors for installation of new floor
coverings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Additional requirements relating to testing agencies
and testing.
B.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Limitations on curing requirements for new concrete
floor slabs.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2013.
B.
ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and
Gypsum Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2009).
C.
ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;
2011.
D.
ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete
Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2011.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Moisture and pH testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency employed and
paid by Contractor.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency experienced in the types of testing
specified.
1. Submit evidence of experience consisting of at least 3 test reports of the type required,
with project Owner's project contact information.
2. Acceptable Testing Agencies:
a. Independent Floor Testing & Inspection, Inc. (IFTI): www.floortest.com.
b. Other testing agency approved by Owner.
C.
Contractor's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing:
1. Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency.
2. Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start.
3. Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities.
4. Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions.
5. Notify Architect when specified ambient conditions have been achieved and when testing
will start.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 0561 - 1
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
B.
Deliver materials in manufacturer’s packaging; include installation instructions.
C.
Keep materials from freezing.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at
least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F.
B.
Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least
48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for
conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any
recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the following
characteristics:
1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant compound, compatible with floor,
floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at
edges.
2. Latex or polyvinyl acetate additions are permitted; gypsum content is prohibited.
3. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with
ASTM C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate.
B.
Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for
the moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from
flooring manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable
for substrate and floor covering and for conditions present.
C.
Remedial Floor Coating: Single- or multi-layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended
by its manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring
manufacturer's emission limits, resistant to the level of pH found, and suitable for adhesion of
flooring without further treatment.
1. Thickness: 1/8 inch, maximum.
2. If testing agency recommends any particular products, use one of those.
3. Products:
a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX MC ULTRA, with ARDEX FEATHERFINISH:
www.ardexamericas.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION
A.
Perform following operations in the order indicated:
1. Preliminary cleaning.
2. Moisture vapor emission tests; 3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each
additional 1000 square feet, unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring
manufacturer.
3. Internal relative humidity tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless
otherwise indicated.
4. pH tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Specified remediation, if required.
6. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required.
7. Other preparation specified.
8. Adhesive bond and compatibility test.
9. Protection.
B.
Remediations:
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 0561 - 2
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
1.
2.
3.
Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this
condition before doing any other remediation; re-test after correction.
Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the
level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use that
adhesive for installation of the flooring; if not, apply remedial floor coating over entire
suspect floor area.
Excessive pH: If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture, no
additional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present
is available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation
of the flooring; otherwise, apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire
suspect floor area.
3.02 PRELIMINARY CLEANING
A.
Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive
removers, film-forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive
laitance, mold, mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond.
B.
Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning.
3.03 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING
A.
Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test
method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B.
Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements
of this section.
C.
Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows.
D.
Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method,
as those methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently.
E.
In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as
indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if test values exceed 3
pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours.
F.
Report: Report the information required by the test method.
3.04 PH TESTING
A.
Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test
method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B.
Note: This procedure is the equivalent of that described in ASTM F710, repeated here for the
Contractor's convenience.
C.
Use a wide range pH paper, its associated chart, and distilled or deionized water.
D.
Place several drops of water on a clean surface of concrete, forming a puddle approximately 1
inch in diameter. Allow the puddle to set for approximately 60 seconds, then dip the pH paper
into the water, remove it, and compare immediately to chart to determine pH reading.
E.
In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as
indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if any test value is over
10.
3.05 PREPARATION
A.
See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements.
B.
Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
C.
Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving
joints, and other irregularities with patching compound.
D.
Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints.
3.06 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING
A.
Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 0561 - 3
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
3.07 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING
A.
Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer.
3.08 PROTECTION
A.
Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 0561 - 4
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 09 2116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B.
Acoustic insulation.
C.
Cementitious backing board.
D.
Gypsum wallboard.
E.
Joint treatment and accessories.
F.
Acoustic (sound-dampening) wall and ceiling board.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 05 4000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind-load-bearing metal stud framing.
C.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing.
D.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
E.
Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation.
F.
Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.
G.
Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls.
H.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.
I.
Section 09 2216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing.
J.
Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Tile backing board.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer
Units; 2013.1.
B.
ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications
for Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.
C.
ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board; 2012.
D.
ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
E.
ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011.
F.
ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.
G.
ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)
in Thickness; 2011.
H.
ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs;
2007 (Reapproved 2013).
I.
ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement
Substrate Sheets; 2008b.
J.
ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.
K.
ASTM C1629/C1629M - Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior
Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels; 2006 (Reapproved 2011).
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 2116 - 1
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
L.
ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.
M. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
N.
ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.
O.
GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2013.
P.
GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2012.
Q.
UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and
finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
B.
Interior Partitions Indicated as Sound-Rated: Provide completed assemblies with the following
characteristics:
1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 50-54 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
C.
Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span
deflection of L/240.
2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 40-44 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
D.
Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Fire Rated Partitions: UL listed assembly No. U344; U341; 1 & 2 hour rating.
2. Fire Rated Ceilings and Soffits:; L546 hour rating.
3. Fire Rated Structural Column Framing: UL listed assembly No. D916; 3 hour rating.
4. Fire Rated Structural Beam Framing: UL listed assembly No. D916; 3 hour rating.
5. Fire Rated Shaft Walls: UL listed assembly No. U415; U428; 1 & 2 hour rating.
6. Fire Rated Area Separation Walls: UL listed assembly No. U327; 1 hour rating.
7. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular
assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory.
2.02 BOARD MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to
minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
a. Mold-resistant board is required at all locations.
3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly;
if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.
4. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.
b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.
c. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on UL Labels.
5. Mold-Resistant Paper-Faced Products:
a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 2116 - 2
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
b.
c.
American Gypsum; M-Bloc Type X.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C.
Abuse-Resistant Wallboard:
1. Application: High-traffic areas indicated.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. Type: Fire-resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed.
4. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
5. Edges: Tapered.
6. Products:
a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc AR Type X.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D.
Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products:
1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds and
shower ceilings.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels
with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or
ASTM C1325.
a. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
b. Products:
1) National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Tile Backer:
www.nationalgypsum.com.
2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
E.
Acoustical Sound Dampening Wall and Ceiling Board: Two layers of heavy paper faced, high
density gypsum board separated by a viscoelastic polymer layer and capable of achieving STC
rating of 50 or more in typical stud wall assemblies as calculated in accordance with ASTM
E413 and when tested in accordance with ASTM E90.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
4. Products:
a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand SoundBreak XP Wallboard:
www.nationalgypsum.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
F.
Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide, beveled long edges, ends
square cut.
1. Paper Faced Type: Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTM
C1396/C1396M; water-resistant faces.
2. Products:
a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc Shaft Liner.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: __
inch.
B.
Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9005.
C.
Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project
conditions.
1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise
indicated.
D.
Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood
Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for
exterior locations.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 2116 - 3
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
E.
Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954;
steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION
A.
Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
1. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements.
B.
Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special
friction studs.
1. On walls over sixteen feet high, screw-attach studs to runners top and bottom.
2. Seal perimeter of shaft wall and penetrations with acoustical sealant.
3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.
Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A.
Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
B.
Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end
joints, especially in highly visible locations.
B.
Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of
assembly listing.
C.
Exterior Soffits: Install exterior soffit board perpendicular to framing, with staggered end joints
over framing members or other solid backing.
D.
Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where
indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing
authority. For non-rated assemblies, install as follows:
1. Single-Layer Applications: Screw attachment.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as follows:
1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long.
B.
Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
3.07 JOINT TREATMENT
A.
Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Level 2: In areas behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish.
3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the
completed construction.
B.
Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 2116 - 4
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
3.08 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet
in any direction.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 2116 - 5
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 09 3000
TILING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Tile for floor applications.
B.
Tile for wall applications.
C.
Cementitious backer board as tile substrate.
D.
Stone thresholds.
E.
Ceramic accessories.
F.
Ceramic trim.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.
B.
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of tile backer board.
C.
Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Shower receptor.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of
Ceramic Tile - Version; 2013.1.
B.
ANSI A108.1A - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in
the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.
C.
ANSI A108.1B - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a
Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar;
2013.1.
D.
ANSI A108.1C - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the
Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured
Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.
E.
ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2013.1.
F.
ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.
G.
ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 2013.1.
H.
ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 2013.1.
I.
ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 2013.1.
J.
ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework;
2013.1.
K.
ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of
Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.
L.
ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 2013.1.
M. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Load Bearing,
Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2013.1.
N.
ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement
Grouts for Tile Installation; 2013.1.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 3000 - 1
TILING
O.
ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications
for Cementitious Backer Units; 2013.1.
P.
ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile - Version; 2013.1.
Q.
TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation - Version; 2013.1.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.
Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
C.
Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches in size
illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 and TCNA (HB) on site.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products
specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5
years of documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE
A.
Ceramic Mosaic Tile : ANSI A137.1, and as follows:
1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent.
2. Size and Shape: 1 inch square.
3. Edges: Square.
4. Surface Finish: Unglazed.
5. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
6. Mounted Sheet Size: 12x12 inches.
B.
Glazed Wall Tile : ANSI A137.1, and as follows:
1. Moisture Absorption: 3.0 to 7.0 percent.
2. Size and Shape: 4-1/4 by 6 inch.
3. Edges: Cushioned.
4. Surface Finish: High gloss.
5. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
6. Pattern: running bond.
2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same
manufacturer as tile.
B.
Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in
sizes coordinated with field tile.
1. Manufacturer: Same as for tile.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 3000 - 2
TILING
C.
Thresholds: Marble, white or gray, honed finish; 2 inches wide by full width of wall or frame
opening; 1/2 inch thick; beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top side; without holes,
cracks, or open seams.
2.03 SETTING MATERIALS
2.04 GROUTS
A.
Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.
1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is
indicated.
2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less
than 1/8 inch wide.
3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
4. Products:
a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX FG-C MICROTEC: www.ardexamericas.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Grout Sealer: Liquid-applied, moisture and stain protection for existing or new Portland cement
grout.
1. Composition: Water-based colorless silicone.
2. Products:
a. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Grout Sealer: www.merkrete.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive tile.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,
are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.
C.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
setting materials to sub-floor surfaces.
D.
Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended
by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.
E.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Protect surrounding work from damage.
B.
Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C.
Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable
flatness tolerances.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of
ANSI A108.1A thru A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.
B.
Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C.
Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases
neatly. Align floor joints.
D.
Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout
joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.
E.
Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.
F.
Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 3000 - 3
TILING
G.
Install thresholds where indicated.
H.
Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
I.
Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
J.
Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.
K.
Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.
L.
Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.
3.04 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS
A.
At bathtub walls install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method B412, over cementitious backer
units with waterproofing membrane.
B.
Grout with standard grout as specified above.
C.
Seal joints between tile work and other work with sealant Type 5 specified in Section 07 9005.
3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Clean tile and grout surfaces.
3.07 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 3000 - 4
TILING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 09 5100
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B.
Acoustical units.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm components in ceiling system.
C.
Section 21 1300 - Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.
D.
Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling.
E.
Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of
Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.
B.
ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2013.
C.
ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2014.
D.
ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008e1.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,
sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is
completed, tested, and approved.
B.
Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples 12x12 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical
units.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent
prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acoustic Panels:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Ultima Tegular: www.armstrong.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 5100 - 1
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
B.
Suspension Systems:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Suprafine XL 9/16": www.armstrong.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A.
Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A.
B.
Acoustical Tile Type Ultima 9/16" Beveled Tegular: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type
III, with the following characteristics:
1. Size: 24 x 24 inches.
2. Thickness: 3/4 inches.
3. Light Reflectance: 0.90 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.
4. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 40, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.
5. Edge: Beveled Tegular for interface with Suprafine XL 9/16" Exposed Tee.
6. Surface Color: White.
7. Surface Pattern: Perforated, regularly spaced large holes.
2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)
A.
Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking
components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as
required.
B.
Exposed Steel Suspension System Type Suprafine XL Fire Guard 9/16" Exposed Tee: Formed
galvanized steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty.
1. Profile: Tee; 9/16 inch wide face.
2. Finish: Baked polyester paint. Color: Blizzard White and match the actual color of the
selected tile.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic
requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.
B.
Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.
1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of
grid.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M, and
manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.
B.
Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum
deflection of 1:360.
C.
Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.
D.
Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other
work.
E.
Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
F.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest
affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
G.
Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load
to exceed deflection capability.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 5100 - 2
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
H.
Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or
support components independently.
I.
Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
J.
Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with
other interruptions.
1. Use longest practical lengths.
2. Overlap and rivet corners.
3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A.
Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to
appearance and function.
C.
Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D.
Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
E.
Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F.
Cutting Acoustical Units:
1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B.
Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 5100 - 3
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 09 5423
LINEAR METAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Suspended metal ceiling grid system and perimeter trim.
B.
Linear, formed metal ceiling panels.
C.
Supplementary acoustical insulation over system units.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels: Access panels.
B.
Section 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm components in ceiling.
C.
Section 21 1300 - Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems:
Sprinkler heads.
D.
Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusers.
E.
Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.
B.
ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2010.
C.
ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients
by the Reverberation Room Method; 2009a.
D.
ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2008.
E.
ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
F.
ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2010.
G.
ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint; 2011.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design components to ensure light fixtures will not induce eccentric loads. Where components
may induce rotation of ceiling system components, provide stabilizing reinforcement.
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination: Coordinate work of this section with installation of mechanical and electrical
components and with other construction activities affected by work of this section.
B.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Furnish for component profiles.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate reflected plan.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples 11x11 inch in size illustrating color and finish of exposed to view
components.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer Qualifications for Seismic Design: Under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the State in which the
Project is located.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 5423 - 1
LINEAR METAL CEILINGS
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept factory-finished products on site in manufacturer's unopened factory packaging only;
reject opened packages.
B.
Protect factory-finished products from damage to appearance by storing products in
manufacturer's unopened factory packaging in dry storage area.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Linear Metal Ceilings:
1. Hunter Douglas Contract; Linear Multi-Box Metal Ceiling System:
www.hunterdouglascontract.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 LINEAR METAL CEILING
A.
Linear Metal Ceiling System: Panels, suspension members, trim and accessories as required
to provide a complete system.
B.
Performance Requirements:
1. Design to support imposed loads of indicated items without eccentric loading of supports.
2. Design to resist seismic load by using practices specified in ASTM E580.
3. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC):.7, measured in accordance with ASTM C423 with
insulation installed.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A.
Linear Panels:
1. Material: Aluminum sheet, ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).
2. Profile: Box shape, 1x2; 1x4; 1x6; inch.
3. Edge: Square.
4. Sight-exposed Surface Finish: Anodized finish; of architect's chosen color from
manufacturer's standard range.
B.
Edge Molding, and Splices: Same material, thickness, and finish as linear panels.
C.
Suspension Members: Formed aluminum sections, with integral attachment points; primed
finish; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness
requirement specified.
D.
Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, 9 gage, 0.1144 inch diameter.
E.
Subgirt Members: Prime painted steel sheet, formed to resist imposed loads and to provide
attachment for linear panels and accessories.
2.04 FABRICATION
A.
Shop cut linear panels to accommodate mechanical and electrical items.
B.
Factory-form internal and external corners of same material, thickness, finish, and profile to
match exposed linear panels; back brace internal corners.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 5423 - 2
LINEAR METAL CEILINGS
C.
Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
D.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Suspension Components:
1. Install after above-ceiling work is complete in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
ASTM C636/C636M, and ASTM E580/E580M.
2. Hang carrying members independent of walls, columns, ducts, light fixtures, pipe, and
conduit; where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face panels
with adjacent panels.
3. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest
adjacent hangers to span the required distance.
4. Locate suspension system for linear panel layout on room axis according to reflected plan.
B.
Linear Panels:
1. Install linear panels and other system components in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Stagger end joints minimum 12 inches.
3. Install space closures between linear panels at interior locations.
4. Exercise care when site cutting sight-exposed finished components to ensure surface
finish is not defaced.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B.
Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
C.
Maximum Variation From Dimensioned Position: 1/4 inch.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean polished surfaces.
B.
Replace damaged or abraded components.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 5423 - 3
LINEAR METAL CEILINGS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 09 6500
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Resilient sheet flooring.
B.
Resilient base.
C.
Installation accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete
slabs and floors.
C.
Section 03 5400 - Cast Underlayment.
D.
Section 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Independent agency
testing of concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings, cleaning, and preparation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan.
D.
Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial
selection.
E.
Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 12x12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for
each resilient flooring product specified.
F.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
G.
Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.
B.
Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a
temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions
above 55 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET FLOORING
2.02 RESILIENT BASE
A.
Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove,
and as follows:
1. Height: 4 inch.
2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.
3. Finish: Satin.
4. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 6500 - 1
RESILIENT FLOORING
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.
B.
Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
C.
Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that
might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,
and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,
are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
C.
Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient
flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.
1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare floor substrates for installation of flooring in accordance with Section 09 0561.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D.
Fit joints tightly.
E.
Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
F.
Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate
flooring under centerline of door.
G.
Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where
indicated.
H.
Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce
tight joints.
3.04 SHEET FLOORING
A.
Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum
number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns
carefully at seams.
B.
Seams are prohibited in bathrooms, kitchens, toilet rooms, and custodial closets.
C.
Double cut sheet at seams.
D.
Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer .
3.05 RESILIENT BASE
A.
Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.
B.
Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B.
Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 6500 - 2
RESILIENT FLOORING
3.07 PROTECTION
A.
Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 6500 - 3
RESILIENT FLOORING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 09 6800
CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Carpet, stretched-in, with cushion underlay.
B.
Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Reclamation/Recycling of
new carpet scrap, new cushion scrap, removed carpet, and removed carpet cushion.
C.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete
slabs and floors to receive adhesive-applied carpet.
D.
Section 03 5400 - Cast Underlayment.
E.
Section 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Independent agency
testing of concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings, cleaning, and preparation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile and
pattern, location of edge moldings and edge bindings, layout of flat wire system.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples 12x12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet
and cushion material specified.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
F.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
and suggested schedule for cleaning.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with
minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cushion:
1. FXI | Foam Innovation; Product ____: www.fxi.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 CARPET
A.
Carpet Type _____:
2.03 CUSHION
A.
Cushion: Cellular rubber:
1. VOC Content: Comply with Section 01 6116.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 6800 - 1
CARPETING
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B.
Tackless Strip: Carpet gripper, of type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit
application, with attachment devices.
C.
Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive carpet.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,
are dust-free, and are ready to receive carpet.
C.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
adhesives to sub floor surfaces.
D.
Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring
installation by testing for moisture and pH.
1. Test in accordance with Section 09 0561.
2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare floor substrates for installation of flooring in accordance with Section 09 0561.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet
Installation Standard.
C.
Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
D.
Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings:
1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main
traffic.
2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.
3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent
pieces.
4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.
E.
Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.
3.04 STRETCHED-IN CARPET
A.
Install tackless strips with pins facing the wall around entire perimeter, except across door
openings. Use edge strip where carpet terminates at other floor coverings.
B.
Space tackless strips slightly less than carpet thickness away from vertical surfaces, but not
more than 3/8 inch.
C.
Install cushion in maximum size pieces using spot adhesive to adhere to sub-floor.
D.
Lay out cushion so that seams will be perpendicular to, or offset from, minimum 6 inches from
carpet seams.
E.
Butt cushion edges together and tape seams.
F.
Trim cushion tight to edge of tackless strip and around projections and contours.
G.
Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.
Apply seam adhesive to all cut edges immediately.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 6800 - 2
CARPETING
H.
Join seams by hand sewing. Form seams straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.
I.
Following seaming, hook carpet onto tackless strip at one edge, power stretch, and hook firmly
at other edges. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for method and amount of stretch.
J.
Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions. Tuck edges into space between tackless
strip and wall.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.
B.
Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 6800 - 3
CARPETING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 09 6813
TILE CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Carpet tile, fully adhered.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Reclamation/Recycling of
new carpet tile scrap.
C.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete
slabs and floors.
D.
Section 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Independent agency
testing of concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings, cleaning, and preparation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
D.
Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color
selected.
E.
Submit one, 12 inch long samples of edge strip.
F.
Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
and suggested schedule for cleaning.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with
minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Interface Inc; Product Imago: www.interfaceinc.com.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Carpet Tile Type 1: Tufted Cut & Loop, manufactured in one color dye lot.
1. Product: Imago manufactured by Interface Inc.
2. Tile Size: 19.69"x19.69" inch, nominal.
3. Color: Labyrinth 100942.
4. Pattern: Linear.
5. VOC Content: Comply with Section 01 6116.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 6813 - 1
TILE CARPETING
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive carpet tile.
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,
are dust-free, and are ready to receive carpet tile.
C.
Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.
D.
Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring
installation by testing for moisture and pH.
1. Test in accordance with Section 09 0561.
2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
E.
Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare floor substrates for installation of flooring in accordance with Section 09 0561.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B.
Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation
Standard.
C.
Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.
D.
Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
E.
Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building
lines.
F.
Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.
G.
Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.
H.
Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.
B.
Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 6813 - 2
TILE CARPETING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 09 7200
WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall covering and borders.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Preparation and priming of substrate surfaces.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
B.
ASTM D1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and
Pigmented Organic Finishes; 2002 (Reapproved 2007).
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Inspect roll materials at arrival on site, to verify acceptability.
B.
Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures.
C.
Do not store roll goods on end.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer.
B.
Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wall
covering.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BASE BID MANUFACTURER
A.
______; Product ____.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. MDC Wallcoverings; Product ____: www.mdcwall.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Requirements for All Wall Coverings:
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50,
maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: No visible staining or discoloration and no damage to
surface texture when tested in accordance with ASTM D1308.
B.
Wall Covering - Type ___: Vinyl coated fabric roll stock, conforming to the following:
C.
Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform to
requirements of the wall covering manufacturer.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 7200 - 1
WALL COVERINGS
B.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply wall
coverings if moisture content of substrate exceeds level recommended by wall covering
manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Wash impervious surfaces with tetra-sodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry.
B.
Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and
ensure full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tightly.
C.
Horizontal seams are not acceptable.
D.
Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners.
E.
Install wall covering before installation of bases and items attached to or spaced slightly from
wall surface.
F.
Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern sequence from roll.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants.
B.
Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 7200 - 2
WALL COVERINGS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 09 9000
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surface preparation.
B.
Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.
C.
Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and
unless otherwise indicated, including the following:
1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before
installing equipment.
2. Elevator pit ladders.
3. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles.
4. Prime surfaces to receive wall coverings.
5. Mechanical and Electrical:
a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and
exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and
electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.
c. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that
are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible
surfaces.
d. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, to match face panels.
D.
Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Non-metallic roofing and flashing.
6. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items.
7. Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones.
8. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
9. Ceramic and other tiles.
10. Architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco.
11. Glass.
12. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated.
13. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A.
Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B.
ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;
2012.
C.
ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Base Materials; 2007.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 9000 - 1
PAINTING AND COATING
B.
Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for
each:
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category
(e.g. "alkyd enamel").
2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).
3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of
each system.
4. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
5. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of all
substitutions proposed.
C.
Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating
range of colors available for each finishing product specified.
1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.
D.
Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 8.5x11 inch in size illustrating range of colors and
textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A.
See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.
B.
Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint coating color, texture, and finish.
C.
Mock-up may remain as part of the work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B.
Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C.
Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B.
Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same
manufacturer; no exceptions.
B.
Paints:
1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.
C.
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A.
Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,
and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 9000 - 2
PAINTING AND COATING
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half
shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.
Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure
is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B.
Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use
primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C.
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the
following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added
at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.
E.
Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected
later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line.
F.
Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors.
1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract.
2. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the
wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR
A.
Paint I-OP - All Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including
gypsum board, concrete masonry, wood, uncoated steel, and shop primed steel.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Flat: MPI gloss level 1; use this sheen for ceilings and other overhead surfaces.
3. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen for items subject to frequent touching by
occupants, including door frames and railings.
4. Top Coat Product(s):
a. Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex.
5. Primer(s): As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of
top coats:
a. Gypsum Board: MPI #50, Interior Latex Primer Sealer.
b. Concrete Masonry: MPI #4, Latex Block Filler; heavy coat squeegeed into pores.
c. Wood: MPI #39, Latex Primer for Interior Wood.
d. Wood: MPI #45, Interior Alkyd Primer Sealer.
e. Steel, Uncoated: MPI #79, Anti-Corrosive Alkyd Primer for Metal.
f.
Steel, Uncoated: MPI #107, Rust-Inhibitive Water Based Primer.
g. Steel -- Shop Primer: MPI #76, Quick Dry Alkyd Primer for Metal.
h. Galvanized Steel: Cementious primer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
C.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 9000 - 3
PAINTING AND COATING
D.
Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
E.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes
unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
5. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D.
Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E.
Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F.
Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or
alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium
phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding
metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
G.
Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime
defects after repair.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
B.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
D.
Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
E.
Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
to applying next coat.
F.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 9000 - 4
PAINTING AND COATING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 09 9723
CONCRETE AND MASONRY COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
High build, moisture resistant textured concrete and masonry coatings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
B.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus; 2011.
B.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2013a.
C.
ASTM G153 - Standard Practice for Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for
Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating coating materials and application instructions for each
material proposed for use.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples 12x12 inch in size illustrating colors available for selection.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain one copy of each referenced document that applies to application on site.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A.
Provide mock-up of Ground face C.M.U, 10 feet long by 10 feet wide, illustrating coating, for
each specified coating.
B.
Locate where directed.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install materials when temperature is below 55 degrees F or above 90 degrees F.
B.
Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of
coating.
C.
Restrict traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Concrete and Masonry Coatings:
1. Textured Coatings of America, Inc.: www.texcote.com.
2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 CONCRETE AND MASONRY COATINGS
A.
Provide high-build, weather resistant coating systems that meet the following minimum
performance criteria, unless more stringent criteria are specified:
1. Salt Spray Resistance: Passes when tested according to ASTM B117 for 2000 hours.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 0/0, maximum,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Accelerated Outdoor Exposure: Passes when tested according to ASTM G153 for 5,000
hours.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 9723 - 1
CONCRETE AND MASONRY
COATINGS
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Coatings - General: Provide complete systems formulated and recommended by manufacturer
for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated.
1. Maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) content: As required by applicable
regulations.
B.
High Build, One Coat, Water Based Textured Coating for 'Green' Concrete: Water based,
epoxy-acrylic resin with graded perlite aggregate.
1. Stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation on visibly damp surfaces and concrete
that has hardened but is not fully cured ("green" concrete) without requiring a primer.
2. Dry Film Thickness: 15 mils, minimum.
3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
4. Texture: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
5. Products:
a. Textured Coatings of America, Inc; Tex-Cote XL-70 W Textured Coating:
www.texcote.com.
b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the coating
manufacturer. Obtain and follow manufacturer's instructions for examination and testing of
substrates.
C.
Cementitious Substrates: Do not begin application until substrate has cured 28 days minimum
and measured moisture content is not greater than 16 percent.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces of loose foreign matter.
B.
Remove substances that would bleed through finished coatings.
C.
Remove finish hardware, fixture covers, and accessories and store.
D.
Protect adjacent surfaces and materials not receiving coating from spatter and overspray; mask
if necessary to provide adequate protection. Repair damage.
3.03 PRIMING
A.
Apply primer to all surfaces, unless specifically not required by coating manufacturer. Apply in
accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Concrete and Masonry: Prior to priming, patch holes and indentations and fill cracks with
manufacturer's recommended crack repair material.
3.04 COATING APPLICATION
A.
Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to thicknesses specified.
B.
Apply in uniform thickness coats, without runs, drips, pinholes, brush marks, or variations in
color, texture, or finish. Finish edges, crevices, corners, and other changes in dimension with
full coating thickness.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
B.
Clean surfaces immediately of overspray, splatter, and excess material.
C.
After coating has cured, clean and replace finish hardware, fixtures, and fittings previously
removed.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
09 9723 - 2
CONCRETE AND MASONRY
COATINGS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 10 1400
SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Room and door signs.
B.
Interior directional and informational signs.
C.
Luminous egress path marking and other "glow-in-the-dark" signs.
D.
Emergency evacuation maps.
E.
Building identification signs.
F.
Traffic signs.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs: Photoluminescent stair nosings and strips.
B.
Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
C.
Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
D.
Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Exit signs required by code.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).
B.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.
C.
UL 1994 - Luminous Egress Path Marking Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign
styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.
C.
Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication,
including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and
colors.
1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the
drawing room number on schedule.
2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from
Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request,
submit preliminary schedule.
3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project,
illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment.
E.
Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or
chips.
F.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.
B.
Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
10 1400 - 1
SIGNAGE
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Flat Signs:
1. Best Sign Systems, Inc; Product ____: www.bestsigns.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Dimensional Letter Signs:
C.
Other Signs:
2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS
A.
Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADA Standards for Accessible
Design and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the
event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific
requirements.
B.
Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not
including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas.
1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified.
2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille.
3. Character Height: 1 inch.
4. Sign Height: 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Office Doors: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers shown
on the drawings; in addition, provide "window" section for replaceable occupant name.
6. Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not those
shown on the drawings.
C.
Interior Directional and Informational Signs:
1. Sign Type: Same as room and door signs.
2. Where suspended, ceiling mounted, or projecting from wall signs are indicated, provide
two-sided signs with same information on both sides.
D.
Luminous Egress Path Marking and Other "Glow-in-the-Dark" Signs: Photoluminescent media.
1. Provide luminous egress path marking as required by local authority having jurisdiction.
E.
Emergency Evacuation Maps:
1. Allow for one map per elevator lobby.
2. Use clear plastic panel silk-screened on reverse, in brushed aluminum frame,
screw-mounted.
F.
Building Identification Signs:
1. Use individual metal letters.
2.03 SIGN TYPES
A.
Flat Signs: Signage media without frame.
1. Edges: Square.
2. Corners: Square.
3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Concealed screws.
4. Wall and Ceiling Mounting of Two-Sided Signs: Aluminum wall bracket, powder coated,
color selected from manufacturer's standard colors, attached with screws in predrilled
mounting holes, set in clear silicone sealant.
5. Suspended Mounting: Stainless steel suspension cables, cable clamps, and ceiling
fastener suitable for attachment to ceiling construction indicated.
B.
Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:
1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font.
2. Character Case: Upper case only.
3. Background Color: Clear.
4. Character Color: Contrasting color.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
10 1400 - 2
SIGNAGE
2.04 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA
A.
Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as
background color:
1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch.
B.
Injection Molded Panels: One-piece acrylic plastic, with raised letters and braille.
1. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch.
2.05 NON-TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA
A.
Photoluminescent Media: Sheet aluminum with photoluminescent pigmented material bonded
to surface, not requiring electrical power to glow in the dark for several hours.
1. Tested and listed for compliance with UL 1994.
2. Color: From manfactures full range of color options.
3. Mounting: Adhesive applied.
4. Products:
a. Ecoglo, Inc; Guidance Strips: www.us.ecoglo.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Silk Screened Plastic Panels: Letters and graphics silk screened onto reverse side of plastic
surface:
1. Sign Color: Clear.
2. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch.
2.06 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS
A.
Metal Letters:
1. Metal: Aluminum casting.
2. Finish: Brushed, satin.
3. Mounting: Concealed screws.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A.
Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corroding
metal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.
C.
Locate signs where indicated:
1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60
inches above finished floor.
2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions.
D.
Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
10 1400 - 3
SIGNAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 10 4400
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fire extinguishers.
B.
Fire extinguisher cabinets.
C.
Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
B.
Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish.
C.
Section 21 1200 - Fire-Suppression Standpipes: Cabinet enclosure for extinguishers and
blankets.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.
B.
UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions.
C.
Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination
requirements.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F.
Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher
ingredients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers:
1. Ansul, a Tyco Business; Cleanguard: www.ansul.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:
1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable
codes, whichever is more stringent.
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
2.04 ACCESSORIES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
10 4400 - 1
FIRE PROTECTION
SPECIALTIES
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, ____ inches from finished floor to inside
bottom of cabinet.
C.
Secure rigidly in place.
D.
Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
10 4400 - 2
FIRE PROTECTION
SPECIALTIES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 10 5500
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Central mail delivery boxes.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
39 CFR 111 - U.S. Postal Service Standard 4C; effective date September 3, 2006.
B.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's specifications and descriptive literature, installation
instructions, maintenance information, and current USPS approval documentation.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate plans for each unit or groups of units, front elevations with
compartment layout and model number, overall dimensions, rough-in opening sizes,
construction and anchorage details.
D.
Samples: Submit two sets of manufacturer's available colors.
1.04 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CENTRAL MAIL DELIVERY BOXES
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Salsbury Industries; 3700 Series 4C: www.mailboxes.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Central Mail Delivery Boxes: Provide products approved for United States Postal Service
delivery.
1. Materials: Aluminum with stainless steel hardware.
2. Finish: Powder coat in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
3. Unit Types and Sizes: As indicated on drawings.
4. Configurations: See drawings for overall dimensions and layouts.
C.
Wall-Mounted Mailboxes: Fully-recessed, complying with USPS-STD-4C.
1. Unit A: Front-loading with master door, single-column design, 20 customer compartments,
1 outgoing mail compartment, and 1 parcel compartment.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A.
Locking - Front Loading Master Door: Three-point latching mechanism with USPS master lock
furnished and installed by postmaster.
B.
Locking - Customer Compartment Doors: USPS approved cam lock, 3 keys each lock.
C.
Locking - Parcel Compartment Doors: Double-lock arrangement with USPS approved cam lock
for customer access, and USPS master lock furnished and installed by postmaster.
D.
Identification - Customer and Parcel Compartments: Sequential numerical or alphabetic
characters, top to bottom, left to right; factory-installed.
1. Engraved characters, 3/4 inch high, with black fill.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that rough-openings are ready to receive wall-mounted units.
B.
Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
10 5500 - 1
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install postal specialties in accordance with approved shop drawings, manufacturer's
instructions, and U.S. Postal Service requirements.
B.
Adjust and lubricate door hardware to operate properly.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
10 5500 - 2
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 11 1200
PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Parking gate access and exit devices, controllers, and barriers.
B.
Maintenance.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of anchors and components to be
embedded in concrete.
B.
Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.
B.
UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for emergency vehicle access.
B.
Conform to applicable code for paint finish and marking on gate arm.
C.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Parking Control Equipment:
1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A.
Parking Control: Automatic operation at entrance and automatic operation at exit.
1. Design: Protect against interference or damage by lightning or other electrical influence;
include fuse, over-voltage protection, flash-over protection, and line filter.
2. Entry: Automatic gate electrically operated upon insertion of coded card. Activate
automatic arm reversing switch if an obstacle is sensed in the down motion.
3. Exit: Automatic gate electrically operated upon detection of vehicle by sensing loop buried
in pavement. Activate automatic arm reversing switch if an obstacle is sensed in the down
motion.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating.
2.04 GATE ARM AND SUPPORT
A.
Gate Arm: Aluminum, one piece, internal counterbalance, 12' ft extension, with safety rubber
bottom edge,with automatic arm reversing switch. Provide break line in arm.
2.05 AUTOMATIC GATE
2.06 CARD CONTROL
A.
Control Unit: To activate gate arm by insertion of coded card.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
11 1200 - 1
PARKING CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
2.07 VEHICLE DETECTION
A.
Vehicle Detection: For use in temperature range of minus 40 to 160 degrees F; to consist of
detector unit in conjunction with sensing loop to activate ticket dispenser when vehicle enters or
exits.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that anchor bolts are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
B.
Verify that electric connections are correctly located and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install parking control system and components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install internal electrical wiring, conduit, junction boxes, transformers, circuit breakers, and
auxiliary components required.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust system components for smooth operation.
3.04 MAINTENANCE
A.
See Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements - Execution Requirements, for
additional requirements relating to maintenance service.
B.
Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
11 1200 - 2
PARKING CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 11 3100
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Kitchen appliances.
B.
Laundry appliances.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping: Plumbing connections for appliances.
B.
Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical connections for appliances.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B.
Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards.
C.
Gas Appliances: Bearing design certification seal of AGA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES
A.
Refrigerator : Free-standing, side-by-side, frost-free.
1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 18 cubic ft; minimum 15 percent freezer capacity.
2. Energy Usage: Minimum 20 percent more energy efficient than energy efficiency
standards set by DOE.
3. Features: Include glass shelves, automatic icemaker, light in freezer compartment, and
in-door water and ice dispenser.
4. Finish: Stainless steel, color as indicated.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Range : Natural gas, free-standing, with standard burners and removable drip pans.
1. Size: 30 inches.
2. Oven: Self-cleaning with electronic ignition.
3. Elements: 4.
4. Controls: Push-to-turn knobs with electronic clock and timer.
5. Features: Include automatic meat thermometer, storage drawer, oven door window,
broiler pan and grid, and oven light.
6. Finish: Stainless steel, color as indicated.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C.
Cooking Exhaust : Range hood.
1. Size: 30 inches.
2. Fan: Single- speed, 500 cfm
3. Exhaust: Rectangular, vented to exterior.
4. Features: Include cooktop light and removable grease filter.
5. Finish: Stainless steel, color as indicated.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D.
Dishwasher : Undercounter.
1. Controls: Solid state electronic.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
11 3100 - 1
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Wash Levels: 3.
Cycles: 4, including normal.
Features: Include rinse aid dispenser, optional no-heat dry, optional water temperature
boost, adjustable upper rack, and adjustable lower rack.
Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color as indicated.
Manufacturers:
a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 LAUNDRY APPLIANCES
A.
All Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated.
B.
Clothes Washer : Front-loading.
1. Size: Full-size.
2. Controls: Solid state electronic.
3. Cycles: Include normal.
4. Motor Speed: Single-speed.
5. Features: Include optional second rinse, bleach dispenser, fabric softener dispenser,
self-cleaning lint filter, sound insulation, and end of cycle signal.
6. Finish: Painted steel, color as indicated.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C.
Clothes Dryer : Electric, stationary.
1. Size: Full-size.
2. Controls: Solid state electronic, with electronic moisture-sensing dry control.
3. Temperature Selections: One.
4. Cycles: Include normal, permanent press, knit/delicate, and air only.
5. Features: Include interior light, reversible door, stationary rack, sound insulation, and end
of cycle signal.
6. Finish: Painted steel, color as indicated.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify utility rough-ins are present and correctly located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Anchor built-in equipment in place.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Remove packing materials from equipment.
B.
Wash and clean equipment.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
11 3100 - 2
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 11 8227
WASTE COMPACTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Packaged waste compactor for separate container.
B.
Chute intake door interlock controls.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 14 9100 - Facility Chutes: Chute intake door locking mechanism and interlocking
requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI Z245.2 - American National Standard for Stationary Compactors -- Safety Requirements
for Installation, Maintenance, and Operation; 2008.
B.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
C.
WASTEC (SCRG) - WASTEC Listing of Rated Stationary Compactors; Waste Equipment
Technology Association; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide unit capacities, physical dimensions, utility requirements and locations,
point loads.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A.
Discharge Containers: As specified.
2.02 APPLICATIONS
A.
Compactor in Trash Chute Room: Apartment type, chute and left side intakes.
1. Service Conditions: Interior.
2. Container Size: 2.0 cubic yard capacity.
3. Discharge containers to be furnished by Owner.
2.03 COMPACTORS - GENERAL
A.
Compactors: Rated by WASTEC in accordance with ANSI Z245.2.
1. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
unit.
2. Electrically Operated Equipment and Components: Individually UL listed.
3. Finish: Factory primed and painted.
B.
Motors: NEMA MG 1.
C.
Control Panels and Remote Equipment Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 4 enclosures; factory
finished; wall-mounted unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Discharge Containers: Heavy duty steel; factory-finished for outdoor use; manufacturer's
standard type unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Anchors and Fasteners: Galvanized steel; where embedded in concrete, provide to concrete
installer for installation.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
11 8227 - 1
WASTE COMPACTORS
2.04 APARTMENT COMPACTORS
A.
Apartment Compactors: Small footprint; heavy duty steel body consisting of a charge box over
a compactor unit that compresses horizontally into separate container; hydraulically driven
compaction ram.
1. Configuration: As indicated on the drawings.
2. Power Unit: Hydraulic pump and oil reservoir; located inside compactor room; provide
hydraulic piping and electrical connections.
3. Controls and Safeties:
a. "On/Off" key switch.
b. Automatic photoelectric sensor start and stop.
c. Emergency stop button.
d. "Container-Full" indicator light.
e. Magnetic door and container interlock.
f.
Chute interlock controls, for conditions specified in chutes section.
g. Container removal safety signal.
h. Built-in container stops.
B.
Chute Extension: Provide extension of chute to fit compactor, as indicated on the drawings.
C.
Discharge Container: Roll-off type.
1. Containers to be furnished by Owner.
D.
Basis of Design: Wastequip, Inc; Model C-33X-APT: www.wastequip.com.
1. Characteristics: WASTEC Rating 0.23 cubic yards; 18 second cycle; 5 HP electric motor;
208/230/460 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz; 5.0 gallons per minute fixed gear pump; 25 gallon oil tank
reservoir; 28.8 pounds per square inch ram force; 22 inch length x 29.75 inch width clear
top opening.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that anchors are correctly positioned.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install unit and inlet hopper in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and with standards
required by authority having jurisdiction.
B.
Coordinate with waste chute discharge.
C.
Anchor unit securely in place.
D.
Adjust unit mechanism to achieve specified requirements.
3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.
Demonstrate and instruct Owner on unit operation. Describe unit limitations.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
11 8227 - 2
WASTE COMPACTORS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 12 3530
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Kitchen cabinets.
B.
Vanity cabinets.
C.
Casework hardware.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 12 3600 - Countertops.
1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A.
See Section 01 2100 - Allowances, for cash allowances affecting this section.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI/KCMA A161.1 - Performance and Construction Standard for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets;
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; 2000 (R2006).
B.
KCMA (DIR) - Directory of Certified Cabinet Manufacturers; Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers
Association; current edition, online.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions and construction details.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate casework locations, large scale plans, elevations, clearances
required, rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances.
D.
Samples: Submit 1 cabinet door sample, 12x12 inch in size, illustrating each color of finish.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Products: Complying with KCMA A161.1 and KCMA Certified.
B.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this
section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A.
Provide full size mock-up of casework base unit.
B.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Residential Casework:
1. Kraftmaid Cabinetry, Inc; Product ____: www.kraftmaid.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A.
Cabinet Construction: Softwood lumber framing and particle board, tempered hardboard
gables.
B.
Countertops: As specified in Section 12 3600.
C.
Door and Drawer Fronts: Wood veneer over particle board.
D.
Bolts, Nuts, Washers and Screws: Of size and type to suit application.
E.
Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
2.03 HARDWARE
A.
Hardware: Manufacturer's standard.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
12 3530 - 1
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
2.04 FABRICATION
A.
Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage
through building openings.
B.
Fabricate corners and joints without gaps or inaccessible spaces or areas where dirt or moisture
could accumulate.
C.
Fabricate each unit to be rigid and not dependent on building structure for rigidity.
2.05 FINISHES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify adequacy of support framing.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install casework, components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Set casework items plumb and square, securely anchored to building structure.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function
smoothly.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean casework, countertops, shelves, and hardware.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
12 3530 - 2
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 12 3600
COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Countertops for architectural cabinetwork.
B.
Countertops for manufactured casework.
C.
Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.
D.
Sinks molded into countertops.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework.
B.
Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Tile for countertops.
C.
Section 12 3530 - Residential Casework.
1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A.
See Section 01 2100 - Allowances, for cash allowances affecting this section.
B.
See Section 01 2300 - Alternates, for product alternates affecting this section.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Specimen warranty.
C.
Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of
cabinets and casework specified in other sections.
D.
Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's
full range of available colors and patterns.
E.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square,
representing actual product, color, and patterns.
F.
Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.
G.
Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.
H.
Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and
repair of countertop surfaces.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
12 3600 - 1
COUNTERTOPS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES
A.
Quality Standard: See Section 06 4100.
B.
Natural Stone Countertops: Stone slabs bonded to substrate; use as large pieces as possible
with inconspicuous adhesive joints.
1. Stone: Granite without cracks, voids, or pin holes; filling with matching epoxy resin is
acceptable.
2. Color: ______.
3. Quarry Name: ________; no substitutions.
4. Stone Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum.
5. Surface Finish: Honed, non-glare.
6. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square profile stone, 1 inch thick, with 3/16 inch radius corner.
7. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same thickness; for field attachment.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Wood-Based Components:
1. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 6000.
3. Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is
permitted, unless otherwise noted, provided it is clean and free of contamination; identify
source; provide lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American
Lumber Standard Committee, Inc.
B.
Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of
materials being joined.
2.03 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.
1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.
2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against
cabinet or wall.
3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or
unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.
B.
Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof
glue.
2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings,
finished to match.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
C.
Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets
are installed in proper locations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
12 3600 - 2
COUNTERTOPS
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;
shim where required.
B.
Install tile as specified in Section 09 3000.
C.
Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum.
B.
Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum.
C.
Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
12 3600 - 3
COUNTERTOPS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 12 4813
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Extruded aluminum entrance floor grilles.
B.
Recessed mat frames.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating properties of walk-off surface, component dimensions
and recessed frame characteristics.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and details for recessed frame.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples, 12x12 inch in size illustrating pattern, color, finish, edging .
E.
Maintenance Data: Include cleaning instructions, stain removal procedures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Entrance Floor Grilles:
1. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc; G-100DKRS: Rugged Scrub Tread Grate:
www.ardenarch.com.
B.
Floor Mats:
1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES AND GRATINGS
A.
Entrance Floor Grilles: Recessed extruded aluminum grille assembly with nominal 1 5/16 inch
wide tread strips running perpendicular to traffic flow, slots between treads, and perimeter frame
forming sides of recess; grille hinged for access to recess.
1. Recess Depth: 1-3/4 inches.
2. Tread Surfaces: Polyprolylene brush.
3. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full selection.
4. Length in Direction of Traffic Flow: 108 inches.
5. Width Perpendicular to Traffic Flow: Full width of vestibule.
6. Frame: Anodized aluminum for embedding in concrete; minimal exposed trim; stud or
hook concrete anchors.
B.
Mounting: Top of non-resilient members level with adjacent floor.
C.
Structural Capacity: Capable of supporting a rolling load of 500 pounds without permanent
deformation or noticeable deflection.
D.
Vibration Resistant Fabrication: All members welded, riveted, or bolted; no snap or friction
connections.
2.03 MATS
A.
Recessed Frame: 1 3/4 inch thick zinc exposed top strip, zinc coated steel concealed bottom
strip, 1 3/4 inch deep, with anchoring features.
2.04 FABRICATION
A.
Construct recessed mat frames square, tight joints at corners, rigid. Coat surfaces with
protective coating where in contact with cementitious materials.
B.
Fabricate mats in single unit sizes; fabricate multiple mats where indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that floor opening for mats are ready to receive work.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
12 4813 - 1
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND
FRAMES
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Mats: Verify size of floor recess before fabricating mats.
B.
Vacuum clean floor recess.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install frames to achieve flush plane with finished floor surface.
B.
Install walk-off surface in floor recess flush with finish floor after cleaning of finish flooring.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Gap Formed at Recessed Frame From Mat Size: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
12 4813 - 2
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND
FRAMES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 12 9300
SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Bollards.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Bollard infill and underground encasement.
B.
Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Anchors to attach site furnishings to mounting surfaces.
C.
Section 32 3136 - Security Gates and Barriers: Crash test rated bollards.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2012.
1.04 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Steel Pipe Bollards:
1. FairWeather Site Furnishings; B-2 6" dia. bollard: www.fairweathersf.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 BOLLARDS
A.
Steel Pipe Bollards: Hollow steel pipe with plain shaft.
1. Shape: Round.
2. Diameter: 6 inches.
3. Height above grade: 3'-0" inches.
4. Cap: Formed steel dome.
5. Materials:
a. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, standard weight.
b. Factory Finish: Primed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that mounting surfaces, preinstalled anchor bolts, or other mounting devices are properly
installed; and ready to receive site furnishing items.
B.
See Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications for anchors to attach site furnishings to mounting
surfaces.
C.
Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install site furnishings in accordance with approved shop drawings, and manufacturer’s
instructions.
B.
See Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete for bollard infill and underground encasement.
C.
Provide level mounting surfaces for site furnishing items.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
12 9300 - 1
SITE FURNISHINGS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 12 9313
BICYCLE RACKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Bicycle racks.
1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A.
See Section 01 2300 - Alternates, for product alternatives affecting this section.
B.
This section describes a base bid product; refer to Section ________ for an alternative product.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service; 2013.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate size, shape, and dimensions, including clearances from adjacent
walls, doors, and obstructions.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Handle racks with sufficient care to prevent scratches and other damage to the finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Outdoor Bicycle Racks:
1. Creative Pipe, Inc Orca rack: Model: OR-2-F-SS: www.creativepipe.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 BICYCLE RACKS
A.
Exterior Bicycle Racks: Device allows user provided lock to simultaneously secure one wheel
and part of the frame on each bicycle parked or racked.
1. Style: Inverted horseshoe rack formed by one u-shaped bend of round pipe.
2. Capacity:2 bicycles.
3. Mounting, Ground: In-ground anchor.
4. Accessories: In-ground grout cover.
B.
Materials:
1. Tube: Stainless steel, ASTM A269, Type 304.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to receive bicycle racks.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
C.
Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory substrates have been properly repaired.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Ensure surfaces to receive bicycle racks are clean, flat, and level.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
12 9313 - 1
BICYCLE RACKS
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install bicycle racks level, plumb, square, and correctly located as indicated on the drawings.
C.
In-Ground Anchor Installation:
1. Prepare holes in size according to manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Place anchoring bolts through the holes in the pipe.
3. Lower rack into holes, ensuring the bottom of lower bends are at least 1-1/2 inch from the
ground.
4. Pour concrete and level rack.
5. Support until dry.
D.
Freestanding installation: Place in location shown on drawings.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean installed work to like-new condition. Do not use cleaning materials or methods that could
damage finish.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
12 9313 - 2
BICYCLE RACKS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 14 2010
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Complete elevator systems.
B.
Elevator maintenance.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Masonry hoistway enclosure; building-in and grouting hoistway
door frames.
B.
Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Hoistway framing.
C.
Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Pit ladder, Sill supports, divider beams, and overhead
hoist beams.
D.
Section 07 7200 - Roof Accessories: Smoke venting hatch at top of hoistway.
E.
Section 14 2817 - Passenger Elevator Control Systems.
F.
Section 14 2819 - Elevator Equipment
G.
Section 21 1300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in hoistway.
H.
Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment: Pit drain.
I.
Section 23 3423 - HVAC Power Ventilators: Mechanical fan for pressurization of elevator
hoistway.
J.
Section 26 0534 - Conduit:
K.
Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring:
L.
Section 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm:
1. Fire and smoke detectors and interconnecting devices.
2. Fire alarm signal lines to elevator controller cabinet.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; American Institute of Steel Construction,
Inc.; 2010.
B.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
C.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a meeting one week prior to starting work.
1. Review schedule of installation, installation procedures and conditions, and coordination
with related work.
2. Review use of elevator for construction purposes, hours of use, scheduling of its use,
cleanliness of cab, employment of operator, maintenance of system.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate the following information:
1. Locations of machine room equipment: driving machines, controllers, governors and other
component.
2. Hoistway components: Car, counterweight, sheaves, machine and sheave beams, guide
rails, buffers, ropes, and other components.
3. Rail bracket spacing; maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to
building structural framing.
4. Individual weight of principal components; load reaction at points of support.
5. Loads on hoisting beams and location of trolley beams.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
14 2010 - 1
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
6.
7.
8.
Clearances and over-travel of car and counterweight.
Location and sizes of access doors, doors, and frames.
Interface with building security system.
C.
Product Data: Provide data on the following items:
1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels, indicators.
2. Cab design, dimensions, layout, and components.
3. Cab and hoistway door and frame details.
4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
D.
Maintenance Contract.
E.
Maintenance Data: Include:
1. Parts catalog with complete list of equipment replacement parts; identify each entry with
equipment description and identifying code.
2. Technical information for servicing operating equipment.
3. Legible schematic of hydraulic piping and wiring diagrams of installed electrical equipment
and changes made in the Work. List symbols corresponding to identity or markings on
machine room and hoistway apparatus.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with applicable code and as supplemented in this section.
B.
Designer Qualifications: Design guide rails, brackets, anchors, and machine anchors under
direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this
type and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
C.
Perform structural steel design, fabrication, and installation in accordance with AISC 360,
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. Perform seismic design in accordance with
applicable code.
D.
Fabricate and install door and frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80.
E.
Installer Qualifications: Employees and supervisor on payroll of elevator equipment
manufacturer.
F.
Products Requiring Fire Resistance Rating: Listed and classified by UL.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Schindler Elevator Co.; Product 400AE Machine Room Less - General Purpose and
Hospital/Service.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. ThyssenKrupp Elevator; Product ____: www.thyssenkruppelevator.com.
2. Otis Elevator Co; Product ____: www.otis.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C.
All components to be manufactured by same entity, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 ELEVATORS
A.
Elevator No.1: Passenger, geared electric.
1. Hoistway Doors and Frames: Stainless steel.
2. Cab Height: 96 inches.
3. Hoistway and Cab Entrance Frame Opening Size: 4'-0" x 7'-0" inches.
4. Door Type: Double leaf.
5. Door Operation: Center opening.
6. Rated Net Capacity: 4000 lbs.
7. Rated Speed: 200 ft/min.
8. Clear Net Platform Size: 73" x 99" inches.
9. Travel Distance: As indicated on drawings.
10. Number of Stops: 5.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
14 2010 - 2
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
11. Number of Openings: 4 Front; 1 Rear.
12. Traction Machine Location: Overhead.
2.03 CONTROLS
A.
Elevator Controls: Provide landing buttons and hall lanterns.
B.
Door Controls:
1. Program door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at floor.
2. Render "Door Close" button inoperative when car is standing at dispatching terminal with
doors open.
3. If doors are prevented from closing for approximately ten seconds because of an
obstruction, automatically disconnect door reopening devices, close doors more slowly
until obstruction is cleared. Sound buzzer.
4. Door Safety Devices: Moveable, retractable safety edges, quiet in operation; equip with
photo-electric light rays.
C.
Landing Buttons: Stainless steel type, one for originating UP and one for originating DOWN
calls, one button only at terminating landings; marked with arrows.
D.
Landing Position Indicators: Illuminating white.
E.
Car Direction Indicators: Illuminating white.
F.
Interconnect elevator control system with building fire alarm systems.
G.
Provide "Firefighter's Operation" in accordance with applicable code. Designated Landing:
________.
2.04 EMERGENCY POWER
A.
Arrange elevator operation to operate under emergency power when normal power supply fails.
2.05 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A.
Electrical Characteristics:
1. ____ hp.
2. 208 volts, three phase, 60 Hz.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that hoistway, pit, and machine room are ready for work of this section.
C.
Verify hoistway shaft and openings are of correct size and within tolerance.
D.
Verify location and size of machine foundation and position of machine foundation bolts.
E.
Verify that electrical power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Arrange for temporary electrical power for installation work and testing of elevator components.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install system components. Connect equipment to building utilities.
B.
Provide conduit, boxes, wiring, and accessories.
C.
Mount machines on vibration and acoustic isolators, on bed plate and concrete pad. Place on
structural supports and bearing plates. Securely fasten to building supports. Prevent lateral
displacement.
D.
Accommodate equipment in space indicated.
E.
Install guide rails using threaded bolts with metal shims and lock washers under nuts.
Compensate for expansion and contraction movement of guide rails.
F.
Accurately machine and align guide rails. Form smooth joints with machined splice plates.
G.
Bolt or weld brackets directly to structural steel hoistway framing.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
14 2010 - 3
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
H.
Field Welds: Chip and clean away oxidation and residue, wire brush; spot prime with two coats.
I.
Coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction.
J.
Install hoistway door sills, frames, and headers in hoistway walls. Grout sills in place. Set
entrances in vertical alignment with car openings and aligned with plumb hoistway lines.
K.
Structural Metal Surfaces: Clean surfaces of rust, oil or grease; wipe clean with solvent; prime
two coats.
L.
Machine Room Components: Clean and degrease; prime one coat, finish with one coat of
enamel.
M. Adjust equipment for smooth and quiet operation.
3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Guide Rail Alignment: Plumb and parallel to each other in accordance with ASME A17.1.
B.
Cab Movement on Aligned Guide Rails: Smooth movement, with no objectionable lateral or
oscillating movement or vibration.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and inspection by regulatory agencies will be performed at their discretion.
1. Schedule tests with agencies and notify Owner and Architect.
2. Obtain permits required to perform tests.
3. Document regulatory agency tests and inspections in accordance with the requirements of
Section 01 4000.
4. Perform tests required by regulatory agencies.
5. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car so not to cause passenger discomfort.
B.
Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each floor to achieve 1/4 inch from flush.
3.07 CLEANING
A.
Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces.
B.
Clean surfaces and components ready for inspection.
3.08 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit construction traffic within cab after cleaning.
B.
Protect installed products until project completion.
C.
Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
3.09 MAINTENANCE
A.
See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service.
B.
Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
C.
Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under the supervision and
in the direct employ of the elevator manufacturer or original installer.
D.
Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without
prior written consent of Owner.
E.
Provide service and maintenance of elevator system and components for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
F.
Examine system components bi-monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.
G.
Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment. Maintain
hydraulic fluid levels. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the
manufacturer of the original equipment. Replace wire ropes when necessary to maintain the
required factor of safety.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
14 2010 - 4
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
H.
Perform work without removing cars during peak traffic periods.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
14 2010 - 5
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 14 9100
FACILITY CHUTES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Gravity chutes for waste (trash, refuse) and recyclables.
B.
Chute maintenance.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 07 6100 - Sheet Metal Roofing: Counterflashing at chute roof vent.
B.
Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashing at chute roof vent.
C.
Section 11 8227 - Waste Compactors: Compactors and chute interlock controls.
D.
Section 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Connection of interlock systems and sensors to
fire alarm system.
E.
Section 21 1300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Connection to sprinklers inside chute.
F.
Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping:
1. Water piping connections to spray cleaning equipment.
G.
Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring:
1. Connection of control panels to 110 VAC electrical power.
2. Wiring and conduit between control panels and controlled components.
3. Wiring and conduit between discharge room spray cleaning switch and flushing spray
head.
1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A.
See Section 01 2300 - Alternates, for product alternatives affecting this section.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection
Association; 2013.
B.
NFPA 82 - Standard on Incinerators and Waste and Linen Handling Systems and Equipment;
National Fire Protection Association; 2009.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
See Section 01 4000 for additional requirements.
B.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Chutes and Chute Components: Use one of the following:
1. Basis of Design; CHUTES International: www.chutes.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 CHUTES
A.
Waste and Recyclables Chutes: Sheet metal, round, constant diameter extending from above
roof to lowest floor, with intake doors at each floor and bottom outlet into room designated on
drawings; complying with requirements of NFPA 82 and local code.
1. Diameter: 24 inches inside.
2. Intake Doors: Hopper type, no locks.
3. Intake Door Size: 15 by 18 inches wide by high.
4. Interlock system and sensors that automatically prevent:
a. Opening more than one intake door at a time.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
14 9100 - 1
FACILITY CHUTES
b.
5.
Opening any intake door when temperature in chute exceeds predetermined,
adjustable temperature.
c. Opening any intake door when spray cleaning is in progress.
d. Opening any intake door when compactor is not ready to accept waste.
Manual controls to activate spray cleaning from discharge room.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A.
Chute: Factory-fabricated to the greatest extent possible, with continuously welded or
lock-seamed joints and smooth, non-snag interior (no protruding bolts, rivets, hardware, sharp
edges or corners).
1. Material: Stainless steel sheet.
2. Sheet Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.06 inch.
3. Throat Sections: Provide sloped throat sections for intake doors, of same material and
construction as chute.
4. Factory-coat outside of chute with sprayed sound-dampening material.
5. Fabricate with support frames at each floor with sound isolator pads and expansion joints
in chute between each support point.
B.
Intake Doors: Factory-assembled door and frame, self-closing and positive-latching; frame
designed for chase construction, flush-mounted.
1. Material: Stainless steel, brushed or satin finish.
2. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hour ("B" label) with 30-minute temperature rise of 250 degrees F.
3. Pulls: T-handle or lever handle latch; polished stainless steel.
4. Signs: Mark on frame or door face the purpose of the chute, using engraving, integral
raised lettering, or other permanent signs.
C.
Discharge Doors: Aluminum-coated steel; normally-open, 1 1/2-hour ("B" label) fire rated, with
fusible link closing; style as required by chute configuration.
1. Vertical Discharge Style: Horizontally closing accordion fire damper, spring-closed.
D.
Access Doors: Same construction and fire rating as intake doors, with locks; provide wherever
equipment requiring maintenance is located inside chute, including sprinklers and plumbing and
electrical connections.
E.
Roof Vent: Full diameter, extending minimum 48 inches above roof level, with roof deck flange.
1. Material: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Counterflashing and clamping ring of non-ferrous metal compatible with chute material.
3. Top Unit: Screened vent.
F.
Fire Sprinklers: Comply with NFPA 82 and NFPA 13; provide 1/2 inch NPS sprinkler heads
mounted inside chute intake throats at the following locations:
1. At or above the top intake opening.
2. At the lowest intake opening.
3. In buildings of more than two stories, at every other floor.
G.
Spray Cleaning Equipment:
1. Flushing Spray: Solenoid controlled 3/4 inch NPS spray head mounted above top intake
door.
2. Sanitizing Unit: Tank and feeder to introduce disinfectant into flushing spray line.
a. Provide backflow preventer valve and actuator switch.
b. Minimum 1 gallon capacity.
c. Accessible through access door immediately above top intake door.
H.
Electrical Controls: 110 V AC.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A.
Complete chute installation and testing before completion of enclosing construction.
B.
Coordinate sprinkler and spray cleaning devices with size, location and installation of service
utilities.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
14 9100 - 2
FACILITY CHUTES
C.
Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install chutes and equipment in accordance with NFPA 82 requirements and manufacturer's
instructions.
B.
Maintain fire-resistive capacity of enclosing walls.
C.
Install chute plumb and without offsets or obstructions that might prevent free fall of materials,
except where indicated on drawings.
D.
Anchor securely in manner required to withstand impact and weight of materials in chute.
E.
Install roof vent flange to roof deck prior to installation of roofing.
F.
Install counterflashing after roofing installation.
G.
Adjust doors and other operating components for smooth operation.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
See Section 01 4000 for additional requirements.
B.
Place bagged material of expected size in chute to verify free fall.
C.
Test all components for proper operation.
1. Operate doors, locks, and interlocks.
2. Operate spray cleaning devices.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
After completion of enclosing walls, clean exposed chute components; do not remove testing
agency labels.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A.
See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service.
B.
Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
C.
Provide service and maintenance of chute and equipment for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
14 9100 - 3
FACILITY CHUTES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 21 1200
FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire standpipe system layout, installation, and certification. The entire system
shall be installed in conformance with NFPA 14.
B. This specification is intended for a contractor with competence and experience in the installation
of fire protection systems. These life safety systems are expected to successfully operate under
adverse conditions. Adequate installation will result in code compliance, trouble-free service, and
reasonable protection of occupants and property from fire.
C. A Class I manual wet fire standpipe system consists of pipes full of pressurized water. Water flow
and pressure is furnished by the Fire Department for manual fire suppression. Standpipe
equipment is intended to be installed in heated, insulated spaces where air temperature will be
maintained at a minimum of 40OF throughout the year.
D. Section 903.4 and 907.14 of the Building Code of New York State requires all valves controlling
the water supply for automatic sprinkler systems and water-flow switches to be electrically
supervised and monitored by an approved supervising station. Monitoring of fire sprinkler
systems is not covered in this specification.
E. Fire standpipe systems must undergo periodic inspection, testing and maintenance in accordance
with NFPA 25 and the Fire Code of New York State
1.2
REFERENCED CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Building Code of New York State (2010 Edition)
B. Fire Code of New York State (2010 Edition)
C. NFPA 14- Standard for the Installation of Standpipe Systems (2007 Edition)
D. NFPA 25 – Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire
Protection Systems (2008 Edition)
E. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (2008 edition)
F. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code (2007 edition)
G. NFPA 170: Standard for Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols (2009 Edition)
H. NFPA 291, Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants, 2010 Edition
I.
NICET (National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies) – Fire Protection
Engineering Technology, Automatic Sprinkler System Layout, Program Detail Manual
J.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fire Protection Equipment Directory (2013 Edition)
K. Equipment manufacturers written installation instructions and data sheets
1.3
PROJECT SUMMARY
A. Provide NFPA 14 Class I manual wet fire standpipe system with 2-1/2 in. fire department hose
valves located in stair towers as indicated. Firefighting water flows and pressures will be
furnished by the fire department pumping the fire department connection(s).
B.
Provide fire sprinkler zone controls (zone control valve assembly, check valve, flow and tamper
switches, test and drain device, etc.) on combined sprinkler and standpipe risers where indicated
on drawings
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1200- 1
FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
1.4
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
PRE-CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be prepared by a NICET Level 3 or Level 4 fire sprinkler layout technician.
Submittals shall bear the technician’s NICET certification number.
B. Working plans: Comply with NFPA 13-22.1.3 for ‘working plans’. Submittals which do not comply
with the above may be rejected by the project fire protection engineer without further review until
corrected.
C. Equipment: Submit all sprinkler equipment specified in this section for review and approval by the
project fire protection engineer.
D. A PE seal on submittals is not required or desired
E. Design Data: Submit hydraulic design calculations for each remote area
F. Any contractor-proposed deviations from this specification shall be reviewed and accepted by the
project fire protection engineer and the owner prior to installation. The owner may elect to accept
‘value engineering’ with approved credit at his discretion.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record (“As-built”) Documents: Submit drawings depicting locations of sprinklers, piping
and valves as installed, final approved hydraulic calculations, seismic brace calculations and
approved equipment submittals.
B. Submit original pamphlet of NFPA 25-2008, “Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and
Maintenance of Water Based Fire Protection Systems” to the owner upon completion of the
project.
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fire Protection Equipment Manufacturer: Company(ies) shall specialize in manufacturing listed
products specified in this section
B. Installer: Company shall be competent and qualified to perform work of this section. Certain
municipalities may require licensing of such companies.
C. System layout and installation shall be under the direct supervision of a NICET Level 3 or Level 4
certified technician
PART 2 – DESIGN
2.1 INFORMATION AND PARAMETERS
A. Flow test information provided by City of Buffalo Water Department (test date 9/12/13) indicates
70 psi static/62 psi residual flowing 1,130 gpm [3,040 gpm @ 20 psi] on the existing 8 in.
underground water main in Ohio Street between Louisiana Street and South Street. Perform
NFPA 291 flow test to confirm water supply prior to submission of installation drawings. Confirm
that all underground water supply control valves are in the open position prior to testing.
B. The most hydraulically remote standpipe hose connection in the building shall be capable of
providing a minimum flow rate of 250 gpm at 100 psi. The most hydraulically remote standpipe
riser shall be capable of providing a minimum flow rate of 500 gpm. The flow rate for additional
standpipe connections on the system shall be a minimum of 250 gpm per standpipe with the total
not to exceed 750 gpm. Calculations shall begin at the outlet of each hose connection and shall
include the friction loss for the hose valve and any connecting piping from the hose valve to the
standpipe (NFPA 14 Table 8.3.1.3). Flow rates and residual pressure shall be achievable by
pumping any number of fire department connections at a pressure not to exceed 175 psi.
3.0
PRODUCTS
A. All fire sprinkler system equipment shall be UL listed FM approved for fire protection service.
Minimum 175 psi water working pressure except as modified below. Like equipment shall be of
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1200- 2
FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
the same manufacturer except when a manufacturer does not make equipment for a specified
application.
3.1 PRODUCTS
A. All fire sprinkler system equipment shall be UL listed FM approved for fire protection service.
Minimum 175 psi water working pressure except as modified below. Like equipment shall be of
the same manufacturer except when a manufacturer does not make equipment for a specified
application.
3.2 ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Steel Pipe:
1.
ASTM A 53 (welded and seamless), ASTM A135 (electric resistance welded) or ASTM A
795 (welded and seamless for fire protection)
2.
Schedule 40 steel for pipe diameters 2” and smaller with ASME B.1.20.1 threaded ends
3.
Schedule 10 steel for pipe diameters 2-1/2” and larger; roll grooves
4.
Factory applied internal antibacterial coating for non-galvanized pipe
5.
Corrosion Resistance Ratio (CRR) ≥ 1.0; threadable lightwall pipe is not permitted.
6.
Design equipment: Allied Tube & Conduit with M-Coat ABFII internal coating Use M-Coat
where CPVC pipe is used
7.
Acceptable manufacturers: Allied Tube & Conduit, Bull Moose Tube Company, Wheatland
Tube or accepted equal
B. Fittings for steel pipe diameters 1” through 1-1/2”
1.
Class 125 cast iron threaded fittings conforming to ASTM A126 Class A, ANSI B1.20.1
threads, B16.4 dimensions and pressure rating; 175 psi wwp at 150OF W.O.G.
2.
Design equipment is Ward Manufacturing
3.
Acceptable manufacturers: Anvil Star, Ward Manufacturing or accepted equal
C. Fittings/couplings for steel pipe diameters 2” through 8”:
1.
Rigid, ductile iron roll grooved; EPDM Grade ‘E’ rubber gasket; heat treated carbon steel
bolts/nuts. Plain end fittings/couplings are not permitted.
2.
Design equipment is Victaulic FireLock Style 005 with Vic-Plus Gasket System
3.
Acceptable manufacturers: Victaulic FireLock, Anvil Star Gruvlok, Grinnell G-Fire or
accepted equal
3.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Fire protection piping shall be supported in accordance with NFPA 13. Hanger types, component
materials, locations, spacing, etc., shall comply with NFPA 13 Chapters 9.1 and 9.2.
B. Installation shall comply with NFPA 13 and manufacturer’s installation instructions. Indicate
hanger types, details and locations on installation drawings.
C. Trapeze bars, where provided, shall be installed as detailed on the approved installation drawings
D. Hangers for Steel Pipe Sizes 1 to 8 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel ring; countersunk
threads with knurled swivel nut
E. Structural attachments shall be of a type appropriate for the building construction
3.4 CONTROL AND DRAIN VALVES
A. Grooved-end butterfly valve:
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1200- 3
FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
1.
Diameters 2-1/2” through 8 ”; Ductile iron body and disc, gear operator and tamper switch
with two SPDT switches rated at 10 amps @ 125 or 250 VAC/60 Hz; 0.50 amps @ 125
VDC; 0.25 amps @ 250 VDC.
2.
Supervised open or closed depending on application.
3.
Design make is Victaulic FireLock Series 705, Series 705C (for supervision in closed
position)
4.
Acceptable manufacturers: Victaulic, Nibco, Kennedy
B. Outside Screw and Yoke (OS&Y) gate valve: Diameters 2-1/2” through 8” (where indicated)
1.
Flanged ends; ductile iron body resilient wedge; epoxy coated interior and exterior; pregrooved stem for supervisory switch; right hand (clockwise) rotation to close.
2.
Design equipment is Nibco F-607-RW
3.
Acceptable manufacturers: Nibco, Kennedy, Mueller Company
C. Drain valves: Diameters 1/2 in. through 2 in: Threaded end ball valve with brass body and ball;
carbon steel handle. Design make is Victaulic Series 722.
D. Check valves: Diameters 2-1/2 in. through 8 in.; Ductile iron body, spring loaded clapper,
stainless steel seat ring, EPDM grade “E” clapper seal facing. Install in vertical flow up or
horizontal orientation. Design make is Victaulic FireLock Series 717.
3.5 FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE
A. Cast brass angle valve with rising stem, internal parts of brass and stainless steel, aluminum
hand wheel; 2-1/2” female NPT inlet and a 2-1/2” male NST hose thread outlet connection.
Provide brass outlet cap chained to valve assembly and 2-1/2 in. by 1-1/2 in. reducer.
B. Where static or residual pressures exceed the limits prescribed by NFPA 14, provide pressure
reducing or regulating valves.
C. Design equipment is Potter-Roemer Figure 4065 (2-1/2 in. size).
3.6 ALARM AND SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
A.
OS&Y Valve Tamper Switch: Two sets of SPDT (Form C) 10.0 A @ 125/250VAC; 2.5 @
6/12/24VDC; NEMA 3R enclosure; adjusted to operate within two revolutions of the valve control
or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal position.
Design equipment: System Sensor OSY-2.
B.
Vane-Type Waterflow Switch (water-filled pipes only): Polyethylene vane; actuates at minimum
flow rate of 4 to 10 gpm; Two sets of SPDT (Form C) contacts rated at 10.0 A @ 125/250 VAC
2.5 A @ 6/12/24 VDC; NEMA 4 enclosure; adjustable time delay set to 30 seconds; mount flow
switch at least 6 inches from a fitting that changes the direction of water flow and no less than 24
inches from a valve or drain; Do not use on copper pipe. Design equipment: System Sensor
WFD Series.
3.7 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A.
Type: wall type where indicated on drawings.
1.
Two-way type with double clapper; cast brass body with polished brass finish; 2-1/2 in. x 21/2 in NST x 4 in. female NPT with caps and chains; automatic ball drip assembly;
escutcheon labeled “AUTO SPKR”.
2.
Design make: Potter-Roemer Model 5721
3.
Manufacturer: Croker, Elkhart, Potter-Roemer or approved equal.
4.
Label: Provide at fire department connection a minimum 18” by 18” reflective diagrammatic
sign meeting NFPA 170 requirements for sprinkler system
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1200- 4
FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install all standpipe hose connections so that there is a minimum of 1 inch between any
obstruction or wall and the handle of the valve when the valve is in any position ranging from fully
open to fully closed. Rotate valve to approximate 45 degree angle downward to prevent hose
kinking.
B. Install fire department valves 48 in. above finished floor.
C. Maintain required egress width at stair landings. Do not install piping or equipment to create a
tripping or impact hazard to building occupants
D. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or to allow
full swing of fire department wrench handle. Install not less than 18” and not more than 48”
above finished grade.
E. All main and sectional system control valves, including water supply control valves, shall have a
sign indicating the portion of the system that is controlled by the valve.
F. All control, drain, and test connection valves shall be provided with signs indicating their purpose.
G. Where a main or section control valve is located in a closed room or concealed space, the
location of the valve shall be indicated by a sign in an approved location on the outside of the
door or near the opening to the concealed space.
H. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
I.
Install piping in concealed spaces above removable finished ceilings (e.g., acoustical ceiling
tiles). Exposed piping is permitted only in spaces with no ceilings or where otherwise specified.
J.
Auxiliary drains shall be provided where a change in piping direction prevents drainage of system
piping through the main drain valve.
1.
Where the capacity of isolated trapped sections of pipe is 50 gallons or more, the auxiliary
drain shall consist of a valve not smaller than 1”, accessibly located (no more than 7 feet
above finished floor).
2.
Where the capacity of isolated trapped sections of pipe is more than 5 gallons and less than
50 gallons, the auxiliary drain shall consist of a valve ¾” or larger and a plug or nipple and
cap.
K. Alarm Devices:
1.
Flow switches: Connect each waterflow alarm switch to dedicated alarm zone or address on
the building fire alarm control unit. Grouping of waterflow alarm switches on a common
initiating device circuit is not permitted.
2.
Valve tamper switches: Up to five valve tamper switches in the same room may be
connected to a single conventional supervisory zone on the fire alarm control unit. On
addressable fire alarm systems, provide each tamper switch with a unique addressable
point.
L. Hangers
1.
Furnish and install sufficient hangers, supports, attachments, clips, inserts, and mounting
devices to support all piping
2.
Hangers shall be installed and located in accordance with NFPA 13 and manufacturers’
listings
3.
Hangers shall be secured directly to the building structure
4.
Trapeze bars, where provided, shall be installed as detailed on the shop drawings
5.
Provide additional hangers where necessary to prevent sagging of pipe and accumulation of
water
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1200- 5
FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
6.
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
Fire protection piping shall not support or be supported from walls or other building systems
unless specifically approved by the project fire protection engineer
4.2 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Final Acceptance/Commissioning Test: The system will be accepted only after satisfactory NFPA
acceptance testing has been accomplished.
B. Perform forward flow test through the backflow preventer at maximum calculated fire protection
system demand.
4.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Verify alarm and supervisory signal devices are installed and connected to fire alarm system.
Confirm signal transmission to the supervising station.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1200- 6
FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 21 1300
FIRE SUPPRESSION WET PIPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes wet-pipe sprinkler system layout, installation, and certification. The entire
system shall be installed in conformance with NFPA 13.
B. This specification is intended for a contractor with competence and experience in the
installation of fire sprinkler systems. These life safety systems are expected to successfully
operate under adverse conditions. Adequate installation will result in code compliance,
trouble-free service, and reasonable protection of occupants and property from fire.
C. A wet pipe fire sprinkler system consists of pipes full of pressurized water. It is intended to be
installed in heated, insulated spaces where air temperature will be maintained at a minimum
of 40OF throughout the year.
D. Section 903.4 and 907.14 of the Building Code of New York State requires all valves
controlling the water supply for automatic sprinkler systems and water-flow switches to be
electrically supervised and monitored by an approved supervising station. Monitoring of fire
sprinkler systems is not covered in this specification.
E. Fire sprinkler systems must undergo periodic inspection, testing and maintenance in
accordance with NFPA 25 and the Fire Code of New York State
1.2 REFERENCED CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Building Code of New York State (2010 Edition)
B. Fire Code of New York State (2010 Edition)
C. NFPA 13- Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems (2007 Edition)
D. NFPA 25 – Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire
Protection Systems (2008 Edition)
E. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (2008 edition)
F. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code (2007 edition)
G. NFPA 170: Standard for Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols (2009 Edition)
H. NFPA 291, Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants, 2010
Edition
I.
NICET (National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies) – Fire Protection
Engineering Technology, Automatic Sprinkler System Layout, Program Detail Manual
J.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fire Protection Equipment Directory (2013 Edition)
K. Equipment manufacturers written installation instructions and data sheets
1.3 PROJECT SUMMARY
A. Provide wet pipe fire sprinkler system to protect heated spaces above and below ceilings in
Group R-2 residential apartment building as indicated on drawings. Note that floor and roof
framing consists of open web trusses. Include sprinkler protection in dwelling unit bathrooms,
closets and pantries.
B. Provide alarm equipment consisting of water flow switches, valve tamper switches and
exterior electric waterflow alarm bell. Connection of fire alarm devices and associated
programming shall be by others.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1300- 1
FIRE SUPPRESSION WET PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
C. Firestopping of penetrations through fire resistance rated construction due to installation of
fire protection piping
D. Preparation and submission of NFPA 13 installation drawings, computer hydraulic
calculations, trapeze bar calculations, and water supply test report for approval by the project
fire protection engineer
E. Acceptance testing and submission of NFPA acceptance test documentation. Perform
forward flow test through the backflow preventer at maximum calculated fire protection
system demand
F. Preparation and submission of operation and maintenance documentation and as-built
documents.
1.4 PRE-CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be prepared by a NICET Level 3 or Level 4 fire sprinkler layout technician.
Submittals shall bear the technician’s NICET certification number.
B. Working plans: Comply with NFPA 13-22.1.3 for ‘working plans’. Submittals which do not
comply with the above may be rejected by the project fire protection engineer without further
review until corrected.
C. Equipment: Submit all sprinkler equipment specified in this section for review and approval by
the project fire protection engineer.
D. A PE seal on submittals is not required or desired
E. Design Data: Submit hydraulic design calculations for each remote area
F. Any contractor-proposed deviations from this specification shall be reviewed and accepted by
the project fire protection engineer and the owner prior to installation. The owner may elect
to accept ‘value engineering’ with approved credit at his discretion.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record (“As-built”) Documents: Submit drawings depicting locations of sprinklers,
piping and valves as installed, final approved hydraulic calculations, seismic brace
calculations and approved equipment submittals.
B. Submit original pamphlet of NFPA 25-2008, “Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and
Maintenance of Water Based Fire Protection Systems” to the owner upon completion of the
project.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fire Protection Equipment Manufacturer: Company(ies) shall specialize in manufacturing
listed products specified in this section
B. Installer: Company shall be competent and qualified to perform work of this section. Certain
municipalities may require licensing of such companies.
C. System layout and installation shall be under the direct supervision of a NICET Level 3 or
Level 4 certified technician
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide spare sprinklers, suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type and metal storage cabinet
located on wall near the incoming fire service
PART 2 – DESIGN
2.1 INFORMATION AND PARAMETERS
A. Flow test information provided by City of Buffalo Water Department (test date 9/12/13)
indicates 70 psi static/62 psi residual flowing 1,130 gpm [3,040 gpm @ 20 psi] on the existing
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1300- 2
FIRE SUPPRESSION WET PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
8 in. underground water main in Ohio Street between Louisiana Street and South Street.
Perform NFPA 291 flow test to confirm water supply prior to submission of installation
drawings. Confirm that all underground water supply control valves are in the open position
prior to testing.
B. Residential Dwelling Units and Main Corridors: 0.10 gpm/sf over the area protected by the 4
most hydraulically remote residential sprinklers plus 100 gpm outside hose stream demand.
Design is based on residential pendent sprinklers at 14 x 14 spacing discharging 19.6 gpm at
11.4 psi.
C. Combustible interstitial spaces with open web wood trusses including underside of insulated
roof: 0.10 gpm/sf over 1,500 sf. plus 100 gpm outside hose stream demand. Maximum
sprinkler coverage area is 130 sf. per NFPA 13-Table 8.6.2.2.1(a).
D. Trash Rooms, small Storage Rooms, small Electrical Rooms: Ordinary Hazard Design
Criteria: 0.20 gpm/sf over area of room; outside hose stream demand of 250 gpm.
E. Fitness Room, Management Office, Office 250: Light Hazard Design Criteria: 0.10 gpm/sf
over 1,500 sf design area with an outside hose stream demand of 100 gpm.
F. Provide sprinkler protection at all stair landings
G. Reduction of hydraulic design area in accordance with NFPA 13-11.2.3.2.3 is permitted for
area/density calculations only.
H. A minimum 5 psi residual pressure safety factor shall be incorporated into all residential
sprinkler hydraulic calculations at the point of connection to the underground water supply
main. A minimum 10 psi residual pressure safety factor shall be incorporated into all other
sprinkler hydraulic calculations at the point of connection to the underground water supply
main.
I.
Utilize equipment manufacturer’s tabulated pressure loss values in the hydraulic calculations
(dry pipe valve, backflow preventer, check valves, etc.). Use of generic or default pressure
loss is not permitted.
J.
Design water flow velocity shall not exceed 20 fps to 25 fps through any pipe, except velocity
shall not exceed 18 fps through any pipe with a paddle type flow switch.
PART 3- PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT
3.1 PRODUCTS
A. All fire sprinkler system equipment shall be UL listed FM approved for fire protection service.
Minimum 175 psi water working pressure except as modified below. Like equipment shall be
of the same manufacturer except when a manufacturer does not make equipment for a
specified application.
3.2 ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Steel Pipe:
1.
ASTM A 53 (welded and seamless), ASTM A135 (electric resistance welded) or ASTM A
795 (welded and seamless for fire protection)
2.
Schedule 40 steel for pipe diameters 2” and smaller with ASME B.1.20.1 threaded ends
3.
Schedule 10 steel for pipe diameters 2-1/2” and larger; roll grooves
4.
Factory applied internal antibacterial coating for non-galvanized pipe
5.
Corrosion Resistance Ratio (CRR) ≥ 1.0; threadable lightwall pipe is not permitted.
6.
Design equipment: Allied Tube & Conduit with M-Coat ABFII internal coating Use MCoat where CPVC pipe is used
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1300- 3
FIRE SUPPRESSION WET PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
7.
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
Acceptable manufacturers: Allied Tube & Conduit, Bull Moose Tube Company,
Wheatland Tube or accepted equal
B. Fittings for steel pipe diameters 1” through 1-1/2”
1.
Class 125 cast iron threaded fittings conforming to ASTM A126 Class A, ANSI B1.20.1
threads, B16.4 dimensions and pressure rating; 175 psi wwp at 150OF W.O.G.
2.
Design equipment is Ward Manufacturing
3.
Acceptable manufacturers: Anvil Star, Ward Manufacturing or accepted equal
C. Fittings/couplings for steel pipe diameters 2” through 8”:
1.
Rigid, ductile iron roll grooved; EPDM Grade ‘E’ rubber gasket; heat treated carbon steel
bolts/nuts. Plain end fittings/couplings are not permitted.
2.
Design equipment is Victaulic FireLock Style 005 with Vic-Plus Gasket System
3.
Acceptable manufacturers: Victaulic FireLock, Anvil Star Gruvlok, Grinnell G-Fire or
accepted equal
3.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Fire protection piping shall be supported in accordance with NFPA 13. Hanger types,
component materials, locations, spacing, etc., shall comply with NFPA 13 Chapters 9.1 and
9.2.
B. Installation shall comply with NFPA 13 and manufacturer’s installation instructions. Indicate
hanger types, details and locations on installation drawings.
C. Trapeze bars, where provided, shall be installed as detailed on the approved installation
drawings
D. Hangers for Steel Pipe Sizes 1 to 8 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel ring; countersunk
threads with knurled swivel nut
E. Structural attachments shall be of a type appropriate for the building construction
3.4 CONTROL AND DRAIN VALVES
A. Grooved-end butterfly valve:
1.
Diameters 2-1/2” through 8 ”; Ductile iron body and disc, gear operator and tamper
switch with two SPDT switches rated at 10 amps @ 125 or 250 VAC/60 Hz; 0.50 amps
@ 125 VDC; 0.25 amps @ 250 VDC.
2.
Supervised open or closed depending on application.
3.
Design make is Victaulic FireLock Series 705, Series 705C (for supervision in closed
position)
4.
Acceptable manufacturers: Victaulic, Nibco, Kennedy
B. Outside Screw and Yoke (OS&Y) gate valve: Diameters 2-1/2” through 8” (where indicated)
1.
Flanged ends; ductile iron body resilient wedge; epoxy coated interior and exterior; pregrooved stem for supervisory switch; right hand (clockwise) rotation to close.
2.
Design equipment is Nibco F-607-RW
3.
Acceptable manufacturers: Nibco, Kennedy, Mueller Company
C. Drain valves: Diameters 1/2 in. through 2 in: Threaded end ball valve with brass body and
ball; carbon steel handle. Design make is Victaulic Series 722.
D. Check valves: Diameters 2-1/2 in. through 8 in.; Ductile iron body, spring loaded clapper,
stainless steel seat ring, EPDM grade “E” clapper seal facing. Install in vertical flow up or
horizontal orientation. Design make is Victaulic FireLock Series 717.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1300- 4
FIRE SUPPRESSION WET PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
3.5 SPRINKLERS
A. Pendent
1.
Quick response, recessed with glass bulb; ordinary temperature rating, except where
used near heat sources. Use in non-dwelling unit spaces with finished ceilings where
indicated on drawings.
2.
Finish: White polyester coated with matching recessed escutcheon. [ADD
ALTERNATE: WHITE POLYESTER COATED WITH MATCHING CONCEALED
COVERPLATE].
3.
Design make: Reliable F1FR Recessed [CONCEALED] , quick response, K= 5.6
4.
Manufacturers: Tyco, Reliable, Viking, or accepted equal
B. Upright
1.
Quick response upright with glass bulb, ordinary temperature rating except follow NFPA
13 when heat sources are present. Use in spaces with no ceilings and exposed
sprinkler piping where indicated on drawings.
2.
Finish: Standard brass or chrome plated.
3.
Design make: Reliable F1FR, quick response, K= 5.6 or K=8.0
4.
Manufacturers: Tyco, Reliable, Viking, or accepted equal
C. Horizontal Sidewall (Light Hazard)
1.
Quick response sidewall with glass bulb, ordinary temperature rating except follow
NFPA 13 when heat sources are present. Use in spaces where indicated.
2.
Finish: Standard brass or chrome plated in spaces with exposed sprinkler piping; White
polyester coated with matching recessed escutcheon in finished spaces with concealed
sprinkler piping.
3.
Design make: Reliable HSW 1, quick response, K= 5.6
4.
Manufacturers: Tyco, Reliable, Viking, or accepted equal
D. Residential Pendent/Residential Sidewall
1.
UL 1626 listed residential recessed pendent with glass bulb. Use in resident sleeping
rooms where indicated on drawings. Calculate 4 most hydraulically remote sprinklers at
0.10 gpm/sf density. Apply manufacturer’s minimum listed flow and pressure
requirements for specified density (NOT 0.05 gpm/sf).
2.
Finish: White polyester coated with matching recessed escutcheon [ADD ALTERNATE:
WHITE POLYESTER COATED WITH MATCHING CONCEALED COVERPLATE].
3.
Design make: Reliable F1 Res 58, K=5.8 (pendent)
4.
Manufacturers: Tyco, Reliable, Viking, or accepted equal
G. Dry Pendent/Dry Horizontal Sidewall
1.
Quick response with glass bulb; intermediate temperature rating, except where used
near heat sources. Use dry pendent in spaces with finished ceilings where indicated on
drawings.
2.
Finish: White polyester coated with matching recessed escutcheon [ADD ALTERNATE:
WHITE POLYESTER COATED WITH MATCHING CONCEALED COVERPLATE].
3.
4.
5.
Design make: Reliable F3QR dry pendent where ceilings are present; K= 5.6
Horizontal sidewall listed for use in ordinary hazard where required
Manufacturers: Tyco, Reliable, Viking, or accepted equal
3.6 ALARM AND SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1300- 5
FIRE SUPPRESSION WET PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
A. OS&Y Valve Tamper Switch: Two sets of SPDT (Form C) 10.0 A @ 125/250VAC; 2.5 @
6/12/24VDC; NEMA 3R enclosure; adjusted to operate within two revolutions of the valve
control or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal
position. Design equipment: System Sensor OSY-2.
B. Vane-Type Waterflow Switch (water-filled pipes only): Polyethylene vane; actuates at
minimum flow rate of 4 to 10 gpm; Two sets of SPDT (Form C) contacts rated at 10.0 A @
125/250 VAC 2.5 A @ 6/12/24 VDC; NEMA 4 enclosure; adjustable time delay set to 30
seconds; mount flow switch at least 6 inches from a fitting that changes the direction of water
flow and no less than 24 inches from a valve or drain; Do not use on copper pipe. Design
equipment: System Sensor WFD Series.
3.7 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. Type: wall type where indicated on drawings.
1.
Two-way type with double clapper; cast brass body with polished brass finish; 2-1/2 in. x
2-1/2 in NST x 4 in. female NPT with caps and chains; automatic ball drip assembly;
escutcheon labeled “AUTO SPKR”.
2.
Design make: Potter-Roemer Model 5721
3.
Manufacturer: Croker, Elkhart, Potter-Roemer or approved equal.
4.
Label: Provide at fire department connection a minimum 18” by 18” reflective
diagrammatic sign meeting NFPA 170 requirements for sprinkler system
3.8 FLOOR ZONE CONTROL ASSEMBLY
A. Cast stainless steel body; grooved end connections; approved for horizontal and vertical up
installation; pressure gauge and main drain connections; dedicated waterflow switch
containing two sets of SPDT (Form C) contacts, having an electrical rating of 10A @ 125/250
VAC/2.5 A @ 24 VDC; basic trim with pressure relief and drain valve; test orifice equal to the
smallest K factor sprinkler on the system
B. Provide pressure combination test/drain valve assembly; include pressure relief valve option
on all gridded systems and downstream of all pressure reducing valves. Design make is
AGF Model 1000/1011A
C. Provide assembly valve size indicated on drawings. Include spring-loaded check valve
downstream of the assembly
D. Design equipment: Reliable Model CR Commercial Riser
E. Manufacturers: Reliable, Tyco, Viking or accepted equal
3.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Double Check Valve (DCV) Assembly
1.
UL listed and approved by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic
Research at the University of Southern California (FCCCHR).
2.
Vertical up or horizontal installation; size as indicated on drawings.
3.
Installation shall comply with NYSDOH Guidelines For Designing Backflow Prevention
Assembly Installations
4.
Provide test header consisting of utilizing two cast brass 2-1/2 in. angle valves for full
forward flow testing of backflow preventer. Cast brass end inlet body, brass plate with 21/2" female NPT inlet and 2 1/2" male hose NST outlet with cap with chain. Rough
chrome plated.
5.
Install test header on riser or header downstream of backflow preventer and upstream of
riser main control valves
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1300- 6
FIRE SUPPRESSION WET PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
6.
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
Design equipment: Watts 757 (butterfly valves) with Potter-Roemer Model 4065 test
header angle hose valve(s)
3.10 WATER FLOW ALARM ELECTRIC BELL
A. 8 in. diameter 24VDC vibrating bell; weatherproof backbox; red powder coating; minimum
79dB at 10 ft.
B. Power supply shall be from a dedicated 24VDC supervised fire alarm notification appliance
circuit. Bell shall operate upon any fire protection system water flow switch actuation and
NOT on any other alarm initiating device actuation.
C. Design make: Potter MBA-248 with BBK-1 weatherproof backbox
D. Manufacturers: Potter Electric Signal, Wheelock, Edwards or accepted equal
PART 4.0 - EXECUTION
4.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or to
allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. Install not less than 18” and not more than
48” above finished grade.
B. All sprinkler systems shall be arranged for flushing. Provide readily removable fittings at the
end of all cross mains. All cross mains shall terminate in 1¼ in. or larger pipe. All branch
lines on gridded systems shall be arranged to facilitate flushing.
C. Provide horizontal sidewall sprinklers underneath overhead doors in the open position
D. Provide sprinkler underneath ductwork, open-grate floors and other fixed obstructions wider
than 4 ft.
E. Provide horizontal sidewall sprinkler no higher than 2 ft above bottom of elevator hoistway
F. Install dry pendent sprinklers in the side outlet of a tee fitting only
G. All main and sectional system control valves, including water supply control valves, shall
have a sign indicating the portion of the system that is controlled by the valve.
H. All control, drain, and test connection valves shall be provided with signs indicating their
purpose.
I.
Where a main or section control valve is located in a closed room or concealed space, the
location of the valve shall be indicated by a sign in an approved location on the outside of the
door or near the opening to the concealed space.
J.
Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
K. Install piping in concealed spaces above removable finished ceilings (e.g., acoustical ceiling
tiles). Exposed piping is permitted only in spaces with no ceilings or where otherwise
specified.
L. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tile.
M. Provide guards for sprinklers where such sprinklers are subject to mechanical damage or are
located less than 7-0 above finished floor heads. Guards shall be listed, supplied, and
approved for use with the sprinkler by the sprinkler manufacturer (does not apply sprinklers
such as residential or extended coverage).
N. Riser nipples or “sprigs” to upright sprinklers shall contain no fittings between the branch line
tee and the reducing coupling at the sprinkler. Riser nipples exceeding 30 inches in length
shall be individually supported.
O. Auxiliary drains shall be provided where a change in piping direction prevents drainage of
system piping through the main drain valve.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1300- 7
FIRE SUPPRESSION WET PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
1.
Where the capacity of isolated trapped sections of pipe is 50 gallons or more, the
auxiliary drain shall consist of a valve not smaller than 1”, accessibly located (no more
than 7 feet above finished floor).
2.
Where the capacity of isolated trapped sections of pipe is more than 5 gallons and less
than 50 gallons, the auxiliary drain shall consist of a valve ¾” or larger and a plug or
nipple and cap.
P. Alarm Devices:
1.
Flow switches: Connect each waterflow alarm switch to dedicated alarm zone or address
on the building fire alarm control unit. Grouping of waterflow alarm switches on a
common initiating device circuit is not permitted.
2.
Valve tamper switches: Up to five valve tamper switches in the same room may be
connected to a single conventional supervisory zone on the fire alarm control unit. On
addressable fire alarm systems, provide each tamper switch with a unique addressable
point.
Q. Hangers
1.
Furnish and install sufficient hangers, supports, attachments, clips, inserts, and
mounting devices to support all piping
2.
Hangers shall be installed and located in accordance with NFPA 13 and manufacturers’
listings
3.
Hangers shall be secured directly to the building structure
4.
Trapeze bars, where provided, shall be installed as detailed on the shop drawings
5.
Provide additional hangers where necessary to prevent sagging of pipe and
accumulation of water
6.
Fire protection piping shall not support or be supported from walls or other building
systems unless specifically approved by the project fire protection engineer
4.2 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Final Acceptance/Commissioning Test: The system will be accepted only after satisfactory
NFPA acceptance testing has been accomplished.
B. Perform forward flow test through the backflow preventer at maximum calculated fire
protection system demand.
4.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Verify alarm and supervisory signal devices are installed and connected to fire alarm system.
Confirm signal transmission to the supervising station.
4.4 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply metal foil to protect sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons from painting
overspray. Remove after painting. Replace inadvertently painted sprinklers with new.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1300- 8
FIRE SUPPRESSION WET PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 21 1310
FIRE SUPPRESSION DRY PIPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes dry-pipe sprinkler system layout, installation, and certification. The entire
system shall be installed in conformance with NFPA 13.
B. This specification is intended for contractors with competence and experience in the
installation of fire sprinkler systems. These life safety systems are expected to successfully
operate under adverse conditions. Adequate installation will result in code compliance,
trouble-free service, and reasonable protection of people and property from fire.
C. A dry pipe fire sprinkler system consists of pipes full of pressurized air and is intended to be
installed in unheated, uninsulated spaces where air temperature will not be maintained at a
minimum of 40OF throughout the year. It is essential that piping and sprinklers be installed to
be completely drainable.
D. Fire sprinkler systems must undergo periodic inspection, testing and maintenance in
accordance with NFPA 25 and the Fire Code of New York State
1.2 REFERENCED CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Building Code of New York State (2010 Edition)
B. Fire Code of New York State (2010 Edition)
C. NFPA 13- Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems (2007 Edition)
D. NFPA 25 – Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire
Protection Systems (2008 Edition)
E. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (2008 edition)
F. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code (2007 edition)
G. NFPA 170: Standard for Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols (2009 Edition)
H. NFPA 291, Recommended Practice for Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants, 2010
Edition
I.
NICET (National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies) – Fire Protection
Engineering Technology, Automatic Sprinkler System Layout, Program Detail Manual
J.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fire Protection Equipment Directory (2011 Edition)
K. Equipment manufacturers written installation instructions and data sheets
1.3 PROJECT SUMMARY
A. Provide dry pipe fire sprinkler systems to protect Open Parking Garage as indicated on
drawings.
B. Provide alarm equipment consisting of water flow switches, valve tamper switches, and
high/low air pressure supervisory switches
C. Firestopping of penetrations through fire resistance rated construction due to installation of
fire protection piping
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1310- 1
FIRE SUPPRESSION DRY PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
D. Preparation and submission of NFPA 13 installation drawings, computer hydraulic
calculations, trapeze bar calculations, and water supply test report for approval by the project
fire protection engineer
E. Acceptance testing and submission of NFPA acceptance test documentation
F. Preparation and submission of operation and maintenance documentation and as-built
documents.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be prepared by a NICET Level 3 or Level 4 fire sprinkler layout technician.
Submittals shall bear the technician’s NICET certification number.
B. Working plans: Comply with NFPA 13-22.1.3 for ‘working plans’. Drawings which do not
comply with the above may be rejected by the project fire protection engineer without further
review until corrected.
C. For dry pipe systems, working plans shall indicate threaded rod cut lengths and pipe
elevations to demonstrate adequate pipe pitch.
D. Equipment: Submit all sprinkler equipment specified in this section for review and approval by
the project fire protection engineer.
E. A PE seal on submittals is not required or desired
F. Design Data: Submit hydraulic design calculations for each remote area
G. Any contractor-proposed deviations from this specification shall be reviewed and accepted by
the project fire protection engineer and the owner prior to installation. The owner may elect
to accept ‘value engineering’ with approved credit at his discretion.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record (“As-built”) Documents: Submit drawings depicting locations of sprinklers,
piping and valves as installed, final approved hydraulic calculations, seismic brace
calculations and approved equipment submittals.
B. Submit original pamphlet of NFPA 25-2008, “Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and
Maintenance of Water Based Fire Protection Systems” to the owner upon completion of the
project.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fire Protection Equipment Manufacturer: Company(ies) shall specialize in manufacturing
listed products specified in this section
B. Installer: Company shall be competent and qualified to perform work of this section. Certain
municipalities may require licensing of such companies.
C. System layout and installation shall be under the direct supervision of a NICET Level 3 or
Level 4 certified technician
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide spare sprinklers, suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type and metal storage cabinet
located on wall near the incoming fire service
PART 2 – DESIGN
2.1 INFORMATION AND PARAMETERS
A. Flow test information provided by City of Buffalo Water Department (test date 9/12/13)
indicates 70 psi static/62 psi residual flowing 1,130 gpm [3,040 gpm @ 20 psi] on the existing
8 in. underground water main in Ohio Street between Louisiana Street and South Street.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1310- 2
FIRE SUPPRESSION DRY PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
Perform NFPA 291 flow test to confirm water supply prior to submission of installation
drawings. Confirm that all underground water supply control valves are in the open position
prior to testing.
B. Dry pipe systems shall not exceed 750 gallons internal capacity per system. Exception:
Systems in excess of 750 gallons internal capacity are permitted if dry system water delivery
is calculated or, alternately, demonstrated to meet the water delivery times in accordance
with NFPA 13-7.2.3.6.
C. Provide water flow switch, valve tamper switch and high/low air pressure supervisory switch
for each dry pipe system riser. Each alarm device shall be connected to a dedicated point or
zone at the fire alarm control unit. Combining of devices on a common initiating device circuit
is not permitted.
D. Open Parking Garage: Ordinary Hazard Design Criteria: 0.15 gpm/sf over 1,950 sf design
area with an outside hose stream demand of 250 gpm.
E. A 5 psi residual pressure safety factor shall be incorporated into all hydraulic calculations at
the point of connection to the underground water supply main
F. Utilize equipment manufacturer’s tabulated pressure loss values in the hydraulic calculations
(dry pipe valve, backflow preventer, check valves, etc.). Use of generic or default pressure
loss is not permitted.
G. Design water flow velocity shall not exceed 20 fps to 25 fps through any pipe
3.0 PRODUCTS
A. All fire sprinkler system equipment shall be UL listed FM approved for fire protection service.
Minimum 175 psi water working pressure except as modified below. Like equipment shall be
of the same manufacturer except when a manufacturer does not make equipment for a
specified application.
3.1 ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Steel Pipe:
1.
ASTM A 53 (welded and seamless), ASTM A135 (electric resistance welded) or ASTM A
795 (welded and seamless for fire protection)
2.
Schedule 40 steel for pipe diameters 2” and smaller with ASME B.1.20.1 threaded ends
3.
Schedule 10 steel for pipe diameters 2-1/2” and larger; roll grooves
4.
Factory applied internal antibacterial coating for non-galvanized pipe
5.
Corrosion Resistance Ratio (CRR) ≥ 1.0; threadable lightwall pipe is not permitted.
6.
Design equipment: Allied Tube & Conduit with ABFII internal coating
7.
Acceptable manufacturers: Allied Tube & Conduit, Bull Moose Tube Company,
Wheatland Tube or accepted equal
B. Fittings for steel pipe diameters 1” through 2”
1.
Class 125 cast iron threaded fittings conforming to ASTM A126 Class A, ANSI B1.20.1
threads, B16.4 dimensions and pressure rating; 175 psi wwp at 150OF W.O.G.
2.
Design equipment is Ward Manufacturing
3.
Acceptable manufacturers: Anvil Star, Ward Manufacturing or accepted equal
C. Fittings/couplings for steel pipe diameters 2-1/2” through 8”:
1.
Rigid, ductile iron roll grooved; EPDM Grade ‘E’ rubber gasket; heat treated carbon steel
bolts/nuts. Plain end fittings/couplings are not permitted.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1310- 3
FIRE SUPPRESSION DRY PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
2.
Design equipment is Anvil Star Gruvlok with Flush Gap gaskets
3.
Provide gasket which fits flush over the gap between the pipe ends and closes off the
gasket cavity
4.
Acceptable manufacturers: Victaulic FireLock, Anvil Star Gruvlok, Grinnell G-Fire or
accepted equal
3.2 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS
A. Fire protection piping shall be supported in accordance with NFPA 13. Hanger types,
component materials, locations, spacing, etc., shall comply with NFPA 13 Chapters 9.1 and
9.2.
B. Installation shall comply with NFPA 13 and manufacturer’s installation instructions. Indicate
hanger types, details and locations on installation drawings.
C. Trapeze bars, where provided, shall be installed as detailed on the approved installation
drawings
D. Hangers for Steel Pipe Sizes 1 to 8 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel ring; countersunk
threads with knurled swivel nut
E. Structural attachments shall be of a type appropriate for the building construction
3.3 CONTROL AND DRAIN VALVES
A. Grooved-end butterfly valve:
1.
Diameters 2-1/2” through 12 ”; Ductile iron body and disc, gear operator and tamper
switch with two SPDT switches rated at 10 amps @ 125 or 250 VAC/60 Hz; 0.50 amps
@ 125 VDC; 0.25 amps @ 250 VDC.
2.
Supervised open or closed depending on application.
3.
Design make is Victaulic FireLock Series 705, Series 705C (for supervision in closed
position)
4.
Acceptable manufacturers: Victaulic, Nibco, Kennedy
B. Outside Screw and Yoke (OS&Y) gate valve: Diameters 2-1/2” through 12” (where specified)
1.
Flanged ends; ductile iron body resilient wedge; epoxy coated interior and exterior; pregrooved stem for supervisory switch; right hand (clockwise) rotation to close.
2.
Design equipment is Nibco F-607-RW
3.
Acceptable manufacturers: Nibco, Kennedy, Mueller Company
C. Drain valves: Diameters 1/2 in. through 2 in: Threaded end ball valve with brass body and
ball; carbon steel handle. Design make is Victaulic Series 722.
D. Check valves: Diameters 2-1/2 in. through 12 in.; Ductile iron body, spring loaded clapper,
stainless steel seat ring, EPDM grade “E” clapper seal facing. Install in vertical flow up or
horizontal orientation. Design make is Victaulic FireLock Series 717.
3.4 SPRINKLERS
A. Upright
1.
Quick response upright with glass bulb, ordinary temperature rating except follow NFPA
13 when heat sources are present. Use in spaces with no ceilings and exposed
sprinkler piping where indicated on drawings.
2.
Finish: Standard brass or chrome plated.
3.
Design make: Reliable F1FR, quick response, K= 5.6
4.
Manufacturers: Tyco, Reliable, Viking, or accepted equal
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1310- 4
FIRE SUPPRESSION DRY PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
3.5 ALARM AND SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
A. Water Flow Alarm Pressure Switch: Bellows type switch for actuation upon pressure change;
two (2) SPDT contacts rated at 10.0 Amp @ 125/250 VAC and 2.5 Amp @ 6/12/24 VDC;
NEMA 4 enclosure. No time delay permitted. Design equipment: System Sensor EPS10-2.
B. OS&Y Valve Tamper Switch: Two sets of SPDT (Form C) 10.0 A @ 125/250VAC; 2.5 @
6/12/24VDC; NEMA 3R enclosure; adjusted to operate within two revolutions of the valve
control or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal
position. Design equipment: System Sensor OSY-2.
C. Low Air Pressure Supervisory Switch: Bellows type switch for actuation upon pressure
decrease; two (2) SPDT contacts rated at 10.0 Amp @ 125/250 VAC and 2.5 Amp @ 6/12/24
VDC; NEMA 4 enclosure. No time delay permitted. Design equipment: System Sensor
EPS40-2.
3.6 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. Type: wall type where indicated on drawings.
1.
Two-way type with double clapper; cast brass body with polished brass finish; 2-1/2 in. x
2-1/2 in NST x 4 in. female NPT with caps and chains; automatic ball drip assembly;
escutcheon labeled “AUTO SPKR”.
2.
Design make: Potter-Roemer Model 5721
3.
Manufacturer: Croker, Elkhart, Potter-Roemer or approved equal.
Label: Provide at fire department connection a minimum 18” by 18” reflective diagrammatic sign
meeting NFPA 170 requirements for sprinkler system
3.7 DRY PIPE VALVE ASSEMBLY
A. 6 in. diameter, low pressure differential type valve with pressure maintenance device; water
motor gong and alarm line trim; air and water pressure gauges; externally resettable; vertical
installation; grooved inlet and outlet. Provide riser-mounted accelerator where required to
meet water delivery time required by NFPA 13.
B. Comply with manufacturer’s air pressure setting specifications based on the maximum static
water supply (including jockey pump pressure where applicable)
C. Design equipment: Reliable Model DDX-LP with Model LP Actuator, Model A-2 air
maintenance device, Model C mechanical water motor gong and Model B-1 accelerator
where required.
3.8 AIR COMPRESSOR
A. The specified air compressor is based on the low pressure dry pipe valve assembly specified
above and a 750-1,000 gallon dry pipe system capacity.
B. Tank mounted air compressor; 4.8 cfm @ 20 psi, 0.75 hp; 120VAC, 60Hz, single phase
motor; 20 gallon tank
C. Riser mounted air compressor is not permitted
D. Design equipment: Gast 5LCA-46T-M550GX
PART 4.0 - EXECUTION
4.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or to
allow full swing of fire department wrench handle.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1310- 5
FIRE SUPPRESSION DRY PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
B. All sprinkler systems shall be arranged for flushing. Provide readily removable fittings at the
end of all cross mains. All cross mains shall terminate in 1¼ in. or larger pipe. All branch
lines on gridded systems shall be arranged to facilitate flushing.
C. Provide horizontal sidewall sprinklers underneath overhead doors in the open position
D. Provide sprinkler underneath ductwork, open-grate floors and other fixed obstructions wider
than 4 ft. Avoid interferences with cranes and crane rails.
E. Install dry pendent sprinklers in the side outlet of a tee fitting only
F. Pitch dry system piping a minimum of ¼” in 10-0 for mains and ½” in 10-0 for branch lines.
Working plans shall indicate threaded rod cut lengths and pipe elevations to demonstrate
adequate pitch. Each pipe shall be field checked to confirm adequate pitch. Make field
adjustments as needed.
G. Where adequate pitch cannot be provided due to structural or architectural conditions,
provide a drum drip drain terminating at an accessible, heated space.
H. All main and sectional system control valves, including water supply control valves, shall
have a sign indicating the portion of the system that is controlled by the valve.
I.
All control, drain, and test connection valves shall be provided with signs indicating their
purpose.
J.
Where a main or section control valve is located in a closed room or concealed space, the
location of the valve shall be indicated by a sign in an approved location on the outside of the
door or near the opening to the concealed space.
K. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
L. Install piping in concealed spaces above removable finished ceilings (e.g., acoustical ceiling
tiles). Exposed piping is permitted only in spaces with no ceilings or where otherwise
specified.
M. Provide guards for sprinklers where such sprinklers are subject to mechanical damage or are
located less than 7-0 above finished floor heads. Guards shall be listed, supplied, and
approved for use with the sprinkler by the sprinkler manufacturer (does not apply sprinklers
such as residential or extended coverage).
N. Riser nipples or “sprigs” to upright sprinklers shall contain no fittings between the branch line
tee and the reducing coupling at the sprinkler. Riser nipples exceeding 30 inches in length
shall be individually supported.
O. Auxiliary drains shall be provided where a change in piping direction prevents drainage of
system piping through the main drain valve.
1.
Where the capacity of isolated trapped sections of pipe is 50 gallons or more, the
auxiliary drain shall consist of a valve not smaller than 1”, accessibly located (no more
than 7 feet above finished floor).
2.
Where the capacity of isolated trapped sections of pipe is more than 5 gallons and less
than 50 gallons, the auxiliary drain shall consist of a valve ¾” or larger and a plug or
nipple and cap.
P. Alarm Devices:
1.
Flow switches: Connect each waterflow alarm switch to dedicated alarm zone or address
on the building fire alarm control unit. Grouping of waterflow alarm switches on a
common initiating device circuit is not permitted.
2.
Valve tamper switches: Up to five valve tamper switches in the same room may be
connected to a single conventional supervisory zone on the fire alarm control unit. On
addressable fire alarm systems, provide each tamper switch with a unique addressable
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1310- 6
FIRE SUPPRESSION DRY PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
point.
3.
High/low air pressure supervisory switch: Connect each switch to dedicated alarm zone
or address on the building fire alarm control unit. Grouping of switches on a common
initiating device circuit is not permitted.
Q. Hangers
1.
Furnish and install sufficient hangers, supports, beam clamps, clips, inserts, and
mounting devices to support all piping
2.
Hangers shall be installed and located in accordance with NFPA 13 and manufacturers’
listings
3.
Hangers shall be secured directly to the building structure
4.
Trapeze bars, where provided, shall be installed as detailed on the shop drawings
5.
Provide additional hangers where necessary to prevent sagging of pipe and
accumulation of water
4.2 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Final Acceptance/Commissioning Test: The system will be accepted only after satisfactory
test of the entire system has been accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
notify the owner’s representative in writing 72 hours prior to the commencement of testing.
Failure to contact the above party will require the Contractor to conduct tests a second time
at the Contractor’s expense in the presence of the above parties.
B. The main drain valve shall be opened and remain open until the system pressure stabilizes.
Static and residual pressures shall be recorded.
4.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Verify alarm and supervisory signal devices are installed and connected to fire alarm system.
Confirm signal transmission to the supervising station.
4.4 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply metal foil to protect sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons from painting
overspray. Remove after painting. Replace inadvertently painted sprinklers with new.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
21 1310- 7
FIRE SUPPRESSION DRY PIPE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
SECTION 22 11 13 - WATER SERVICE PIPING
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes water service piping and appurtenances from the source of potable
water to a point 5 feet outside the building.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
Division 3120000 Section "Earthwork" for excavation and backfill required for water
service piping and structures.
2.
Division "Water Distribution Piping" for interior building water piping systems and
equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Record drawings at project closeout of installed water service piping and products in
accordance with requirements of Division 1.
B.
Maintenance data for valves and water meter, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance
Manuals specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout."
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water to the project.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2.
Protect valves against damage to threaded ends, flange faces, and weld ends.
3.
Set valves in best position for handling. Set gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
B.
Storage: Use the following precautions for valves during storage:
1.
Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.
2.
Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve temperature higher
than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, support valves
off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
221113- 1
WATERLINES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
C.
1.7
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Handling: Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig
valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use hand wheels or stems as lifting or
rigging points.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.
Verify that water service piping may be installed in compliance with the original design and referenced
standards.
1.8
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate connection to public water main with utility company.
B.
Coordinate with interior water distribution piping.
A.
Coordinate with other utility work.
PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
B.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the following:
C.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
1.9
Gate Valves:
a.
American Darling Valve; Div. of American Cast Iron Pipe Co.
b.
Clow Valve Co.; Div. of McWane, Inc.
c.
Hammond Valve Corp.
d.
Kennedy Valve; Div. of McWane, Inc.
e.
Mueller-Hersey; a Grinnell Co.
f.
U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co.
g.
Waterous Co.
Underground Warning Tapes:
a.
Carlton Industries, Inc.
b.
Seton Name Plate Co.
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS, GENERAL
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
221113 - 2
WATERLINES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
A.
Pipe and pipe fitting materials shall be compatible with each other. Where more than one
type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option.
B.
Ductile-Iron Pipe 4 Inches and Larger: AWWA C151, Class 50, except that pipe smaller than
6-inch size shall be Class 51.
1.
Lining: AWWA C104, cement mortar, sealcoated.
2.
Gaskets: AWWA C111.
3.
Ductile-Iron and Cast-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile-iron or cast-iron, 250-psi
pressure rating; or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact fittings, 350-psi pressure rating.
4.
C.
a.
Lining: AWWA C104, cement mortar.
b.
Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
Encasement: AWWA C105, polyethylene film tube.
PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe 4 Inches and Larger: AWWA C900; Class 150; with bell end
and elastomeric gasket, with plain end for cast-iron or ductile-iron fittings, or with plain end
for PVC elastomeric gasket fittings.
1.
Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
2.
PVC Couplings and Fittings: AWWA C900, with ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal gaskets.
3.
Ductile-Iron and Cast-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile-iron or cast-iron, 250-psi
pressure rating; or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact fittings, 350-psi pressure rating;
of dimension to match pipe outside diameter.
D.
1.10
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
a.
Lining: AWWA C104, cement mortar.
b.
Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be
joined.
1.
Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.
2.
Followers: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.
3.
Gaskets: Rubber.
4.
Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5.
Finish: Enamel paint.
VALVES
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
221113 - 3
WATERLINES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
1.11
1.12
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
A.
Nonrising Stem Gate Valves 3 Inches and Larger: AWWA C500, cast-iron double disc,
bronze disc and seat rings, or AWWA C509, resilient seated; bronze stem, cast-iron or
ductile-iron body and bonnet, stem nut, 200-psi working pressure, mechanical joint ends.
B.
Valve Boxes: Cast-iron box having top section and cover with lettering "WATER," bottom
section with base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches in diameter, and
adjustable cast-iron extension of length required for depth of bury of valve.
C.
Provide a steel tee-handle operating wrench with each valve box. Wrench shall have tee
handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate valve, and socket fitting valve
operating nut.
ANCHORAGES
A.
Clamps, Straps, and Washers: ASTM A 506, steel.
B.
Rods: ASTM A 575, steel.
C.
Rod Couplings: ASTM A 197, malleable iron.
D.
Bolts: ASTM A 307, steel.
E
Cast-Iron Washers: ASTM A 126, gray iron.
F.
Concrete Reaction Backing: Portland cement concrete mix, 3000 psi.
G.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
1.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
2.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
3.
Water: Potable.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Metallic-Lined Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic
core, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in
black letters "CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW."
2 - EXECUTION
2.1
PREPARATION OF BURIED PIPE FOUNDATION
A.
Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock-free foundation throughout
the length of the piping.
B.
Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid
and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level.
C.
Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill.
Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads and to ensure continuous
bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
221113 - 4
WATERLINES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
2.2
INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Ductile-Iron Pipe: Install with cement-mortar-lined, ductile-iron or cast-iron, mechanical
joint or push-on joint fittings and rubber gaskets in accordance with AWWA C600.
1.
2.3
Polyethylene Encasement: Install in accordance with AWWA C105.
B.
PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe: Install with cement-mortar-lined, ductile-iron or cast-iron,
mechanical joint or push-on joint fittings and rubber gaskets in accordance with
AWWA M23.
C.
Depth of Cover: Provide minimum cover over piping of 12 inches below average local frost
depth or 60 inches below finished grade, whichever is greater.
D.
Water Main Connection: Arrange and pay for tap in water main, of size and in location as
indicated, from water utility.
E.
Water Service Termination: Terminate water service piping 5'-0" from building foundation in
location and invert as indicated. Provide temporary pipe plug for piping extension into
building.
F.
Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, by
tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both.
INSTALLATION OF VALVES
A.
General Application: Use mechanical joint end valves for 3-inch and larger buried
installation. Use threaded and flanged end valves for installation in pits and inside building.
Use bronze corporation stops and valves, with ends compatible to piping, for 2-inch and
smaller installation.
1.
2.4
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
AWWA-Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried valves with stem
pointing up and with cast-iron valve box.
INSTALLATION OF ANCHORAGES
Anchorages: Provide anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches.
2.5
APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE COATINGS
Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-retarding material to surfaces of installed ferrous
anchorage devices.
2.6
INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION
A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back-filling of trench for underground
water service piping. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly over piping.
2.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
221113 - 5
WATERLINES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
A.
Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have
sufficiently hardened. Fill pipeline 24 hours prior to testing and apply test pressure to
stabilize system. Use only potable water.
B.
Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours.
1.
2.8
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Increase pressure in 50-psi increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold
at test pressure for one hour; decrease to 0 psi. Slowly increase again to test pressure and
hold for one more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints.
Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within above
limits.
CLEANING
A.
Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:
1.
Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have
been altered, extended, or repaired, prior to use.
2.
Use the purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the authority having
jurisdiction or, in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, use the procedure
described in AWWA C651, or as described below:
a.
Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at least
50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part thereof
and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b.
Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a
water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and
isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
c.
Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable water
until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.
d.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction.
Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the authority shows
evidence of contamination.
e.
Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities.
END OF SECTION 22 11 13
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
221113 - 6
WATERLINES
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 312000
EARTHMOVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
Furnish all labor, material and equipment necessary to complete all site earthwork, as shown
and specified, including but not limited to the following:
1. Excavation, filling, grading and subgrade preparation for building slabs, walks and
pavements.
2. Excavation, trenching and backfilling for all structures, foundations, exterior and interior
utilities and other improvements.
3. Disposal of all excess and waste materials (including oil contaminated soils).
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Subsurface Data Logs - See Bidding Requirements.
2. Testing Laboratory Services - See Section 014100.
3. Site Clearing and Preparation - See Section 311000.
4. Excavation and Rough Grade Backfill for Mechanical Work - See Respective Division.
6. Excavation and Rough Grade Backfill for Electrical Work - See Respective Division.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. State and Federal Code requirements shall control the disposal of waste materials and
contaminated soils, if encountered.
1.03 STANDARDS
A. Comply with the State Department of Transportation Standards except as otherwise specified
herein.
B. Comply with State and Local Environmental Standards as specified herein.
1.04 COOPERATION
A. Examine Drawings and specifications for all Contracts, to determine nature of proposed
construction. Perform work to conform with construction called for in such a manner as not to
interfere or delay work of other Contractors.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Test borings have been made by Owner at the locations shown. The approximate character of
the encountered subsoils and depths of various strata, as disclosed by the borings, are shown
on the enclosed boring logs. This data is included as general information only and the Owner
does not guarantee that conditions differing greatly from those disclosed by the borings will not
be encountered at other points on the site.
B. A Geotechnical Report has been prepared by the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer and is
available, upon request, from the Owner.
C. As shown on the site drawings, below grade obstructions consisting of previous building
foundations, walls, slabs, storage tanks, pits and utility appurtenances are assumed to exist
across the proposed building site. The exact quantity, size, location and elevation of existing
below grade obstructions to be demolished and removed are unknown. The information
provided on the Contract Documents is approximate and is to be used only as a guide during
the bidding phase and demolition operations. The Owner/Architect assumes no responsibility
for the accuracy or completeness of the Geotechnical Investigation. If actual below grade
conditions vary from information shown on the Contract Documents, notify the Architect or
Owner's field representative immediately for additional information or direction. Continue with
excavation only after receiving a written notice to proceed.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
312000 - 1
EARTHMOVING
D. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted below grade obstructions, rubble, existing building
foundations, fill, or deleterious (organic) materials be encountered during excavation, notify the
Architect or Owner's field representative immediately for additional information or direction.
1.06 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Locate existing underground utilities in the area of work.
B. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during
excavation, consult the Architect/Engineer immediately for direction.
C. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied or used by the Owner or others
except when a temporary utility plan is provided by the Architect.
D. Provide adequate protection for aerial or underground utility lines noted to remain.
E. Demolish and dispose of existing underground utilities indicated to be removed and plug open
ends with concrete. Coordinate with utility owners for shut-off of services if lines are active.
F. Repair damaged utility lines to the satisfaction of the utility owner.
1.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect the excavation and/or exposed building walls and foundations from frost and freezing
until concrete work can be performed.
B. Protect existing structures and site features noted to remain against damage during all
sequences of construction.
C. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights.
Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required.
D. In case of any damage or injury caused in the performance of this work, the Contractor shall, at
his own expense, make good such damage or injury to the satisfaction of the Owner. Existing
roads, walks, curbs and buildings damaged during project work shall be repaired or replaced to
their original condition at the commencement of operations.
1.08 INSPECTION, TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL
A. A Soils Testing Agency will be employed by the Owner for quality control, testing and
inspection of work and materials during earthwork operations.
B. The service of this testing agency is intended for the Owner's verification and shall in no way
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to be in compliance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents and to provide his own inspection and quality control.
C. The following minimum tests shall be made. ASTM Designations specified refer to the latest
publication.
1. Existing Subgrades
a. Field verification of proofrolled subgrades.
2. Borrow Materials
a. Particle Size Analysis, ASTM C-117.
b. Maximum Density and Optimum Moisture Content, ASTM D-1557 or Relative Density,
ASTM D-4253 or ASTM D-4254.
c. Plasticity Index, ASTM D-4318.
d. Frost Susceptibility Analysis.
3. Compacted Fill Materials
a. In Place Density, ASTM D-1556 (sand cone) or ASTM D-2922 (nuclear).
b. Moisture Content, ASTM D-2216.
D. All tests on borrow materials shall be performed before acceptance and delivery of fill to the
site. Any change in the source of material or change in quality of the material will require a new
series of tests to determine acceptability.
E. Delivery and compaction of fill material shall be made during the presence of the Soils Testing
Agency and shall be subject to their approval. This inspection by no means absolves the
Contractor from responsibility of compaction as specified.
F. Acceptance and rejection of fill placed in accordance with 95%, and 90% (as specified) of
maximum density attainable by the Modified Proctor Method of Compaction (ASTM D-1557)
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
312000 - 2
EARTHMOVING
shall be based upon the following in place density test result requirements for each lift, and all
other requirements as stated in the Specifications.
1. Requirements for 95% of Maximum Density (ASTM D-1557). The results of all in place
density tests must meet the following requirements.
a. The average of any three consecutive tests shall be equal to, or greater than, 95% of
the maximum density.
b. No more than one in four consecutive tests shall be less than 95% of the maximum
density.
c. No test result shall be less than 94.0% of the maximum density.
2. Requirements for 90% of the Maximum Density (ASTM D-1557). The results of all in
place density tests must be greater than or equal to 90% of the maximum density.
G. An alternative appropriate density test procedure shall be determined by the Soils Testing
Agency to obtain the maximum density where material gradations do not permit use of ASTM
D-1557 to determine the maximum density requirement will be based.
H. All earthwork shall be performed by personnel experienced in these operations. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to provide such personnel.
1.09 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports - Soils Testing Agency:
Submit reports for all earthwork inspections and tests. Furnish three (3) copies directly to the
Architect, one (1) copy to the Contractor, and any others as indicated.
B. Submit evidence to the Architect/Engineer that the borrow material supplier is certified to
produce fill material which conforms to the New York State Department of Transportation
(NYSDOT).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General Fill:
1. Satisfactory soil materials including sand, gravel, friable earth or clays of low plasticity,
free of organic materials, frozen material, trash, masonry, rubble, concrete, debris and
free of stones having a dimension of 4-inches or greater.
B. Concrete Sand:
1. Comply with NYSDOT Item 703-07. Slag not permitted.
2. Clean, sharp, well-graded, free from clay, free draining sand with the following gradation
requirements:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
3/8"
No. 4
No. 8
No. 16
No. 30
No. 50
No. 100
No. 200
100
90 - 100
75 - 100
50 - 85
25 - 60
10 - 30
1 - 10
0-3
C. Gravel:
1. Comply with NYSDOT Item 703-02, Type 1. Slag not permitted.
2. Clean, hard, sound, durable, uniform in quality, and free from any organic or deleterious
materials, with the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
1"
1/2"
1/4"
100
90 - 100
0 - 15
D. Structural Fill:
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
312000 - 3
EARTHMOVING
1.
2.
Comply with NYSDOT Item 304-2.02, Type 2 or Type 4. Slag not permitted.
Clean, hard, sound, durable, uniform in quality, and free from any organic or deleterious
materials, with the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
2"
1/4"
No. 40
No. 200
100
25 - 60
5 - 40
0 - 10
E. Suitable Granular Fill
1. Well graded from coarse to fine and classified as GW, GP, GM, SW, SP and SM soils
using the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487) and having no more than 85percent by weight material passing the No. 4 sieve, no more than 20- percent by weight
material passing the No. 200 sieve and which is generally free of particles greater than 6
inches, will be acceptable as Suitable Granular Fill. It should also be free of topsoil,
asphalt, concrete rubble, wood, debris, clay and other deleterious materials. Suitable
Granular Fill can be used as foundation backfill and as subgrade fill to raise site grades or
backfill beneath slab-on-grade and pavement construction.
2. Material meeting the requirements of New York State Department of Transportation,
Standard Specifications, Item 203.07 – Select Granular Fill is acceptable for use as
Suitable Granular Fill.
F. Crushed Stone:
1. Comply with NYSDOT 703-02.
2. Crushed stone or washed crushed gravel, hard, sound, durable, uniform in quality and
free of any detrimental quantity of soft, friable, thin, elongated or laminated pieces,
disintegrated material, organic matter, oil alkali or deleterious substances.
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
1-1/2"
1"
1/2"
No. 4
No. 8
100
90 - 100
25 - 60
0 - 10
0-5
G. Non-Frost Susceptible Material:
1. Well graded granular material with a maximum diameter of 2-inches and with less than
5% passing a No. 200 sieve.
H. Woven Geotextile Fabric:
1. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide one (1) of the following:
a. Terratex GS
b. Exxon GTF 200
c. Mirafi 500X
d. Amoco 2002
I.
J.
Non-Woven Geotextile Fabric:
1. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide one (1) of the following:
a. Terratex SD
b. Exxon GTF 130D
c. Mirafi 140N
d. Amoco 4545
e. Typar 3401
Topsoil:
1. Furnish all topsoil required to complete the project.
2. Topsoil shall be natural, fertile, friable granular soil characteristic of productive soils in the
vicinity, uniform in composition and texture, free from subsoil, clay lumps, stones, organic
material, toxic or hazardous substances, and any material two inches or more in greatest
dimension.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
312000 - 4
EARTHMOVING
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Excavate for proper placing of required work to elevations and dimensions indicated, plus
sufficient space to permit erection of forms, shoring, drain tile, and the inspection of
foundations. Contact pertinent utility company before excavating near underground lines.
B. Excavated materials are assumed to be earth and other materials that can be removed with
power shovel, except where rock is indicated.
C. Rock is defined as any material which cannot be dislodged and excavated with modern trackmounted heavy-duty excavating equipment equipped with a 2-3/8 cubic yard bucket and
appropriately sized "Ho-Ram" and without drilling, blasting or ripping. Typical of materials
classified as rock are boulders 1/2 cubic yard or more in volume, and solid cementitious
aggregate deposits.
D. Do not perform rock excavation work until material to be excavated has been cross-sectioned
and classified by the Soils Testing Agency. Such excavation will be paid on basis of unit prices
as listed in the Bid Form.
E. Rock payment lines are limited to the following:
1. Two feet outside of concrete work for which forms are required, except footings.
2. One foot outside the perimeter and 4" below the bottom of footings.
3. In pipe trenches, 6" below invert elevation (or as indicated) of pipe and 2 feet wider that
the indicated width but not less than 3 feet minimum trench width.
4. Outside dimensions of concrete work where no forms are required.
5. Under slabs on grade, 6" below bottom of concrete slab.
F. The cost of any indicated rock removal shall be included in the base bid. For any additional
rock removal required, but not indicated, the Contract will be adjusted by change order in
accordance with unit prices submitted, or by negotiations as directed. Additional rock removal
will be paid for on the line of the foundation or utility trenches as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
G. The use of explosives is not permitted.
H. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade
elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Architect or the Soils Testing Agency.
Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Architect or Soils Testing
Agency, shall be at the Contractors expense.
I.
Unauthorized excavations below foundations and grade beams may be brought to proper
position by the use of lean concrete or approved compacted fill material.
3.02 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS
A. Slope sides of excavations are to comply with the local codes, ordinances and requirements of
agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and/or brace where sloping is not possible because of
space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations
in safe condition until completion of backfilling.
B. Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, up-rights, stringers, and cross
braces, as required. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period
excavations will remain open. Extend shoring and bracing as excavation progresses.
3.03 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and subsurface ground water from flowing into excavations and from
flooding project site and surrounding area.
B. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of
foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of
subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and
discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away
from excavations.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
312000 - 5
EARTHMOVING
C. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation
limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas.
Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
3.04 EXCAVATION FOR BUILDING FOUNDATIONS AND SLABS ON GRADE
A. Prior to the start of excavation for foundations or filling for the slab on grade subbase, the
exposed surface soil must be proofrolled, with a minimum 10-ton static roller, in the presence of
the Soils Testing Agency. Where uncontrolled fill, soft, loose or yielded material exists, these
areas must be undercut a minimum of 2'-0". Testing and inspection of the undercut subgrade,
by the Soils Testing Agency, may require further undercutting on some areas, depending on
the type and nature of fill/unsuitable material exposed.
B. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10', and
extend a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of
concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection.
D. Take care in excavating not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand, if necessary, to
final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and
grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
E. Excavation for foundations must proceed, as a minimum, to the limits shown on the drawings.
Any wet, soft, or unsuitable materials shall be undercut until the soil stabilizes or in accordance
with the details shown on the drawings. Replace any undercut areas with approved compacted
fill.
G. The subgrade surface of all foundations and slabs on grade shall be level and clean, free of
loose rock, dirt, debris, standing water, frost or ice, prior to acceptance for casting concrete.
3.05 EXCAVATION FOR PAVED AREAS
A. Excavate below paved areas to comply with cross-sections, elevations, and grades as
indicated.
B. Where uncontrolled fill, soft, loose or yielded material exists, these areas must be undercut a
minimum of 2'-0". Further undercut any areas which do not stabilize and replace with approved
compacted fill.
3.06 EXCAVATION FOR TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed, sufficiently
wide to provide ample working room. Provide 1'-0" minimum clearance on both sides of pipe or
conduit, but not less than 3'-0" total trench width.
B. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to
establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations.
C. Where rock is encountered, carry excavations 6" below required elevation and backfill with a
layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe.
D. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching to provide solid bearing for entire body of
pipe.
E. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized
by the Architect/Engineer. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe
systems.
3.07 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE AND EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. Remove from site and dispose of excavated material unsuitable for fill and/or backfill.
B. Place excess excavated materials, suitable for fill and/or backfill, on site where directed.
C. Remove from site and dispose of any excess excavated materials after all fill and backfill
operations have been completed.
3.08 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT
A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to select, furnish, and properly maintain equipment,
which will compact the subgrade and fill uniformly to the required density.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
312000 - 6
EARTHMOVING
B. The Contractor shall have at the site, at all times during earthwork operations, a smooth steel
wheel roller, with a rated capacity of at least 10 tons, which shall be used to seal the surface of
the fill at the close of each working day to prevent infiltration of precipitation and surface water
into the fill material.
C. Excavation to final subgrade shall not proceed and fill shall not be placed until approved
compaction equipment is on the site and in working condition.
3.09 PROTECTION OF SUBGRADES
A. Contractors will take every precaution during final stages of excavation to prevent disturbance
of the natural soil at proposed subgrade elevations. Such precautions shall include, but not be
limited to, keeping equipment off final subgrade during the last several feet of excavation, using
excavating buckets without teeth, placing concrete mud mats below foundations and
dewatering excavations.
B. Additional excavations, undercutting and/or backfilling operations resulting from failure to
properly protect approved subgrades shall be done at the expense of the Contractor.
3.10 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC INSTALLATION
A. All subgrades must be tested and approved by the Soils Testing Agency before installation of
geotextile fabric.
B. Above the prepared subgrade surface place a geotextile separation and strength fabric and a
minimum 12-inch thick select granular base cover.
3.11 FILLING AND BACKFILLING
A. Preparation:
1. All subgrades must be tested and approved by the Soils Testing Agency before placing fill
and/or backfill. Do not backfill against foundation walls until tested and approved by the
Soils Testing Agency.
2. Remove all debris from excavations before placing fill and/or backfill.
B. Use of Materials:
1. General Fill
a. Fill and backfill exterior side of site structures to subgrade where no slab on grade, no
pavement, and no foundation drains occur.
b. Site fill where no pavement occurs.
c. Fill and backfill to subgrade at site trenches where no slab on grade or pavement
occurs.
d. Fill and backfill to subgrade where demolition is required and no building or pavement
occurs. In addition to earth fill, block, brick, stone and concrete not exceeding 1 cu. ft.
per unit may be used if kept a minimum of 12" below finished subgrade.
e. Fill and backfill in areas not specified on drawings.
2. Concrete Sand
a. Bedding as detailed for mechanical and electrical utility trenches.
b. Backfill above foundation drains as detailed on plan.
c. For use in Biobed filter media
3. Gravel
a. Backfill at site trenches where pavement occurs.
4. Structural Fill
a. Fill and backfill beneath foundations (minimum of 6" required) or substitution of a lean
concrete "mud" mat as approved by the Architect/Engineer.
b. Fill and backfill building walls and site structures to subgrade where no footing drains
occur. Material to extend 24" beyond edge of asphalt pavement and 6" beyond edge
of concrete pavement.
c. Subbase material specified for slab on grade construction and pavement.
d. Select backfill at site trenches where pavement occurs.
5. Suitable Granular Fill
a. Fill beneath slab on grade subbase material within footprint of existing crawl space.
6. Crushed Stone
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
312000 - 7
EARTHMOVING
7.
8.
a. Surround foundation pipe with filter material, minimum 12" around pipe, wrapped with
soil separator, minimum 12" overlap at top.
Non-frost susceptible material
a. As required on structural drawings.
The Contractor may propose alternate materials with similar engineering properties for
consideration by Architect/Engineer. Such materials shall be proposed only where
substitution results in a credit to the Owner.
C. Placement of Fill Materials:
1. Backfill excavations and place fill after areas have been tested and approved by Soils
Testing Agency.
2. Do not place any fill material when the fill, the previous lift of fill, or the subgrade on which
it is to be placed is frozen. In the event that any fill which has been placed or the
subgrade becomes frozen, it shall be scarified, as required to break up the frozen
material, and recompacted or removed to the satisfaction of the Soils Testing Agency.
Any soft areas resulting from frost shall be recompacted or removed to the satisfaction of
the Soils Testing Agency.
3. Open areas - The fill shall be spread evenly by mechanical or manual means, in
approximately horizontal layers of six (6) to eight (8) inches maximum loose thickness.
4. Limited access - Where large compaction equipment cannot work, the fill material shall be
placed in neatly horizontal layers, having a maximum loose thickness of four (4) to six (6)
inches.
5. Underslab fill and backfill shall be placed and compacted before installation of underfloor
mechanical lines. Underslab subbase material shall be installed after underslab
mechanical lines have been installed, backfilled, and compacted.
6. At the time of compaction, the material in each layer of fill shall have moisture content
within +/-2 percent of optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D-1557. If, in the
opinion of the Soils Testing Agency, the fill material is too wet, the fill shall be dried by a
method approved by the Soils Testing Agency prior to commencing or continuing the
compaction operation. If, in the opinion of the Soils Testing Agency, the fill materials are
too dry for proper compaction, the fill shall be moistened by a method approved by the
Soils Testing Agency prior to commencing or continuing the compaction operation.
7. Avoid routing of construction equipment, including loaded trucks, over approved subgrade
or compacted areas.
D. Compaction of Fill:
1. Uniformly spread each layer, moisten or dry as required for optimum moisture content,
and then compact so density of the compacted material meets or exceeds the specified
percentages below.
Percentage of
Maximum Dry Density
Location
95
Above foundations, and below
slab on grade construction pavement
90
Non-loaded grassed areas, as shown.
2. Any lift, or portion thereof, which is not compacted in accordance with Specifications shall
be recompacted or removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Soils Testing Agency.
The degree of compaction of each lift shall be checked by the Soils Testing Agency, and
each successive lift shall not be placed, or compacted, until the previous lift is tested and
approved by the Soils Testing Agency. This fill is to be compacted to the lines and grades
specified.
3.12 ROUGH GRADING
A. Subgrade - Depth below finished grade as required for building construction, topsoil, or
pavement.
B. Accuracy - Set grade stakes where spot elevations are shown, at breaks in grade, along
drainage "swales" and as otherwise required to correctly grade the area according to elevations
shown on plans. Maximum spacing of stakes to be 50 feet on center.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
312000 - 8
EARTHMOVING
C. Grade not otherwise indicated shall be uniform levels or slopes between points where
elevations are given or between such points and existing finished grades. Abrupt changes in
slopes shall be rounded. All new grades, other than grades for paved areas, to be within plus
or minus 0.50" of grades indicated on Drawings or in Specifications.
D. Grade for paved areas, both subgrade and base courses, to be plus or minus 0.25" of indicated
grades.
3.13 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
Some locations of the site may warrant special consideration due to the presence of unknown
below grade obstructions. Such conditions must be brought to the attention of the
Architect/Engineer for evaluation, before work progresses.
3.14 SETTLEMENT
Repair to proper grade any settlement of slab, pavement, utility, structure, or lawn, adversely
affected by settlement, within one year after final acceptance at no expense to the Owner.
PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 Excavation and backfill requested by the Architect or Soils Testing Agency to remove deficient or
deleterious materials below specified grades shall be paid for at the bid unit price per cubic yard measured in place. Such payment shall be full compensation for excavation, disposal and
compaction of backfill.
4.02 Extraordinary trucking and disposal costs of oil contaminated soil will be paid for in accordance with
the "Extra Work" provisions of the Contract. Disposal site and licensed hauling subcontractor shall
be subject to the specific approval of the Owner. No extra compensation will be made for
stockpiling or special loading required for disposal of oil-contaminated soil.
4.03 Rock excavation shall be paid for on the basis of unit prices as listed in the Bid Form. See Section
3.01 for rock pay limits.
4.04 Excavation, demolition and backfill requested by the Architect or Soils Testing Agency to remove
any existing below grade obstructions below specified grades, shall be paid for at the bid unit price
per cubic yard, measured in place. Such payment shall be full compensation for excavation,
demolition, disposal and compaction of backfill.
4.05 All other work in this section shall be paid for as a lump sum included in base bid.
END OF SECTION
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
312000 - 9
EARTHMOVING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Companies
SECTION 316216
STEEL PILES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes driven foundation pilings.
B. Types of driven piles include the following:
1.
2.
Structural Steel H-section.
Structural Steel Pipe section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.
Report for each load-bearing test within 2 days after completion of test.
C.
Driving records of each pile to Architect not later than 2 days after driving. Include the following
data:
1.
Project name and number.
2.
Name of Contractor.
3.
Pile location and number.
4.
Computed pile capacity.
5.
Type and size of hammer used.
6.
Type of pile driving cap used.
7.
Rate of operation of pile driving equipment.
8.
Pile dimensions.
9.
Elevation of point.
10.
Elevation of butt before and after cut-off.
11.
Ground elevation.
12.
Record of number of blows for each foot of penetration.
13.
Pile deviation.
14.
Pile uplift and reaction.
15.
Unusual occurrences during pile driving.
D.
Submit records which have been compiled and attested to by a registered professional engineer.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Except for piles to be used for test purposes, materials ordered or delivered to Project site prior to
verification of assumed pile length, will be at Contractor's risk.
B.
After pile lengths are verified, deliver materials to Project site in such quantities and at such times
to ensure continuity of pile driving operations and adherence to project schedule.
C.
Store piles in orderly groups above ground and blocked to prevent distortion of members.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Site Information: Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or
warranties of continuity of such conditions. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be
responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn there from by Contractor. The data are
made available for convenience of Contractor.
B.
Protection: Protect structures, underground utilities, and other construction from damage caused
by pile driving operations. Pre-excavate for piles if required, as herein specified.
C.
Provide surveyed elevation bench marks on structures where directed by Architect before
commencing work when structures are within 10 feet of pile driving operations. Record and
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
31 6216 - 1
STEEL PILES
PROJECT NAME
DRIVEN PILES
report elevation of each bench mark after driving piles and at least twice a day while pile driving is
in progress. Should bench mark readings indicate displacement, halt driving operations until
corrective action has been provided and is acceptable to Architect.
1.06 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT
A.
Basis for Bids: Bids will be based on number and dimensions of piles indicated from point to
cut-off, plus not less than 1 ft. of overlength for cutting piles at required cut-off elevations.
B.
Basis for Payment: From the data obtained as a result of driving and loading test piles, calculate
actual total net length of piles used. Contract price per linear foot includes labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and incidentals and for performing work for furnishing, driving, cutting-off and capping
piles. This includes splicing and disposal of cut-offs.
C.
Measurements will be based on effective length of piles in place, with fractional lengths measured
to nearest foot. Payment for linear footage in excess of that indicated on drawings, and credit for
linear footage less than that indicated on drawings, shall be made at unit prices stated in the
Contract, based on net addition or deduction.
D.
Test piles that become part of completed foundation system will be considered as an integral part
of Work.
E.
No payment will be made for rejected piles including piles driven out of place, imperfect piles, or
piles damaged in driving or handling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL H-SECTION PILES
A.
Steel: Hot-rolled, carbon steel structural shapes and plates, complying with ASTM A 36.
B.
Fabrication: Provide splice plates, pile caps, and bottom plates of same basic steel as pile
sections. Fasten to H-piles with all-welded connections, as shown on drawings.
C.
Provide pile point reinforcement of same basic steel as pile sections. Weld web reinforcement
plates with a continuous fillet weld on top and bottom edge only; weld flange reinforcement
plates, angles, or shapes with a continuous fillet weld on edges unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 DRIVING EQUIPMENT
A.
General: Provide pile driving equipment of type generally used in standard pile driving practice,
operated at manufacturer's specified rate, to develop required rated energy per blow.
B.
Hammer: Provide pile driving hammers of sufficient capacity, size, and type to be able to deliver
consistently effective dynamic energy, suitable to piles to be driven and to subgrade material into
which they are to be driven, when operating at not more than 75 percent efficiency of rated driving
energy.
C.
Driving Caps: Equip hammer with cast steel or structural steel driving cap with grooved base
conforming to pile shape. Keep bearing surfaces of grooves true and smooth.
D.
Leads: Use fixed or rigid-type pile driver leads that will hold pile firmly in position and alignment,
and in axial alignment with hammer. Extend leads to within 2 ft. of elevation at which the pile
enters ground.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRELIMINARY WORK
A.
Site Conditions: Do not drive piles until earthwork in area in which piles are to be driven has been
completed, as follows:
1.
Excavations: Earth excavation will be stopped at an elevation of 6 to 12 inches above
bottom of footing before piles are driven. Final excavation of required elevation of footing
bottoms will be done as part of earthwork for buildings, after piles have been driven and
tested.
2.
Fills: Fills will be constructed and compacted to elevation of grade indicated.
B.
Pile Length Markings: Mark each pile length with horizontal line at 1-foot intervals, and the
number of feet from pile point at 5-foot intervals.
C.
Welded Splices: Clean surfaces to be welded of rust, scale, oil, paint, and foreign material. Use
only pile members with identical cross-sections for splicing.
02360-2
PROJECT NAME
D.
E.
F.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3.03
A.
DRIVEN PILES
Only one splice per pile will be permitted unless otherwise authorized by Architect. Make splices
before starting driving operations wherever possible. If a welded splice is required during driving
operation, make splice when top of driven pile is at least 3 feet above ground to permit inspection
of welded connection during welding and during subsequent driving.
Splices shall be 100 percent butt welded, producing straight pile alignment through splice and
developing full strength of pile in both bearing and bending.
Build-Ups: If it is determined during driving operations that a pile length will not be sufficient to
meet final cut-off elevation, fabricate cast-in-place reinforced concrete build-up to required
elevation.
1.
Minimum compressive strength not less than 5000 psi at 28 days.
2.
Payment for build-ups will be made in accordance with Contract provisions for changes in
Work.
DRIVING PILES
General: Continuously drive piles at locations indicated to required point elevation and driving
resistance established by driving and loading of test piles.
1.
Maintain center of gravity for each group or cluster of piles to conform to locations shown
on drawings.
2.
Plumb leads and pile before driving. Take care during driving to prevent, and to correct,
any tendency of piles to twist or rotate.
When high-resistant strata lying near the surface must be penetrated, spud piles may be used to
minimize hard driving of long piles during early stages of driving operations.
Driving Tolerances: Drive piles within following maximum tolerances:
1.
Location: 6 inches from location indicated for center of gravity of each single pile or pile
groups; 1 inch for piles under walls.
2.
Plumbness: Maintain 1 inch in 10 feet from vertical, or a maximum of 4 inches, measured
when the pile is above ground in leads.
3.
Batter Angle: Maximum 1 inch in 10 feet from required angle, measured when pile is
above ground in leads.
Pre-Excavating (Coring): Provide pre-excavated holes for piles driven within 15 feet of structures
or underground utilities, where located and to depths shown on drawings. Drill holes with a
diameter slightly less than largest cross-section dimension; exact size and depth as required to
produce satisfactory driving results.
Backfill voids between pile and pre-excavated hole using satisfactory soil materials.
Heaved Piles: Provide recorded instrument observations made during pile driving to determine
whether driven pile has lifted from its original seat during driving of adjacent piles. If uplift occurs,
redrive affected piles to point elevation at least as deep as original point elevation with a driving
resistance at least as great as original driving resistance.
Damaged or Misdriven Piles: Damaged piles and piles driven outside required driving tolerances
will not be accepted.
Withdraw piles rejected after driving and replace with new piles.
Drive additional pile or piles where centerline deviation exceeds 3 inches and redesign indicates
load on any pile exceeding 110 percent of design load.
Piles rejected after driving may be abandoned and cut-off and additional piles driven to replace
rejected units at designated locations.
Solidly fill spaces left by withdrawn piles that will not be filled by new piles using cohesionless soil
material such as gravel, broken stone, and gravel-sand mixtures. Place and compact throughout
length of space in lifts not exceeding 6 feet.
Cutting-Off: Cut-off tops of driven piles square with pile axis and at elevations indicated. Dispose
of excess materials off site.
Top Plates: After pile is cut off, weld top plates in place square and level.
WITHDRAWING AND REDRIVING PILES
Pile Withdrawal: Withdraw selected driven piles when directed by Architect to determine
condition of piles after driving.
02360-3
PROJECT NAME
B.
C.
D.
3.04
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
DRIVEN PILES
Redriving: Redrive piles withdrawn for test and inspection, unless damaged or found not meeting
specification requirements.
Withdrawing and redriving of piles found to be satisfactory will be paid for in accordance with
Contract provisions for changes in Work.
Replace rejected piles with new piles as specified under "Damaged or Misdriven Piles."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
In absence of specific information for soil conditions at site or information supplied by local
building department, make load tests to verify design pile lengths and loads. Provide complete
testing materials and equipment as required. Notify Architect in ample time before performing
tests.
Test piles, furnished and driven by Contractor to determine lengths of piles, may be located, cut
off, and become part of foundation system provided they conform to Contract requirements.
Test Piles Required:
1.
Provide 3 single test piles.
Driving Test Piles: Use test piles of same weight and section as required for Project and drive
with appropriate pile driving equipment operating at rated driving energy to be used in driving
permanent piles.
Drive test piles at locations indicated to a point elevation below final cut-off elevation equal to pile
length specified as basis of bid, or to refusal, whichever occurs first. Piles will be considered as
driven to refusal when 5 blows of hammer are required to produce a total penetration of 1/4 inch
or less.
Pile Design Load: Design load per pile as shown on drawings.
Test Loads: Load single test piles to twice required design load for each type pile.
Pile Load Testing: Load and test piles which have been in place not less than 48 hours to
determine the load-settlement relationship of test piles under a vertical axial load complying with
ASTM D 1143.
Apply loads in increments not exceeding 25 percent of allowable pile load.
The test pile will be considered as acceptable for stipulated bearing capacity if total net
settlement, after deducting rebound, does not exceed 0.01 inch per ton of test load.
Test Reports: Prepare reports for each test pile including: date of driving; test pile location;
designation and dimensions of pile; pile point reinforcement and description, if any; total
penetration; starting and finishing times and total driving time and number of blows required for
each foot of penetration, total number of blows, and resistance in blows per inch for the last 6
inches of driving.
Include with test pile reports a record of driving equipment used including: hammer make and
model number, stroke, weight of ram, and rated driving energy; driving cap weight and
description and actual rate of operation of hammer during test pile driving.
END OF SECTION
02360-4
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
SECTION 321200 – ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.
Testing Laboratory Services
B.
Excavation, Site Fill and Rough Grading
SUBMITTALS
A.
Samples:
1.
B.
Sub-Base Course Material (If requested).
Product Data:
1.
Pavement Sealer, including application instructions.
2.
Expansion Joint Filler.
3.
Expansion Joint Sealant.
4.
Pavement Marking Paint.
5.
Precast Concrete Wheel Stops.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
BITUMINOUS PAVING MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Sub-Base Course - Run-Of-Crusher Stone:
1.
Conform with NYSDOT Section 304-2.05 Type 2.
2.
Material shall be stone or blast furnace slag. (Open hearth slag or sand and gravel will
not be accepted.)
3.
100 percent passing 2 inch sieve, 25-60 percent passing 1\4 inch sieve, 5-40 percent
passing No. 40 sieve, 0-10 percent passing No. 200 sieve.
Asphalt Top Course - Vehicular:
1.
Binder: NYSDOT Section 403-1 Binder Type 3 (Item 403.13).
2.
Topping: NYSDOT Section 403-1 Type 7 Top (Item 403.18).
Tack Coat:
NYSDOT Asphalt Emulsion (HFMS-2h) 702-3401.
D.
Bituminous Pavement Sealer:
1.
Acceptable Products:
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
321216 - 1
ASPHALT PAVING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
2.
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
a.
Sealtight Driveway Sealer by W. R. Meadows, Inc.
b.
Playtime Pavement Sealer by Playtime U.S.A., Inc.
c.
Jennite J-16 by Maintenance, Inc.
Material:
a.
A coal tar emulsion material specifically formulated to seal asphalt concrete
pavement.
b.
Add four pounds of sand per gallon of undiluted pavement sealer and mix to a
uniform consistency.
c.
Sand: Clean, hard, and durable, free from clay, salt and organic matter, and well
graded within the following limits:
U.S. Sieve
Total % Passing
No. 16................................................................. 100%
No. 20........................................................80 to 100%
No. 30..........................................................50 to 90%
No. 50..........................................................20 to 60%
No. 100............................................................0 to 5%
d.
2.02
Dilute sealer with potable water in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
A.
B.
Acceptable Products:
1.
Traffic Marking Paint by Sherwin Williams.
2.
Hi-High Plexicolor Line Paint by California Products Corp.
Color: White, Yellow, Blue
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SUBGRADE PREPARATION UNDER PAVEMENT
Fine grade and proof roll all areas in accordance with NYSDOT Specifications 203-3.14.
3.02
BITUMINOUS PAVING
A.
All Courses:
1.
Roll each course with 10 ton roller or equivalent.
2.
Commence rolling along lower edge and continue until edge is thoroughly compacted,
after which gradually advance to the crown.
3.
Continue rolling until the layer has become thoroughly compacted and is true to grade
and cross section.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
321216 - 2
ASPHALT PAVING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
B.
C.
3.03
3.04
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Sub-Base Course:
1.
Place on dry subgrade in maximum lifts of 6".
2.
Remove subgrade material, which becomes mixed with base course and reconstruct.
3.
Minimum Compaction: 95% of maximum density.
4.
Grade Tolerance: Plus or minus 3/8" from indicated grades.
Asphalt Top Course:
1.
Do not install asphalt paving over wet base course or if ambient temperature is below 50
degrees F.
2.
Place in two courses to compacted thickness as detailed.
3.
Where pavement abuts curbs, concrete walks, or existing pavement, apply a liberal
application of tack coat material.
4.
Check with 10' straight edge and correct all depressions and high areas greater than 1/4".
5.
Form or cut all pavement edges to clean, sharp lines or radius, as indicated.
6.
Compaction for wearing course shall be minimum of 92% of Laboratory Specimen
density.
PAVEMENT SEALER
A.
Allow pavement to weather a minimum of four weeks prior to sealing.
B.
Clean surface of dirt and other foreign matter.
C.
Apply two coats of sealer uniformly at a minimum total coverage of 0.18 gallons per square yard
per coat.
D.
Required for all parking areas and lots. (Not on roadways)
E.
Allow a minimum of 24 hours for curing prior to checking sealed pavement for vehicle usage.
PAVEMENT MARKING
A.
Apply one coat of pavement marking paint where indicated.
B.
Apply by brush or zone marking equipment.
END OF SECTION 32 12 16
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
321216 - 3
ASPHALT PAVING
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.
Testing Laboratory Services
B.
Excavation, Site Fill and Rough Grading
C.
Cast-in-Place Concrete
SUBMITTALS
A.
Samples:
1.
B.
Sub-Base Course Material (If requested).
Product Data:
1.
Concrete mix designs
2.
Wheel Stops (if precast concrete selected)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.02
CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND CURB MATERIALS
A.
B.
Sub-Base Course - Run-Of Crusher Stone:
1.
Conform with NYSDOT 304-2.05 Type 2.
2.
Material shall be stone or blast furnace slag. (Open hearth slag or sand and gravel will
not be accepted.)
3.
100 percent passing 2 inch sieve, 25-60 percent passing 1/4 inch sieve, 5-40 percent
passing No. 40 sieve, 0-10 percent passing No. 200 sieve.
Concrete:
Class A, 4000 psi (Refer to Section Cast-in-Place Concrete)
C.
Reinforcement:
(As specified in Section Cast-in-Place Concrete)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SUBGRADE PREPARATION UNDER PAVEMENT
Fine grade and proof roll all areas in accordance with NYSDOT Specifications 203-3.14.
3.02
CONCRETE PAVING - VEHICULAR
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
321313 - 1
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
A.
B.
C.
3.03
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Sub-Base Course:
1.
Place on dry subgrade in maximum lifts of 6" and compact with a 10 ton roller or
equivalent.
2.
Commence rolling along lower edge and continue until edge is thoroughly compacted,
after which gradually advance to the crown.
3.
Continue rolling until the layer has become thoroughly compacted and is true to grade
and cross section.
4.
Remove subgrade material, which becomes mixed with base course and reconstruct.
5.
Minimum Compaction: 95% of maximum density.
6.
Grade Tolerance: Plus or minus 3/8" from indicated grades.
Concrete Reinforcement:
1.
6 x 6 - W2.9 x W2.9 unless other size is indicated.
2.
Top of slab to reinforcement: 1/3 slab depth.
3.
Place reinforcement in accordance with Section 03310.
Concrete:
1.
Place, cure and protect in accordance with Section 03310.
2.
Finish: Screed to grade, wood float and give a final fine broom finish. Edge all sides.
CONCRETE PAVING - SIDEWALKS
A.
B.
C.
Sub-Base Course:
1.
Place on dry subgrade and compact with a 10 ton roller or equivalent. Continue rolling
until course is thoroughly compacted and true to grade and cross section.
2.
Remove subgrade material, which becomes mixed with base course and reconstruct.
3.
Minimum Compaction: 95% of maximum density.
4.
Grade Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/4" from indicated grades.
Concrete Reinforcement:
1.
6 x 6 - W1.4 x W1.4 unless other size is indicated.
2.
Top of slab to reinforcement: 2” minimum cover.
3.
Place reinforcement in accordance with Section Cast-in-Place Concrete
Concrete:
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
321313 - 2
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
3.04
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
1.
Place, cure and protect in accordance with Section Cast-in-Place Concrete
2.
Finish: Screed to grade, wood float and give a fine broom finish perpendicular to
direction of travel.
CONCRETE CURBS
A.
Reinforcement:
One No. 5 bar top and bottom, except provide smooth doweled slip joint at expansion joints.
B.
Concrete:
1.
Place, cure and protect in accordance with Section Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2.
Uniform smooth finish on all exposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 32 13 13
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
321313 - 3
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
SECTION 32 13 73 – JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.
Asphalt Pavement
B.
Concrete Pavement
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
1.
Expansion Joint Filler.
2.
Expansion Joint Sealant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
JOINT SEALANT MATERIALS
A
.
Expansion Joint Filler:
1.
Material:
2.
B.
C.
D.
a.
Fiber expansion joint, ASTM D1751.
b.
1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated.
Acceptable Products:
a.
Fibre Expansion Joint by W. R. Meadows, Inc.
b.
Flexcell by The Celotex Corp.
c.
Accepted equal
Expansion Board and Cap & Pull Off Top:
1.
Greenstreak Removable Top-Expansion Joint Cap #941, #942.
2.
Vinylex Corp. Removable Cap Strip Vp 1391, VP 1393.
3.
Accepted equal.
Doweled Joint Material:
1.
3/4" x 1'-4" smooth dowels with dowel caps equivalent to No. 87 by Heckman Building
Products, Inc.
2.
Grease end of dowel prior to installing cap.
Expansion Joint Sealant:
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
321373 - 1
Joint Sealants
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
1.
2.
E.
Material:
a.
Two component Polyurethane Sealant, self-leveling.
b.
ASTM TT-S-00227E or TT-S-00230C Type 1, Class A.
Acceptable Products:
a.
Pourthane by W. R. Meadows, Inc.
b.
THC-900 by Tremco Manufacturing Company.
c.
Accepted equal.
Concrete Curb Expansion Joint Sealant:
1.
2.
F.
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Material:
a.
Multi-Component Urethane Sealant.
b.
Federal Specification TT-S-00227E, Type II, Class A.
Acceptable Products:
a.
Dymeric by Tremco Manufacturing Company.
b.
Sonolastic NP II by Sonneborn Building Products.
Expansion Joint Backer Rod:
1.
2.
Acceptable Products:
a.
Sonoforam by Sonneborn Building Products.
b.
Ethafoam by Dow Chemical Company.
c.
Sealtight Backer Rod by W. R. Meadows, Inc.
d.
Accepted equal.
Size: To allow 30% compression when inserted in joint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
JOINT SEALANT INSTALLATION
A.
Pre-mold Expansion Joints:
1.
Install expansion joint filler where concrete pavement abuts building foundations, steps,
other concrete structures and elsewhere where indicated.
2.
Remove perforated cap from premold filler.
3.
Install backer rod to uniform depth to allow application of sealant to depth recommended
by the manufacturer for indicated joint width.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
321373 - 2
JOINT SEALANTS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
4.
B.
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Apply manufacturers recommended primer and fill joint with expansion joint sealant.
Dowelled Expansion Joint:
After concrete has cured, remove strip from premolded joint filler and fill joint with sealant flush
with concrete.
C.
D.
Scored Joints:
1.
Use tool, which produces a "V" joint 1/2" depth and not over 1/4" wide.
2.
Locate joints across walks at intervals of 5'-0", unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Walks wider than 5 feet: Provide 5'-0" square pattern, unless otherwise indicated.
Concrete Curb and Walk Expansion Joints:
1.
Construct expansion joints at maximum intervals of 30 feet and at beginning and end of
radius.
2.
Install expansion joint filler to within approximately 3/4" of surface of concrete.
3.
Install backer rod to uniform depth to allow application of sealant to depth recommended
by the manufacturer for indicated joint width.
4.
Apply primer, if recommended by the manufacturer, and fill joint with concrete curb
expansion joint sealant. Tool slightly concave.
END OF SECTION 32 13 73
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
321373 - 3
JOINT SEALANTS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
SECTION 32 92 00 - LANDSCAPING - LAWN
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.
Placing Topsoil: Section Earthmoving
B.
Planting: Section Plantings
JOB CONDITIONS:
A.
Seeding shall be done between April 1 and May 20 or between September 1 and October 15.
B.
Do not broadcast seeding during conditions of high wind or excessive moisture.
PRODUCT DELIVERY
Deliver all materials to the site in original, unopened containers, bearing manufacturer's analysis.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
FERTILIZER
A.
Standard Commercial Fertilizer, containing by weight 10% nitrogen, 10% phosphorous and 10%
potash.
B.
Uniform in composition, dry and free flowing.
COMBINATION WEED KILLER AND FERTILIZER
Commercial weed and feed containing by weight 20% nitrogen, 6% phosphorous and 4% potash.
2.03
LAWN SEED
A.
Seed:
SEED VARIETY
Manhattan Rye
Pennlawn Red Fescue
Kentucky Bluegrass
2.04
% BY WEIGHT PURITY
30
30
40
GERMINATION
95
95
95
85
80
80
STRAW MULCH
A.
Stalks of oats, wheat, rye or other approved crops, which are free from weeds.
B.
Materials which are low grade and unfit for farm use such as "U.S. Sample Grade: will be
acceptable.
C.
Base weight calculations on maximum moisture content of 15%.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
FINE GRADING
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
329200 - 1
TURF
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
3.02
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
A.
Disc, harrow or otherwise completely pulverized to a minimum depth of three inches where
topsoil has been spread and to a depth of six inches where no grade change is required, but new
lawn is required.
B.
Remove all surface stone and other undesirable materials over 1-1/2" in greatest dimension.
C.
Fine grade area to be seeded by machine or hand rakes prior to sowing seed.
D.
Carefully round tops and bottoms of slopes to provide smooth transition curves.
FERTILIZING
Uniformly distribute fertilizer at the rate of 25 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. and work into the top 3" of soil prior to
fine grading.
3.03
SEEDING
A.
Quantity:
250 lbs. per acre.
140 lbs. per acre.
B.
Method:
1.
Place seed to a depth not exceeding 1/4" by mechanical drill or seeders or by
broadcasting.
2.
If seeder is used, make two passes with seeder over all areas, the second pass at right
angle to the direction of the first. Use one-half seed for each pass.
3.
If seed is broadcast, rake or chain harrow seed for proper coverage.
4.
Lightly roll the seeded area and water with a fine spray.
Weight of roller - not more than 65 lbs. nor less than 40 lbs. per foot of width.
C.
3.04
3.05
Mulching:
1.
Uniformly spread mulch over entire seeded area, at the rate of 2 tons per acre,
immediately after rolling and watering.
2.
Remove wind swept mulch piles as necessary to prevent damage to grass.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Mow nearly seeded areas for the first three times. At each mowing, cut to a height of 2" after
growth has reached approximately 3-1/2".
B.
Apply weed and feed at the rate of 176 pounds per acre after the second mowing.
C.
Repair, replace and water seeded areas as necessary until the time of final acceptance.
CRITERIA FOR ACCEPTANCE
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
329200 - 2
TURF
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
A.
3.06
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
All lawn areas must be complete in coverage and vigorous in growth.
CLEAN-UP
Remove from the site and dispose of all sticks, rubbish, stones and other debris collected during raking and
other operations.
END OF SECTION 32 92 00
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
329200 - 3
TURF
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
SECTION 32 93 00 – PLANTS
1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes provisions for the following items:
B.
1.
Trees.
2.
Shrubs.
3.
Plants.
4.
Ground cover.
5.
Soil amendments.
6.
Initial maintenance of landscape materials.
Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.
1.
1.03
Excavation, filling, and rough grading required establishing elevations shown on
drawings is specified in Division Earthmoving.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Subcontract landscape work to a single firm specializing in landscape work.
B.
Source Quality Control:
1.
General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing
authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials.
2.
Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable, submit proof
of non-availability to Engineer, together with proposal for use of equivalent material.
2.
Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer's certified
analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in
accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture
Chemists, wherever applicable.
3.
Topsoil: Before delivery of topsoil, furnish Engineer with written statement giving
location of properties from which topsoil is to be obtained, names and addresses of
owners, depth to be stripped, and crops grown during past 2 years.
4.
Trees, Shrubs and Plants: Provide trees, shrubs, and plants of quantity, size, genus,
species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with
recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
329300 - 1
PLANTS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Stock". Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in recognized nursery in accordance with
good horticultural practice and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as
knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement.
1.04
Label each tree and shrub with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible
designation of botanical and common name.
6.
Inspection: The Architect may inspect trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site
before planting, for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and
quality. Architect retains right to further inspect trees and shrubs for size and condition of
balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or
defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs
immediately from project site.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B
C.
1.05
Plant and Material Certifications:
1.
Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials.
2.
Label data substantiating that plants, trees, shrubs and planting materials comply with
specified requirements.
Planting Schedule: Proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for each type of landscape work
during normal seasons for such work in area of site. Correlate with specified maintenance periods to
provide maintenance from date of substantial completion. Once accepted, revise dates only as
approved in writing, after documentation of reasons for delays.
Maintenance Instructions: Typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by
Owner for maintenance of landscape work for one full year. Submit prior to expiration of required
maintenance period(s).
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name
of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.
B.
Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within 24 hours after stripping. Protect sod against
drying and breaking of rolled strips.
C.
Trees and Shrubs: Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery unless
otherwise approved by Architect. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such manner as to
damage bark, break branches, or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during
delivery. Do not drop balled and burlapped stock during delivery.
D.
Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade,
protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist by covering with mulch,
burlap or other acceptable means of retaining moisture.
E.
1.06
5.
Do not remove container-grown stock from containers until planting time.
JOB CONDITIONS
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
329300 - 2
PLANTS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
A.
Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner, which will
avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until
removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned.
B.
Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill,
adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Engineer before planting.
1.07
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Planting Time: Proceed with, and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of site become
available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required.
B.
1.08
1.
Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material
required.
2.
Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date
of substantial completion.
Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to
planting of lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer. If planting of trees and shrubs occurs
after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting
operations.
SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY
A.
Warranty trees and shrubs, for a period of one year after date of substantial completion, against
defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from neglect by
Owner, abuse or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents which are beyond
Landscape Installer's control.
B.
Remove and replace trees, shrubs, or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthy condition
during warranty period. Make replacements during growth season following end of warranty
period. Replace trees and shrubs, which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period;
unless, in opinion of Engineer, it is advisable to extend warranty period for a full growing season.
1.
Another warranty inspection will be conducted at end of extended warranty period, if
any, to determine acceptance or rejection. Only one replacement (per tree, shrub or
plant) will be required at end of warranty period, except for losses or replacements due to
failure to comply with specified requirements.
2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
TOPSOIL
A.
Topsoil has been (or will be) stockpiled for re-use in landscape work. If quantity of stockpiled
topsoil is insufficient, provide additional topsoil as required to complete landscape work.
B.
Provide new topsoil that is fertile, friable, natural loam, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil,
clay lumps, brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2 inches in
any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth.
1.
Obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having similar soil characteristics to that
found at project site. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well-drained sites where topsoil
occurs in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Do not obtain from bogs or marshes.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
329300 - 3
PLANTS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
2.02
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
SOIL AMENDMENTS
A.
B.
Lime: Natural dolomitic limestone containing not less than 85 percent of total carbonates with a
minimum of 30 percent magnesium carbonates, ground so that not less than 90 percent passes a
10-mesh sieve and not less than 50 percent passes a 100-mesh sieve.
Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade.
C.
Peat Humus: Finely divided peat, so completely decomposed and free of fibers that its biological
identity is lost. Provide in granular form, free of hard lumps and with pH range suitable for
intended use.
D.
Bonemeal: Commercial, raw, finely ground; 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric acid.
E.
Superphosphate: Soluble mixture of treated minerals; 20 percent available phosphoric acid.
F.
Sand: Clean, washed sand, free of toxic materials.
G.
Perlite: Conforming to National Bureau of Standards PS 23.
H.
Vermiculite: Horticultural grade, free of toxic substances.
I.
Sawdust: Rotted sawdust, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic substances and with 7.5
pounds of nitrogen uniformly mixed into each cubic yard of sawdust.
J.
Manure: Well rotted, unleached stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by
volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials and containing no chemicals or ingredients
harmful to plants.
K.
Mulch: Organic mulch free from deleterious materials and suitable for top dressing of trees,
shrubs, or plants and consisting of one of the following:
L.
2.03
1.
Shredded hardwood
2.
Ground or shredded bark
3.
Wood chips
Commercial Fertilizer: Complete fertilizer of neutral character, with some elements derived from
organic sources and containing following percentages of available plant nutrients:
1.
For trees and shrubs, provide fertilizer with not less than 5 percent total nitrogen, 10
percent available phosphoric acid and 5 percent soluble potash.
2.
For lawns, provide fertilizer with percentage of nitrogen required to provide not less than
1 pound of actual nitrogen per 1,000 sq. ft. of lawn area and not less than 4 percent
phosphoric acid and 2 percent potassium. Provide nitrogen in a form that will be
available to lawn during initial period of growth; at least 50 percent of nitrogen to be
organic form.
PLANT MATERIALS
A.
Quality: Provide trees, shrubs, and other plants of size, genus, species, and variety shown and
scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI
Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock".
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
329300 - 4
PLANTS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
B.
Deciduous Trees: Provide trees of height and caliper scheduled or shown and with branching
configuration recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species required. Provide single stem
trees except where special forms are shown or listed.
C.
1.
Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous trees.
2.
Container grown deciduous trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped
deciduous trees subject to specified limitations of ANSI Z60.1 for container stock.
Deciduous Shrubs: Provide shrubs of the height shown or listed and with not less than minimum
number of canes required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and height of shrub required.
D.
1.
Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous shrubs.
2.
Container grown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped
deciduous shrubs subject to specified limitations for container grown stock.
Coniferous and Broadleafed Evergreens: Provide evergreens of sizes shown or listed. Dimensions
indicate minimum spread for spreading and semi-spreading type evergreens and height for other
types, such as globe, dwarf, cone, pyramidal, broad upright, and columnar. Provide normal
quality evergreens with well-balanced form complying with requirements for other size
relationships to the primary dimension shown.
1.
Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) evergreens.
2.
2.05
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Container grown evergreens will be acceptable, subject to specified limitations for
container grown stock.
GROUND COVER
A.
2.06
Provide plants established and well rooted in removable containers or integral peat pots and with
not less than minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for the pot size
shown or listed.
MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS
A.
Wood Headers and Edging: Of sizes shown and following wood species.
1.
All Heart Redwood.
2.
Tidewater Red Cypress, All Heartwood.
3.
Western Red Cedar, All Heart
4.
Southern Pine, pressure treated with water-borne preservative for ground contact use
complying with AWPB LP-22.
5.
B.
Provide wood stakes of the same species, 2" by 2" by 24" long and with galvanized nails
for anchoring headers and edging.
Steel Edging: Commercial steel edging of size shown on drawings fabricated in sections with
loops pressed from or welded to face of sections at 2'- 6" o.c. to receive stakes. Provide tapered
steel stakes 16 inches long. Finish edging sections and stakes with manufacturer's standard
green-black paint.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
329300 - 5
PLANTS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
C.
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Gravel: Water-worn, hard, durable gravel, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign
substances, and of following size range and color:
1.
Size Range: 3 inches maximum, 1-1/2 inches minimum.
2.
Size Range: 1-1/2 inches maximum, 3/4-inch minimum.
3.
Size Range: 3/8-inch maximum, 1/8-inch minimum (pea gravel).
4.
Color: Uniform tan-beige color range acceptable to Architect.
5.
Color: Readily-available natural gravel color range.
D.
Anti-Erosion Mulch: Provide clean, seed-free salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or
barley.
E.
Anti-Desiccant: Emulsion type, film-forming agent designed to permit transpiration, but retard
excessive loss of moisture from plants. Deliver in manufacturer's fully identified containers and
mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Plastic Sheet: Black, weather-resistant polyethylene sheeting, .008 inch (8-mils) thick.
G.
Filtration/Separation Fabric: Water permeable filtration fabric of fiberglass or polypropylene
fabric.
H.
Wrapping: Tree-wrap tape not less than 4 inches wide, designed to prevent borer damage and
winter freezing.
I.
Stakes and Guys: Provide stakes and deadmen of sound new hardwood, treated softwood, or
redwood, free of knot holes and other defects. Provide wire ties and guys of 2-strand, twisted,
pliable galvanized iron wire, not lighter than 12 ga. with zinc-coated turnbuckles. Provide not less
than 1/2 inch diameter rubber or plastic hose, cut to required lengths and of uniform color,
material, and size to protect tree trunks from damage by wires.
3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION - GENERAL
A.
3.02
Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations and
outline areas and secure Architect's acceptance before start of planting work. Make minor
adjustments as may be required.
PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL
A.
Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous
materials harmful or toxic to plant growth.
B.
Mix specified soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates specified. Delay mixing of
fertilizer if planting will not follow placing of planting soil within a few days.
C.
For pit and trench type backfill, mix planting soil prior to backfilling, and stockpile at site.
D.
For planting beds and lawns, mix planting soil either prior to planting or apply on surface of
topsoil and mix thoroughly before planting.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
329300 - 6
PLANTS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
3.04
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
1.
Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing of fertilizer.
2.
Prevent lime from contacting roots of acid-loving plants.
3.
Apply phosphoric acid fertilizer (other than that constituting a portion of complete
fertilizers) directly to subgrade before applying planting soil and tilling.
PREPARATION OF PLANTING BEDS
A.
Loosen subgrade of planting bed areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches using a culti-mulcher or
similar equipment. Remove stones measuring over 1 1/2 inches in any dimension. Remove
sticks, stones, rubbish, and other extraneous matter.
B.
Spread planting soil mixture to minimum depth required to meet lines, grades, and elevations
shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. Place approximately 1/2 of total amount of
planting soil required. Work into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer, then place
remainder of the planting soil.
C.
Dig beds not less than 8 inches deep and mix with specified soil amendments and fertilizers.
D.
Remove 8 inches to 10 inches of soil and replace with prepared planting soil mixture.
E.
Planters: Place not less than 4 inch layer of gravel in bottom of planters, install
filtration/separation fabric and fill with planting soil mixture consisting of 1 part topsoil, 1 part
course sand, 1 part peat humus, and 3 lbs. dolomitic limestone per cubic yard of mix. Place soil in
lightly compacted layers to an elevation 1-1/2 inches below top of planter allowing for natural
settlement.
3.05
EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
A.
Excavate pits, beds, and trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised
at center to provide proper drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation.
1.
For balled and burlapped (B&B trees and shrubs), make excavations at least half again as
wide as the ball diameter and equal to the ball depth, plus following allowance for setting
of ball on a layer of compacted backfill:
a.
2.
Allow for 3 inch thick setting layer of planting soil mixture.
For container grown stock, excavate as specified for balled and burlapped stock, adjusted
to size of container width and depth.
B.
Dispose of subsoil removed from planting excavations. Do not mix with planting soil or use as
backfill.
C.
Fill excavations for trees and shrubs with water and allow water to percolate out prior to planting.
3.06
PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS
A.
Set balled and burlapped (B&B) stock on layer of compacted planting soil mixture, plumb and in
center of pit or trench with top of ball at same elevation as adjacent finished landscape grades.
Remove burlap from sides of balls; retain on bottoms. When set, place additional backfill around
base and sides of ball, and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
329300 - 7
PLANTS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
When excavation is approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill.
Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing final layer of backfill.
B.
C.
D.
Set container grown stock, as specified, for balled burlapped stock, except cut cans on 2 sides with
an approved can cutter; remove bottoms of wooden boxes after partial backfilling so as not to
damage root balls.
Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching.
Mulch pits, trenches, and planted areas. Provide not less than following thickness of mulch, and
work into top of backfill and finish level with adjacent finish grades.
1.
E.
Provide 3 inches thickness of mulch.
Apply anti-desiccant, using power spray, to provide an adequate film over trunks, branches, stems,
twigs and foliage.
1.
If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved when in full-leaf, spray with anti-desiccant at
nursery before moving and spray again 2 weeks after planting.
i. Prune, thin out, and shape trees and shrubs in accordance with standard
horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread.
Unless otherwise directed by Architect, do not cut tree leaders, and
remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees, if any.
Prune shrubs to retain natural character.
ii. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting
from improper pruning.
iii. Wrap tree trunks of 2 inches caliper and larger. Start at ground and
cover trunk to height of first branches and securely attach. Inspect tree
trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation and take
corrective measures before wrapping.
iv. Guy and stake trees immediately after planting, as indicated.
3.07
PLANTING GROUND COVER
A.
Space ground cover plants not more than 24 inches o.c.
B.
Dig holes large enough to allow for spreading of roots and backfill with planting soil. Work soil
around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold
water. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover crowns of plants with wet soils.
C.
Mulch areas between ground cover plants; place not less than 2 inches thick.
3.08
MAINTENANCE
A.
B.
Begin maintenance immediately after planting.
Maintain trees, shrubs, and other plants until final acceptance, but in no case, less than following
period:
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
329300 - 8
PLANTS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
1.
C.
3.09
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
60 days after substantial completion of planting.
Maintain trees, shrubs, and other plants by pruning, cultivating, and weeding as required for
healthy growth. Restore planting saucers. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset
trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged
wrappings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.
CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A.
During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.
B.
Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by
other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and
maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.
3.10
INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A.
When landscape work is completed, including maintenance, Architect will, upon request, make an
inspection to determine acceptability.
1.
B.
Landscape work may be inspected for acceptance in portions as agreeable to Architect,
provided each portion of work offered for inspection is complete, including maintenance.
When inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and
continue specified maintenance until reinspected by Architect and found to be acceptable.
Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from project site.
END OF SECTION 32 93 00
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
329300 - 9
PLANTS
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
SECTION 333111 - SANITARY SEWERAGE
1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
1.03
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes sanitary sewerage system piping and appurtenances from a
point 5 feet outside the building to the point of disposal.
B.
Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
section:
1.
Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation and backfill required for
sanitary sewerage system piping and structures.
2.
Division 2 Section "Storm Sewerage" for storm sewer connecting to
sanitary sewerage system.
3.
Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for cast-in-place concrete manholes.
4.
Division 15 Section "Sanitary Drainage and Vent Systems" for building
sanitary drains.
5.
Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Systems" for building sanitary
drains.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B.
Product data for drainage piping specialties.
C.
Shop drawings for precast concrete sanitary manholes, including frames and
covers.
D.
Shop drawings for cast-in-place concrete sanitary manholes, including frames and
covers.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
333111 - 1
SANITARY SEWERAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
1.04
1.05
E.
Coordination drawings showing pipe sizes and manholes, locations, and
elevations. Include details of underground structures and connections. Show
other piping in the same trench and clearances from sanitary sewerage system
piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate
structures.
F.
Coordination profile drawings showing sanitary sewerage system piping in
elevation. Draw profiles at a horizontal scale of not less than 1 inch equals 50 feet
and a vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate pipe and
underground structures. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other
utilities crossing sewerage system piping.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Environmental Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of local
environmental agency regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage systems.
B.
Utility Compliance: Comply with local utility regulations and standards
pertaining to sanitary sewerage systems.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify
existing utility locations. Verify that sanitary system piping may be installed in
compliance with original design and referenced standards.
1.
1.06
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Locate existing sanitary sewerage system piping and structures that are to
be abandoned and closed.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate connection to public sewer with utility company.
B.
Coordinate with interior building sanitary drainage piping.
C.
Coordinate with other utility work.
2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
333111 - 2
SANITARY SEWERAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but
are not limited to the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1.
2.
2.02
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Cleanouts:
a.
Ancon, Inc.
b.
Josam Co.
c.
Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co.
d.
Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe.
e.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
Underground Warning Tapes:
a.
Allen Systems, Inc.; Reef Industries, Inc.
b.
Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div.
c.
Calpico, Inc.
d.
Carlton Industries, Inc.
e.
EMED Co., Inc.
f.
Seton Name Plate Co.
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
General: Provide pipe and pipe fitting materials compatible with each other.
Where more than one type of materials or products is indicated, selection is
Installer's option.
B.
Hub and Spigot Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, gray cast iron, for
compression gasket joints.
1.
Class: Service.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
333111 - 3
SANITARY SEWERAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
C.
D.
2.03
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
2.
Class: Extra Heavy.
3.
Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber, thickness to match class of pipe.
PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for
solvent cement or elastomeric gasket joints.
1.
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
2.
Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
Couplings: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless steel band assembly
fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined.
1.
Sleeves: ASTM C 425, rubber for vitrified clay pipe; ASTM C 443,
rubber for concrete pipe; ASTM C 564, rubber for cast-iron soil pipe; and
ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal for plastic pipe. Sleeves for dissimilar or
other pipe materials shall be compatible with pipe materials being joined.
2.
Bands: Stainless steel, one at each pipe insert.
MANHOLES
A.
Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast reinforced concrete, of depth
indicated with provision for rubber gasket joints.
1.
Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch
minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having a separate
base slab or section with integral floor.
2.
Riser Section: 4-inch minimum thickness; 48-inch diameter, and lengths to
provide depth indicated.
3.
Top Section: Eccentric cone type, unless concentric cone or flat-slab-top
type is indicated. Top of cone to match grade rings.
4.
Grade Rings: Provide 2 or 3 reinforced concrete rings, of 6 to 9-inches
total thickness and match 24-inch diameter frame cover.
5.
Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber.
6.
Steps: Cast into base, riser, and top sections sidewall at 12 to 16-inch
intervals.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
333111 - 4
SANITARY SEWERAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.04
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
7.
Pipe connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe
connecting to base section.
8.
Channel and Bench: Concrete
Cast-in-Place Manholes: Reinforced concrete of dimensions and with
appurtenances indicated.
1.
Bottom, Walls, and Top: Reinforced concrete.
2.
Channel and Bench: Concrete.
3.
Steps: Cast into sidewall at 12 to 16-inch intervals.
Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi.
1.
Cement: ASTM C 150, type II.
2.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4.
Water: Potable.
Reinforcement: Steel conforming to the following:
1.
Fabric; ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, plain.
2.
Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
Manhole Steps: Wide enough for a man to place both feet on one step and
designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step.
1.
Material: Ductile iron or cast aluminum.
2.
Material: Steel-reinforced plastic.
Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, heavy duty, ductile
iron, 24-inch inside diameter by 7 to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width
flange, and 26-inch diameter cover, indented top design, with lettering
“SANITARY SEWER” cast unto cover.
CLEANOUTS
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
333111 - 5
SANITARY SEWERAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
A.
2.05
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
General: Provide cast-iron ferrule and countersunk brass cleanout plug, with
round cast-iron access frame and heavy-duty, secured, scoriated cast-iron cover.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Metallic-Lined Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape
with metallic core, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid green in color with
continuously printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - SEWER LINE
BURIED BELOW."
3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED SANITARY SEWERAGE
SYSTEMS
A.
Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock-free foundation,
throughout the length of the pipe.
B.
Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes
are to be laid, and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level.
C.
Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped sand
backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads and to
ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
PIPE APPLICATIONS FOR UNDERGROUND SANITARY SEWERS
A.
Pipe Sizes 2 to 15 Inches: Service-class hub and spigot cast-iron soil pipe and
fittings.
B.
Pipe Sizes 15 Inches and Smaller: PVC solvent cement joint sewer pipe and
fittings.
C.
Pipe Sizes 15 Inches and Smaller: PVC gasket joint sewer pipe and fittings.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the
general location and arrangement of the underground sanitary sewerage system
piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design
considerations. Install the piping as indicated, to the extent practical.
B.
Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment
indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
333111 - 6
SANITARY SEWERAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other
installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint
as it is completed.
3.04
C.
Use manholes for changes in direction, except where a fitting is indicated. Use
fittings for branch connections, except where direct tap into existing sewer is
indicated.
D.
Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different size or
material of pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in the
direction of flow is prohibited.
E.
Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent,
except where indicated otherwise.
F.
Extend sanitary sewerage system piping to connect to building sanitary drains, of
sizes and in locations indicated.
G.
Install 1-inch-thick extruded polystyrene over underground building drain piping
not under building. Width of insulation shall extend minimum of 12 inches
beyond each side of pipe. Install directly over and center on pipe center line.
H.
Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be
disturbed, by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A.
Join and install hub and spigot cast-iron soil pipe and fittings with compression
gaskets in accordance with CISPI "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,
Volume I." Use "Service" or "Extra Heavy" class gaskets to match class of pipe
and fittings.
1.
B.
Install polyethylene encasement in accordance with AWWA C105.
Join and install PVC pipe as follows:
1.
Solvent cement joint pipe and fittings, joining with solvent cement in
accordance with ASTM D 2855 and ASTM F 402.
2.
Pipe and gasketed fittings, joining with elastomeric seals in accordance
with ASTM D 3212.
3.
Installation in accordance with ASTM D 2321.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
333111 - 7
SANITARY SEWERAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
C.
3.05
A.
Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so that finished
work will conform as nearly as practicable to the requirements specified for new
work.
B.
Make branch connections from side into existing 24-inch or larger piping or to
underground structures by cutting opening into existing unit sufficiently large to
allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of
connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and
be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or
structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum
length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to
undisturbed ground.
1.
Provide concrete that will attain minimum 28-day compressive strength of
3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Use epoxy bonding compound as interface between new and existing
concrete and piping materials.
Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering
while making tap connections. Remove debris, concrete, or other extraneous
material that may accumulate.
INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.08
Install cleanouts and extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade as indicated.
Set cleanout frame and cover in concrete block 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep, except
where location is in concrete paving. Set top of cleanout 1 inch above
surrounding earth grade or flush with grade when installed in paving.
TAP CONNECTIONS
C.
3.07
Join different types of pipe with standard manufactured couplings and fittings
intended for that purpose.
CLEANOUTS
A.
3.06
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back-filling of trench
for underground water service piping. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade,
directly over piping.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
333111 - 8
SANITARY SEWERAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
A.
Testing: Perform testing of completed piping in accordance with local authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Cleaning: Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous
material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each
joint as it is completed.
C.
1.
In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning.
2.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of day or whenever work
stops.
3.
Flush piping between manholes, if required by local authority, to remove
collected debris.
Interior Inspection: Inspect piping to determine whether line displacement or
other damage has occurred.
1.
Make inspections after pipe between manholes and manhole locations has
been installed and approximately 2 feet of backfill is in place, and again at
completion of project.
2.
If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration
or other defects correct such defects, and reinspect.
END OF SECTION 333111
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
333111 - 9
SANITARY SEWERAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
334111 - SITE DRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.
Excavation for Site Drainage Work: Earthwork
B.
Backfill Above Bedding Material At Storm Drain Lines: Earthwork
C.
Backfill Above Filter Material at Foundation Drains: Earthwork
D.
Storm Drain Lines Within Building and Extending 5-Foot Outside of Building
Wall: Interior Plumbning
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Code and Regulations:
Comply with all applicable codes, rules and regulations pertaining to storm
drainage system.
B.
Coordination:
Coordinate location and inverts of storm lines at 5 feet outside building with
plumber.
C.
Verification:
Check inverts of all existing storm structures and pipes to which new lines are to
be connected and notify the Owner's Representative of any discrepancy prior to
commencement of work.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
For precast concrete drainage structures.
B.
Product Data:
For all standard manufactured products.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
334111 - 1
SITE DRAINAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Precast Concrete Drainage Structures (Manholes, Catch Basins)
1.
2.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
Kistner Concrete Products, Inc.
b.
Warren Concrete Products, Inc.
c.
United States Concrete Pipe Co.
d.
Accepted equal.
Material:
a.
In pavement areas all structures shall be able to support HS-20
loads.
b.
Comply with ASTM C-478 Specification for Precast Reinforced
Concrete Manhole Risers and Tops.
c.
Joints between units may be one of the following:
d.
B.
(1)
Flexible watertight rubber gaskets.
(2)
Portland Cement Mortar.
(3)
Approved Joint Compound.
Include aluminum or polypropylene encased steel steps and cast
iron traps where indicated and include all required openings.
Storm Drain Piping:
1.
Cast Iron Pipe
a.
Pipe-Schedule 40, ASTM-74, soil pipe tar coated inside and
outside.
b.
Joints – lead and oakum caulked or push-on type POJ-2.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
334111 - 2
SITE DRAINAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
2.
3.
Concrete Pipe
a.
Pipe – ASTM C 76, Class IV.
b.
Joints – seal with flexible watertight rubber gaskets, ASTM C443.
HDPE Pipe
a.
b.
4.
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Conforming to:
(1)
ASTM D1056: Specification for flexible cellular materials,
sponge or expanded rubber.
(2)
ASTM D1248: Specification for polyethylene plastics,
molding and extrusion materials.
(3)
ASTM D3350: Specification for polyethylene plastics,
pipe and fittings materials.
(4)
ASTM D2321: Practice for underground installation of
flexible thermoplastic sewer pipe.
(5)
AASHTO M252: Specification for corrugated polyethylene
drainage tubing, 3- to 10-inch diameter.
(6)
AASHTO M294: Specification for corrugated polyethylene
pipe, 12- to 36-inch diameter.
Joints - seal with flexible silt-tight rubber gaskets, ASTM D 3212.
PVC Plastic Pipe
a.
Material:
Polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe with necessary fittings conforming
to ASTM D3034, SDR35.
b.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
Acceptable Manufacturers:
(1)
Advanced Drainage
(2)
Triangle Pipe and Tube Co.
(3)
Carlon/An Indian Head Co.
334111 - 3
Systems, Inc.
SITE DRAINAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
(4)
5.
Accepted Equals
Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP)
a.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
b.
C.
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
(1)
Contech
(2)
Accepted Equal
Pipe Material: 14-gauge aluminized steel, Type 2.
Drainage Structure Castings:
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
Neenah Foundry Company.
b.
Flockhart Foundry Company.
c.
Accepted equal.
2.
Catalog numbers on drawings are those of Neenah Foundry Company
unless otherwise noted.
3.
Material: Gray Iron Castings, ASTM A-48, Class 30.
4.
Finish Coating:
One coat of high grade bituminous asphalt paint, Federal Specification
Mil-C-450B.
D.
E.
Bedding Material:
1.
Crushed aggregate conforming with NYSDOT Section 703-02.
2.
No. 1 crushed stone (NYSDOT Material Designation 623.03) or No. 1
washed crushed gravel (NYSDOT Material Designation 623.02).
3.
100 percent passing 1" sieve, 90-100 percent passing 1/2" sieve, 0-15
percent passing 1/4" sieve.
Filter Material:
1.
Crushed aggregate conforming with NYSDOT Section 703-02.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
334111 - 4
SITE DRAINAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
2.
No. 1 crushed stone (NYSDOT Material Designation 623.03) or No. 1
washed Crushed Gravel (NYSDOT Material Designation 623.02).
3.
100 percent passing 1" sieve, 90-100 percent passing 1/2" sieve, 0-15
percent passing 1/4" sieve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.03
STORM LINES
A.
Fine grade trench bottom with hand tools to an elevation 6" below the bottom
elevation of the pipe.
B.
Place bedding material and thoroughly compact. Thickness: 6" after compaction.
C.
Do not lay pipe in wet trench and do not permit water in trench until joints are
completed.
D.
Lay pipe to line and grade with inside joints smooth and uniform. A perfect circle
shall be evident when lamped.
E.
Upon completion of lines or portion thereof test for watertightness. Notify
Owner's Representative so he may observe testing. Maintain head of water one
foot above highest point of line.
F.
Backfill with bedding material to spring line of pipe and compact.
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURE
A.
Where pipes are to be connected to existing manholes or other structures, and
where no stub or opening has been provided for the connection, make an opening
of minimum diameter through the sidewall of the structure for inserting the pipe.
B.
After inserting the pipe, place standard manhole pipe gasket around pipe and
completely fill the space remaining outside the pipe with a non-shrink mortar.
C.
Make watertight to prevent leakage of water into the manhole or structure.
D.
Alter concrete paved inverts in existing structures to form a trough, so that new
connections enter the existing pipe smoothly and in the direction of flow.
E.
Make connections to existing manholes or structures carefully to avoid damage to
the manhole or structure.
F.
Repair any damage resulting from the work.
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
334111 - 5
SITE DRAINAGE
Chaintreuil | Jensen | Stark Architects
Buffalo River Landing
G.
CJS Project No. 1209
Savarino Compaines
Prevent debris from entering existing pipes or structures.
END OF SECTION 334111
1209 / Buffalo River Landing
334111 - 6
SITE DRAINAGE